Bahá’í World/Volume 17/Bahá’í bibliography

←Previous

The Bahá’í World Volume 17

Next→

Proofread once

[Page 484]

1. BAHÁ’U’LLÁH’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS

Alváḥ-i-Laylatu’l-Quds. Aṣl-i-Kullu’l-Khayr. Az-Bágh-i-Iláhí. Báz-Áv-u-Bidih-Jámí. Bishárát (Glad Tidings). Chihár-Vádí (Four Valleys). Haft-Vádí (Seven Valleys). Ḥalih-Ḥalih-Yá-Bishárát. Ḥúr-i-‘Ujáb. Ḥurúfát-i-‘Állín. Ishráqát (Splendours). Kalimát-i-Firdawsíyyih (Words of Paradise). Kalimát-i-Maknúnih (Hidden Words). Kitáb-i-‘Ahd (Book of Covenant). Kitáb-i-Aqdas (Most Holy Book). Kitáb-i-Badí‘. Kitáb-i-Íqán (Book of Certitude). Lawḥ-i-‘Abdu’l-‘Azíz-Va-Vukalá. Lawḥ-i-‘Abdu’l-Vahháb. Lawḥ-i-‘Abdu’r-Razzáq. Lawḥ-i-Aḥbáb. Lawḥ-i-Aḥmad (Tablet of Aḥmad). Lawḥ-i-Amváj. Lawḥ-i-Anta’l-Káfí. Lawḥ-i-Aqdas. Lawḥ-i-Ashraf. Lawḥ-i-‘Áshiq-va-Ma‘shúq. Lawḥ-i-Áyiy-i-Núr. Lawḥ-i-Bahá. Lawḥ-i-Baqá. Lawḥ-i-Basíṭatu’l-Ḥaqíqih. Lawḥ-i-Bismilih. Lawḥ-i-Bulbulu’l-Firáq. Lawḥ-i-Burhán. Lawḥ-i-Dunyá (Tablet of the World). Lawḥ-i-Fitnih. Lawḥ-i-Ghulámu’l-Khuld. Lawḥ-i-Ḥabíb. Lawḥ-i-Haft-Pursish. Lawḥ-i-Ḥajj. Lawḥ-i-Hawdaj. Lawḥ-i-Ḥikmat (Tablet of Wisdom). Lawḥ-i-Hirtík. Lawḥ-i-Ḥúríyyih.

Lawḥ-i-Ḥusayn. Lawḥ-i-Ibn-i-Dhi’b (Epistle to the Son of the Wolf). Lawḥ-i-Ittiḥád. Lawḥ-i-Jamál. Lawḥ-i-Karím. Lawḥ-i-Karmil. Lawḥ-i-Kullu’ṭ-Ṭa‘ám. Lawḥ-i-Málikih (Tablet to Queen Victoria). Lawḥ-i-Malik-i-Rús (Tablet to the Czar of Russia). Lawḥ-i-Malláḥu’l-Quds (Tablet of the Holy Mariner). Lawḥ-i-Mánikjí-Ṣáḥib. Lawḥ-i-Maqṣúd. Lawḥ-i-Maryam. Lawḥ-i-Mawlúd. Lawḥ-i-Mubáhilih. Lawḥ-i-Nápulyún (First Tablet to Napoleon III). Lawḥ-i-Nápulyún II (Second Tablet to Napoleon III). Lawḥ-i-Náṣir. Lawḥ-i-Nuqṭih. Lawḥ-i-Páp (Tablet to the Pope). Lawḥ-i-Pisar-‘Amm. Lawḥ-i-Qiná‘. Lawḥ-i-Quds. Lawḥ-i-Rafí‘. Lawḥ-i-Ra’ís (Tablet to Ra’ís). Lawḥ-i-Raqshá. Lawḥ-i-Rasúl. Lawḥ-i-Rúḥ. Lawḥ-i-Ru’yá. Lawḥ-i-Ṣaḥáb. Lawḥ-i-Salmán I. Lawḥ-i-Salmán II. Lawḥ-i-Sámsún. Lawḥ-i-Sayyáḥ. Lawḥ-i-Shaykh-Fání. Lawḥ-i-Sulṭán. Lawḥ-i-Tawḥíd. Lawḥ-i-Ṭibb. Lawḥ-i-Tuqá.

[Page 485]

Lawḥ-i-Yúsuf.	Súriy-i-Ḥajj II.
Lawḥ-i-Zaynu’l-Muqarrabín.	Súriy-i-Haykal.
Lawḥ-i-Zíyárih.	Súriy-i-Ḥifẓ.
Madínatu’r-Riḍá.	Súriy-i-Hijr.
Madínatu’t-Tawḥíd.	Súriy-i-‘Ibád.
Mathnaví.	Súriy-i-Ism.
Munájátháy-i-Ṣíyám.	Súriy-i-Ismuna’l-Mursil.
‎Qad-Iḥtaraqua’l Qad-Iḥtaraqa’l‎-Mukhliṣún.	Súriy-i-Javád.
Qaṣídy-i-Varqá’íyyih.	Súriy-i-Khiṭáb.
Rashḥ-i-‘Amá.	Súriy-i-Ma‘ání.
Riḍvánu’l-‘Adl.	Súriy-i-Man‘.
Riḍvánu’l-Iqrár.	Súriy-i-Mulúk.
Ṣaḥífiy-i-Shaṭṭíyyih.	Súriy-i-Nidá.
Ṣalát-i-Mayyit (Prayer for the Dead).	Súriy-i-Nuṣḥ.
Sáqí-Az-Ghayb-i-Baqá.	Súriy-i-Qadír.
Shikkar-Shikan-Shavand.	Súriy-i-Qahír.
Subḥána-Rabbíya’l-A‘lá.	Súriy-i-Qalam.
Subḥánaka-Yá-Hú.	Súriy-i-Qamíṣ.
Súratu’lláh.	Súriy-i-Ṣabr.
Súriy-i-Aḥzán.	Súriy-i-Sulṭán.
Súriy-i-Amín.	Súriy-i-Vafá.
Súriy-i-Amr.	Súriy-i-Zíyárih.
Súriy-i-A‘ráb.	Súriy-i-Zabur.
Súriy-i-Aṣḥáb.	Súriy-i-Ẓuhúr.
Súriy-i-Asmá’.	Tafsír-i-Hú.
Súriy-i-Bayán.	Tafsír-i-Ḥurúfát-i-Muqaṭṭa‘ih.
Súriy-i-Damm.	Tafsír-i-Súriy-i-Va’sh-Shams.
Súriy-i-Dhabíḥ.	Tajallíyát (Effulgences).
Súriy-i-Dhibḥ.	Ṭarázát (Ornaments).
Súriy-i-Dhikr.	Zíyárat-Námih (The Tablet of Visitation).
Súriy-i-Faḍl.	Zíyárat-Námiy-i-Awlíyá.
Súriy-i-Fatḥ.	Zíyárat-Námiy-i-Bábu’l-Báb va Quddús.
Súriy-i-Fu’ád.	Zíyárat-Námiy-i-Bayt.
Súriy-i-Ghuṣn (Tablet of the Branch).	Zíyárat-Námiy-i-Maryam.
Súriy-i-Ḥajj I.	Zíyárat-Námiy-i-Siyyidu’sh-Shuhadá.

(Note: the works of Bahá’u’lláh, translated into English by Shoghi Effendi, are listed on p. 488. under the subheading, ‘Translations’.)

COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH

Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh revealed after the Kitáb-i-Aqdas

2. THE BÁB’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS

The Arabic Bayán.	Khasá’il-i-Sab‘ih.
Commentary on the Súrih of Kawthar.	Kitáb-i-Asmá’.
Commentary on the Súrih of Va’l-‘Aṣr.	Kitáb-i-Panj-Sha’n.
Dalá’il-i-Sab‘ih.	Kitábu’r-Rúḥ.
Epistles to Muḥammad Sháh and Ḥájí Mírzá Áqásí.	Lawḥ-i-Ḥurúfát.
	The Persian Bayán.

[Page 486]Qayyumu’l-Asmá’. Risáliy-i-’Adliyyih. Risáliy-i-Dhahabiyyih. Risáliy-i-Fiqhiyyih. Risáliy-i-Furú’--’Adliyyih. Şahifatu’l-Haramayn. Şahify-i-Ja’fariyyih. Şahifiy-i-Makhzúnih. Şahifiy-i-Radaviyyih. Súriy-i-Tawhid. Tafsir-i-Nubuvvat-i-Khássih. Ziyarat-i-Shah-’Abdu’l-’Azim.

(Note: The Báb Himself states in one passage of the Persian Bayán that His writings comprise no less than 500,000 verses.)

COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH

Selections from the Writings of the Báb

IN PERSIAN AND ARABIC

Ad’iyyih va Munáját. Alváh-i-Tablighi-i-Imríká. Alváḥ-i-Vasáyá. Khitábát dar Urúpá va Imríká. Lawh-i-Aflákiyyih. Lawh-i-’Ahd va Mitháq (Imríká). Lawh-i-’Ammih. Lawh-i-Ayát. Lawh-i-Du-Niday-i-Faláh va Najáḥ. Lawh-i-Dr. Forel. Lawh-i-Haft Sham’. Lawh-i-Hizár Bayti. Lawh-i-Khurásán. Lawh-i-Lahih. Law-i-Mahfil-i-Shawr. Lawh-i-Muhabbat. Lawh-i-Tanzih va Taqdis. Lawh-i-Tarbiyat. Madaniyyih. Makátíb-i-’Abdu’l-Bahá. Maqáliy-i-Sayyah. Mufávadát. Sharh-i-Fass-i-Nigin-i-Ism-i-A’zam. Sharh-i-Shuhadáy-i-Yazd va Isfahan. Siyasiyyih. Tadhkiratu’l-Vafá. Tafsir-i-Bismi’lláhi’r-Rahmáni’r-Rahim. Tafsir-i-Kuntu Kanzan Makhfiyyan. Zíyárat Námih.

IN ENGLISH

The Secret of Divine Civilization. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette Illinois, 1957. Originally published by Cope & Fenwick, London, 1910, under the title The Mysterious Forces of Civilization. Subsequently published by Bahá’ Publishing Society, Chicago, 1918.

Some Answered Questions. First printed by Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trubner and Co. Ltd., London, 1908. Subsequently published by Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1918, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Tablet to the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, the Hague. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1930.

Tablet to Dr. Forel. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1930.

Tablets of the Divine Plan. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1959.

A Traveller’s Narrative. Translated into English by Edward Granville Browne under the title A Traveller’s Narrative written to illustrate The Episode of the Báb. Cambridge University Press, 1891. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1930.

Will and Testament. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1925, 1935. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944, 1968, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Memorials of the Faithful. Translated from the original Persian and annotated by Marzieh Gail. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1971. [Page 487]

COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH

Foundations of World Unity; a selection of letters and public addresses. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1945.

Paris Talks; a compilation of His addresses in Paris. G. Bell and Son Ltd., London, 1923. Subsequently published by Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 10th edition 1961; and in the United States under the title The Wisdom of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá; Brentano’s, New York, 1924.

The Promulgation of Universal Peace, vols. I, II; a compilation of His addresses in Canada and the United States in 1912. Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1922 and 1925.

Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá; compiled from His correspondence with individual believers, groups and Assemblies of the East and West. World Centre Publications, 1978.

Tablets of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, vols. I, II, III; a compilation of His letters to individual believers in America. Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1909, 1915, 1916.

4. SOME COMPILATIONS FROM THE WRITINGS OF BAHÁ’U’LLÁH, THE BÁB AND ABDU’L-BAHÁ

The Bahá’í Revelation. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 1955.

Bahá’í World Faith. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1943, 1956.

The Covenant of Bahá’u’ulláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 1950; revised, 1963.

The Divine Art of Living. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944; revised, 1960.

Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939, 1952, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938, 1954, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

The Reality of Man. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1931; revised, 1962.

Selections from the Writings of the Báb. World Centre Publications, 1976.

Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh revealed after the Kitab-i-Aqdas. World Centre Publications; 1978.

(Note: A large number of Prayer Books compiled of prayers revealed by Bahá’u’lláh, the Báb and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá has been published by Bahá’í Publishing Trusts and National Spiritual Assemblies throughout the world.)

5. SHOGHI EFFENDI’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS

The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh. February, 1929.

The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, Further Considerations. March, 1930.

The Goal of a New World Order. November, 1931.

The Golden Age of the Cause of Bahá’u’lláh. March, 1932.

America and the Most Great Peace. April, 1933.

The Dispensation of Bahá’u’lláh. February, 1934.

The Unfoldment of World Civilization. March, 1936.

(Note: The above seven essays have been published in one volume entitled The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938. Revised edition, 1955; second printing, 1965.)

The Advent of Divine Justice. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939.

The Promised Day is Come. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1941.

God Passes By. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944. [Page 488]

TRANSLATIONS (see note p. 485)

The Dawn-Breakers, by Muḥammad-i-Zarandí, surnamed Nabíl-i-A’zam. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1932, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1941, 1953, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939, 1952, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh (Arabic and Persian). Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1924. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, London, 1932, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Kitab-i-İqán, by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1931, 1950, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938, 1962, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Tablet to the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, The Hague, by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, dated December 17, 1919. Published as a leaflet by Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London.

Tablet to Dr. Forel, by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Published in Star of the West, vol. XIV, no. 4, July 1923, p. 101. Subsequently published as a leaflet by various Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

Tablet of the Holy Mariner, by Bahá’u’lláh. Published in Star of the West, vol. XIII, no. 4, May 1922, p. 75. Subsequently published in Prayer Books and other compilations.

The Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1925, 1935. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944, 1968, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.

SOME COMPILATIONS FROM HIS WRITINGS

Bahá’í Administration. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1928, 1960.

Messages to America (1932-1946). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1947.

Messages to the Bahá’í World (1950-1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1958.

Principles of Bahá’í Administration. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, England, 1950.

Guidance for Today and Tomorrow. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 1953.

Citadel of Faith (Messages to America 1947-1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1965.

Messages to Canada. National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Canada, 1965.

Letters from the Guardian to Australia and New Zealand (1923-1957). National Spiritual Assembly of Australia, 1970.

Dawn of a New Day-Messages to India (1923-1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, New Delhi, 1970.

Directives from the Guardian. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, New Delhi, 1970.

High Endeavours: Messages to Alaska. National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Alaska, 1976.

Call to the Nations. World Centre Publications, 1977. [Page 489]

ACHIEVEMENTS OF THE FIVE YEAR PLAN Ridván 1974-Ridván 1979

PREVIOUS volumes of The Bahá’í World list more than 550 languages, major dialects and scripts into which the Sacred Writings and other literature of the Bahá’í Faith have been translated. The promotion of such translations has been an important objective of the international teaching plans conducted by the Bahá’í world community over the years, with the purpose of making available to the believers in many lands the Scriptures of their faith in their own tongues. Information about the languages in which Bahá’í literature is currently available may be obtained from the Bahá’í World Centre, P.O. Box 155, 31 001 Haifa, Israel.

Listed below, by continent, are the languages and dialects into which translations of Bahá’í literature were first made, and those in which literature has been added, during the period between Ridvan 1974 and Ridván 1979. These accomplishments include translations, publications and recordings on tape, although not all have been achieved in each of the languages listed.

The usage and spelling chosen for primary listings and indication of dialect relationships follow, where possible, C. F. and F. M. Voegelin, Classification and Index of the World's Languages. It is recognized by the compilers of this list that these designations sometimes do not reflect the name by which a particular language or dialect is best known, or the designation preferred by its speakers. Some variant names and spellings, including variants previously reported, appear in parentheses.

The major countries, islands or territories where the languages are spoken are shown in italics. Where no such entry is given, the places where the language is spoken are so numerous and so widely scattered that to list them would be unwieldy; many of these languages are found world-wide.

A. AFRICA

Newly Translated:

1. Anyi: Baule (Baoulé) dialect (Ivory Coast) 2. Asu (Pare; Kipare) (Tanzania) 3. Awing (Cameroons) 4. Bambara (Mali; Sénégal; Upper Volta) 5. Bamoun (Cameroons) 6. Bargu (Bargou; Bariba) (Benin; Togo; Nigeria) 7. Bassa (Gbasa) (Liberia) 8. te-Beembe (Kibembe) (Zaire) 9. Berba (Benin) 10. Bete (Ivory Coast) 11. Bini (Edo) (Nigeria) 12. *Bulu (Boulou) (Cameroons or Gabon) 13. Busoong (Kuba; Bakuba; Bushong) (Zaire) 14. Chiripon-Lete-Anum (Cherepong: Guan) (Ghana) 15. Dan (Gio; Guere; Yacouba) (Ivory Coast; Liberia) 16. Diola: Kasa (Casa) dialect (The Gambia) 17. Ewe: Watyi (Ouatchi; Waci) dialect (Benin; Togo) 18. Frafra (Ghana) 19. Gurma (Gourma; Gourmantche) (Togo; Upper Volta) 20. Herero (Namibia (South West Africa) 21. ljo (Ijaw) (Nigeria) 22. Kaba (Sara Kaba) (Central African Empire; Chad) 23. Kasem (Kassème; Kasena; Kassena) (Ghana; Upper Volta) 24. Kefa (Kaffa; Kaffigna) (Ethiopia) 25. ra-Kpa (Bafia) (Cameroons) 26. Krio (West Africa) 27. Kusal (Kusaal) (Ghana; Upper Volta) 28. Kwakum (Bakoum) (Cameroons) 29. Kweni (Gouro) (Ivory Coast) 30. Maka (Makaa) (Cameroons)

Foundations of Linguistics Series; Elsevier, New York and Amsterdam; 1977.

• Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

[Page 490]31. Mano (Guinea; Liberia) 32. Moba (Ghana; Togo; Upper Volta) 33. Nankanse (Nankani) (Ghana; Upper Volta) 34. Riff (Tarifit) (Algeria; Morocco) 35. Sara: Sara-Majingai dialect (Central African Empire; Chad) 36. Somba: Niende (Gniandé) dialect (Benin; Togo) 37. Songhai (Sonrai): Dendi dialect (Upper West Africa) 38. Songhai (Sonrai): Songhai dialect (Upper West Africa) 39. Tamazight (Algeria; Libya; Mali; Morocco; Nigeria) 40. +Tobote (Busari; Bassar) (Ghana; Togo) 41. Tiv (Nigeria) 42. ci-Tonga, Malawian (Kitonga; Siska) (Malawi) 43. Tupuri (Toupouri) (Cameroons; Chad) 44. Wescos (Cameroonian Pidgin) (West Africa)

Insufficient Information

(Further identification is needed to determine whether the following represent new accomplishments or enrichment of existing literature):

†Batua (Lutua-Bambote) (Reported from Zaire) 2. Mende: Kpa dialect (Sierra Leone) 3. Yaouré (Yahore) (Reported from Ivory Coast)

Literature Enriched

1. Adangme (Ghana) 2. Afrikaans (South Africa) 3. Akan: Asante (Ashanti) dialect (Ghana) 4. Akan: Fante (Fanti) dialect (Ghana) 5. Akan: Twi (Akwapem) dialect (Ghana) 6. Akoli (Acholi) (Sudan; Uganda) 7. Amharic (Amarigna) (Ethiopia) 8. Bassa (Koko; Mvele) (Cameroons) 9. ici-Bemba (Wemba) (Zalre; Zambia) 10. Creole, Indian Ocean (Mauritian Creole) (Mauritius; Réunion; Seychelles) 11. Dagbani (Dagbane) (Ghana; Togo) 12. Dinka (Sudan) 13. Diola (Jola) (Upper West Africa) 14. Diola (Jola): Fogny (Jóola Fóoni) dialect (The Gambia; Guinea; Sénégal) 15. Duala (Douala) (Cameroons) 16. Efik (Cameroons; Nigeria) 17. Ekoi; Ejagham dialect (Cameroons; Nigeria) 18. Ewe (Benin; Ghana; Togo) 19. Ewe: Adja dialect (Benin) 20. Ewe: Gé (Mina) dialect (Benin; Niger; Togo) 21. Ewe: Gü (Goun) dialect (Benin; Ghana; Togo) 22. Fó (Fon; Dahoméen) (Benin) 23. Ful (Fula; Fulani; Peulh; Toucouleur) (West Africa) 24. Gå (Ga) (Ghana) 25. Gambai (Sara-Gambai; Ngambaye; Gombaye) (Chad) 26. olu-Ganda (Luganda) (Uganda) 27. Gbaya (Baya) (Central African Empire; Cameroons; Congo) 28. eke-Gusii (Kisii) (Kenya) 29. Hausa (Haoussa) (West Central Africa) 30. Igbo (Ibo; Igho) (Nigeria) 31. ke-Kamba (Kikamba) (Kenya) 32. Kanuri (Chad; Niger; Nigeria) 33. Kikuyu (Kenya) 34. Kongo (Kikongo) (Angola; Cabinda; Congo; Zaire) 35. Kongo: Laadi (Lari; Balari; Kilari) dialect (Gabon; Congo) 36. Kpelle (Guinea; Liberia) 37. Logooli (Luragoli; Maragoli; Ragoli) (Kenya) 38. Losengo: Mangala (Lingala) dialect (Zaire) 39. si-Lozi (Zambia) 40. ki-Luba-Katanga (Shaba) (Zaire) 41. Luba-Lulua (Tshiluba; Ciluba) (Zaire) 42. Luba-Lulua: Luba-Kasai dialect (Tshiluba of Kasai) (Zaire) 43. Luhya: lu-Tiriki dialect (Kenya)

+ Efforts to obtain exact identification continue. [Page 491]44. ci-Lunda (Angola; Zaïre; Zambia) 45. ci-Lunda: Ndembo dialect (Zaire) 46. Luo (Kenya; Tanzania) 47. Lwo (Uganda) 48. ci-Makonde (Shimakonde) (Mozambique; Tanzania) 49. Malagasy (Madagascar) 50. Masa (Massa) (Chad; Cameroons) 51. Masaba: ulu-Bukusu (Lubukusu) dialect (Kenya; Uganda) 52. Mashi (Zaire; Zambia) 53. ke-Mero (Kimeru; Meru) (Kenya) 54. More (Mossi) (Ghana; Togo; Upper Volta) 55. isi-Ndebele (Sindebele) (Zimbabwe-Rhodesia) 56. Nguni: isi-Swati (SiSwati; Swazi) dialect (Swaziland; South Africa) 57. Nguni: isi-Xhosa (!Xhosa; Kaffir) dialect (Botswana; Transkei, South Africa) 58. Nguni: Zulu dialect (South Africa) 59. eke-Nyakyusa: Ngonde (Konde) dialect (Malawi; Tanzania) 60. ki-Nyamwesi (Nyamwezi) (Tanzania) 61. Nyang (Kenyang) (Cameroons) 62. ci-Nyanja (Malawi; Zambia) 63. ci-Nyanja: ci-Cewa (Chichewa) dialect (Malawi; Zambia) 64. olu-Nyole (Lunyore; Lunyole) (Kenya) 65. oru-Nyoro (Runyoro-Rutoro) (Uganda) 66. Oromigna (Galla; Galligna) (Ethiopia; Kenya) 67. shi-Ronga (Shironga) (Mozambique; South Africa) 68. Ruanda (Kinyarwanda; Runyarwanda) (Rwanda) 69. iki-Rundi (Kirundi) (Burundi) 70. Sango (Central African Empire; Chad; Congo) 71. Sara: Sara Ngama dialect (Central African Empire; Chad) 72. Serer (Serère) (The Gambia; Sénégal) 73. Shilha (Algeria; Morocco) 74. Shilluk (Sholuk) (Ethiopia; Sudan) 75. Shona (Mozambique; Zimbabwe-Rhodesia) 76. Sidamo (Sidamigna) (Ethiopia) 77. lu-Songe (Kisonge) (Zaire) 78. Songhai: Zarma (Djerma) dialect (Niger; Nigeria) 80. Sotho, Southern (se-Sotho; Sesotho) (Lesotho; South Africa) 81. Swahili (Kiswahili) (East Central Africa) 82. Temen (Themne, Temne) (Sierra Leone) 83. Teso (Ateso) (Kenya; Uganda) 83. Tigrinya (Ethiopia) 84. ci-Tonga, Zambian (Plateau Tonga) (Zambia) 85. se-Tswana (Botswana; Zimbabwe-Rhodesia; South Africa) 86. Tumbuka (ci-Tumbuka; Timbuka) (Malawi; Tanzania; Zambia) 87. Wolof (Jolof; Oulof) (The Gambia; Mauritania; Sénégal) 88. ci-Yao (Chiyao) (Malawi; Mozambique; Tanzania) 89. Yoruba (Benin; Nigeria) 90. olu-Ziba (olu-Haya) (Tanzania)

B. THE AMERICAS

Newly Translated: 1. Alacaluf (Chile) 2. Amuesha (Peru) 3. Campa (Peru) 4. † Catio (Colombia; Panama) 5. † Chinantec: Chinalteco de Tuxlepec (Mexico) 6. † Chinantec: Chinalteco de la Sierra (Mexico) 7. † Chiquitano (Bolivia) 8. Conibo: Shipibo dialect (Peru) 9. Cubeo (Brazil; Colombia) 10. Lokono (Arawak, Continental) (French Guiana; Guyana; Surinam) † Macu (Maco) (Venezuela) 12. Masco: Huachipairi (Amaracaeri) dialect (Peru) 13. Mascoy: Lengua dialect (Paraguay) 14. Maya: Mopan dialect (Belize; Guatemala) 15. Mazatec (Mexico) 16. Mbaya-Guaicurú: Payaguá (Lengua) dialect (Toba Lengua) (Paraguay, Bolivia, Brazil)

† Efforts to obtain exact identification continue. [Page 492]17. Menomini (United States) 18. Mixtec (Mexico) 19. Ojibwa (Chippewa): Mississagi dialect (Canada) 20. Paez (Colombia) 21. Piaroa (Venezuela) 22. Piro (Peru) 23. Tanaina: Kenai dialect (Alaska) 24. Tucuna (Ticuna) (Brazil; Colombia; Peru) 25. Tupi: Guarayú dialect (Bolivia) 26. Tzeltal (Mexico) 27. Uapichana (Wapishanna) (Brazil; Guyana) 28. Yagua (Brazil; Colombia; Peru) 29. Yupik, Central Alaskan: Yuk dialect (Alaska) 30. Zamucoan, Northern (Ayoré, Ayoréo) (Bolivia; Paraguay)

Insufficient Information

(Further identification is needed to determine which of the following represent new accomplishments and which enrichment of existing literature):

1. Zapotec: Zapoteco del Istmo (Mexico) 2. Zapotec: Zapoteco de la Sierra (Mexico)

Literature Enriched

1. Aleut (Aleutian & Pribiloff Islands; Alaska; U.S.S.R.) 2. Ashushlay (Chulupi; Tapiete) (Paraguay) 3. Aymará (Bolivia; Peru) 4. Blackfoot (Canada; United States) 5. Bribri (Costa Rica; Panama) 6. Cakchiquel (Guatemala) 7. Carib (Brazil; Guyana; French Guiana; Surinam) 8. Carib: Galibi (Cariña; Karinja) dialect (Brazil; French Guiana; Guyana; Surinam; Venezuela) 9. Carib, Island (Garifuna) (Belize; Guatemala; Honduras) 10. Cayapa (Ecuador) 11. Creole, Haitian (Haiti) 12. Cuna (Kuna) (Colombia; San Blas Islands, Panama) 13. Dakota (Sioux) (Canada; United States) 14. Epera, Northern (Chocoe; Embera) (Colombia; Panama) 15. Goajiro (Guajiro) (Colombia; Venezuela) 16. Guahibo (Colombia; Venezuela) 17. Guaymi (Panama) 18. Haida (Alaska; Canada) 19. Inuit (Inupiaq): Kobuk (Kotzebue) dialect (Alaska) 20. Jicaque (Xicaque) (Honduras) 21. Kekchi (Ketchi) (Belize; Guatemala) 23. Koyukon (Alaska) 24. Kuchin (Kutchin; Fort Yukon; Loucheux) (Alaska; Canada) 25. Machiguenga (Peru) 26. Mapuche (Araucanian) (Argentina; Chile) 27. Mataco (Argentina; Bolivia; Paraguay) 28. Maya (Belize; Guatemala; Mexico) 29. Miskito (Honduras; Nicaragua) 30. Otomi (Mexico) 31. Paiute, Southern: Ute dialect (United States) 32. Papiamento (Aruba; Bonaire; Curaçao) 33. Quechua (Argentina; Bolivia; Chile; Colombia; Ecuador; Peru) 34. Quiché (Guatemala; Mexico) 35. Shuara (Jivaro) (Ecuador; Peru) 36. Shuara (Jivaro): Aguaruna dialect (Ecuador; Peru) 37. Sranan (Sranan Tongo; Surinamese; Taki-Taki) (Surinam) 38. Sumo (Honduras; Nicaragua) 39. Tanana: Tanacross dialect (Alaska) 40. Tlingit (Alaska; Canada) 41. Toba (Argentina) 42. Tupi: Guarani dialect (Argentina; Brazil; Paraguay) 43. Yaqui (Mexico; United States) 44. Yaruro (Venezuela) 45. Yukpa (Colombia; Venezuela)

† Efforts to obtain exact identification continue. [Page 493]

c. ASIA

Newly Translated:

1. Azerbaijani (Ádhirbáyjání; Azeri) (Írán; Soviet Ádhirbáyján) 2. Bisaya (Sarawak; Borneo; Brunei) 3. † Dangi (India) 4. Dayak, Land (Bidayuh): Jagoi (Biratak) dialect (Borneo; Sarawak) 5. Japanese, Katakana script (new script) 6. Kazakh: Cyrillic script (Kazakh S.S.R.; China) 7. Kazakh: Latin script (Kazakh S.S.R.; China)

8. Maldivian (Divehi Bas): Divehi script (Maldives; Minicoy Island) 9. Maldivian (Divehi Bas): Latin script (Maldives; Minicoy Island) 10. Melanau: Oya/Dalat dialect (Sarawak) 11. Palawanon (Philippine Islands) 12. Rajasthani: Gujuri (Gujari) dialect (India; Pakistan) 13. Sanskrit

Insufficient Information (Further identification is needed to determine whether the following represent new accomplishments or enrichment of existing literature):

1. † Agta (Philippine Islands) 2. Murut, Sarawak (Malaysia, Indonesia)

3. ‘Dialect of the Montagnards’ (Vietnam)

Literature Enriched:

1. Arabic 2. Armenian 3. Balochi (Baluchi) (Afghanistan; Arabian Peninsula; India; Írán; Pakistan; Turkmen S.S.R.) 4. Bengali (Bangladesh; India) 5. Bengali: Assamese dialect (Northeastern India) 6. Bengali: Tripuri (Kok-Borok) dialect (India) 7. Bikol (Bicol) (Philippine Islands) 8. Burmese (Burma; Bangladesh) 9. Chinese 10. Dayak, Land (Bidayuh): Bukar Sadong (Tebakang) dialect (Borneo; Sarawak) 11. Dayak, Sea (Iban) (Borneo; Sarawak) 12. Gondi (India) 13. Gujarati (India) 14. Hanunóo (Philippine Islands) 15. Hindi (India; Africa; Fiji Islands; Guianas; Surinam) 16. Ilocano (Philippine Islands) 17. Ilonggo (Hiligaynon) (Philippine Islands) 18. Japanese 19. Kannada (Kanarese) (India) 20. Kashmiri (India; Pakistan) 21. Khmer (Cambodian) (Kampuchea; Thailand; Vietnam) 22. Korean (Korea; China; Japan)

23. Kurdish (Afghanistan; Armenian S.S.R.; Írán; ‘Iráq; Syria; Turkey) 24. Lao (Laotian) (Laos; Thailand) 25. Malayalam (India, including Laccadive Islands) 26. Marathi (India) 27. Melanau: Mukah dialect (Sarawak) 28. Nepali (Nepalese) (Nepal) 29. Oriya (Orija) (India) 30. Oriya: Halbi (Halabi) dialect (India) 31. Pangasinan (Philippine Islands) 32. Panjabi (Punjabi) (India; Pakistan) 33. Persian (Farsi) 34. Sebuano (Cebuano) (Philippine Islands) 35. Sindhi (India; Pakistan) 36. Sinhalese (Sri Lanka) 37. Tagalog (Filipino) (Philippine Islands) 38. Tamil 39. Telugu (India) 40. Thai (Thailand) 41. Tibetan, Central (Bhōṭiā): Lhasa (Dbus) dialect (India, Tibet) 42. Turkish 43. Turkmen (Turkoman) (Turkmen S.S.R.; Írán; Afghanistan) 44. Urdu (India; Pakistan) 45. Vietnamese (Vietnam; Kampuchea; Laos; Thailand) 46. Waray (Waraywaray; Samar-Leyte; Samareño) (Philippine Islands)

† Efforts to obtain exact identification continue. [Page 494]

D. AUSTRALASIA AND THE PACIFIC ISLANDS

Newly Translated:

1. Akei (Navaka) (New Hebrides) 2. Carolinean (Caroline Islands; Saipan) 3. ‘Fiji Hindi’ (Fiji Islands) 4. Gao (Solomon Islands) 5. Kara (Papua New Guinea) 6. † Kombe (Papua New Guinea)

7. Mele: Fila dialect (Fila & Efate Islands, New Hebrides) 8. Rennellese: Bellona dialect (Solomon Islands) 9. Tanna: Lenakel dialect (New Hebrides)

Literature Enriched:

1. Areare (Solomon Islands) 2. Baining (New Britain Island, Papua New Guinea) 3. Bogutu (Solomon Islands) 4. Chamorro (Guam and other Mariana Islands) 5. Easter Island (Pascuense) (Easter Island) 6. Efate (Efatese) (New Hebrides) 7. Efate: Erakor dialect (New Hebrides) 8. Fijian (Fiji Islands) 9. Gilbertese (Kiribati; Nauru; Ocean Island) 10. Hawaiian (Hawaiian Islands) 11. Kosraean (Kusaiean) (Caroline Islands) 12. Kwara’ae (Solomon Islands) 13. Langalanga (Solomon Islands) 14. Lau (Solomon Islands) 15. Lifu (Lifouan) (Loyalty Islands) 16. Maori, Cook Islands (Rarotongan) (Cook Islands) 17. Maori, New Zealand (New Zealand) 18. Marshallese (Marshall Islands) 19. Motu, Hiri (Papua New Guinea) 20. Nengone (Maréen) (Loyalty Islands)

21. Palauan (Palau) (Caroline Islands; Guam) 22. Pidgin, Fijian (Fiji Islands) 23. Pidgin, New Hebrides (Bislama) (New Hebrides) 24. Pidgin, Papuan (Neo-Melanesian) (Papua New Guinea, including Admiralty Islands) 25. Pidgin, Solomon Islands (Solomon Islands) 26. Ponapean (Eastern Caroline Islands) 27. Roviana (Solomon Islands) 28. Samoan (Samoa; New Zealand; United States) 29. Tahitian (Society Islands; Tuamotu Archipelago; Marquesas Islands; Gambier & Austral Islands) 30. Tongan (Tonga Islands; Uvéa (Wallis) Island, Loyalty Islands) 31. Trukese (Caroline Islands) 32. Tuvaluan (Ellicean) (Tuvalu; Nauru; Tokelau Islands; New Zealand; Hawaiian Islands; Swain’s Island, Samoa) 33. Yapese (Caroline Islands)

E. EUROPE

Newly Translated:

1. Breton (Northwestern France) 2. Italian: ‎Logodurese Logudorese‎ dialect (Sardinia) 3. Ladin (Italian & Swiss Tyrol)

4. Latin 5. Romany: Sinto dialect (Northern Italy)

† Efforts to obtain exact identification continue. [Page 495]Literature Enriched:

1. Albanian (Albania; Bulgaria; Italy; Greece; United States; Turkey; Yugoslavia) 2. Arabic: Maltese dialect (Malta) 3. Basque (France, Spain, North America) 4. Bielorussian (White Russian) (Bielorussian S.S.R.; Poland; Lithuania) 5. Bulgarian (Bulgaria; Greece; Rumania; U.S.S.R.; Yugoslavia) 6. Croatian (Serbocroatian, Latin script) (Yugoslavia; Austria; Czechoslovakia; Hungary; Italy; Rumania) 7. Czech (Czechoslovakia; Poland; United States) 8. Danish (Denmark; Germany; United States) 9. Dutch 10. English 11. Estonian 12. Faroese (Faroe Islands) 13. Finnish (Finland; Estonia; Sweden; United States; U.S.S.R.) 14. French 15. Frisian (Frisian Islands; Germany; The Netherlands) 16. Gaelic, Irish (Erse; Irish) (Ireland; United Kingdom) 17. German 18. German: Luxembourgian dialect (Luxembourg) 19. Greek, Modern (Greece; Cyprus; Egypt; Italy; Balkans; Western Europe; Africa; North & South America; Australia; Turkey) 20. Hungarian 21. Icelandic (Iceland, United States) 22. Italian 23. Lettish (Latvian) (Latvia) 24. Lithuanian 25. Norwegian: Riksmål (Bokmål) (Norway, United States) 26. Polish (Poland; Czechoslovakia; Canada; Germany; Rumania; United States; U.S.S.R.) 27. Portuguese 28. Romansch: Sursilvan dialect (Switzerland) 29. Rumanian (Rumania; Albania; Balkans; Canada; United States; U.S.S.R.) 30. Russian 31. Serbian (Serbocroatian, Cyrillic script) (Yugoslavia; Austria; Czechoslovakia; Hungary; Italy; Rumania) 32. Slovak (Czechoslovakia; Hungary; Yugoslavia) 33. Slovene (Yugoslavia; Austria; Italy; Hungary; United States) 34. Spanish (Spain; Africa; Caribbean; Central America; Philippine Islands; South America; United States) 35. Swedish (Sweden; Canada; Estonia; Finland; United States)

F. INVENTED LANGUAGES

1. Esperanto

G. TOTAL BY CONTINENTS

	Newly Translated	Needing Further Identification	Literature Enriched
Africa	44	3	90
The Americas	30	2	44
Asia	13	3	46
Australasia and the Pacific Islands	9	—	33
Europe	5	—	35
Invented languages	—	—	1
	101	8	249

[Page 496]

7. THE SHORT OBLIGATORY PRAYER IN 391 LANGUAGES, DIALECTS OR SCRIPTS

I bear witness, O my God, that Thou hast created me to know Thee and to worship Thee. I testify, at this moment, to my powerlessness and to Thy might, to my poverty and to Thy wealth.

There is none other God but Thee, the Help in Peril, the Self-Subsisting.

Short Daily Obligatory Prayer in Arabic and English.

ABOVE is the original Arabic and its translation into English of one of the prayers revealed by Bahá’u’lláh and prescribed for fulfilment of the daily obligatory prayer. It is known as the Short Obligatory Prayer, and when used is recited once in twenty-four hours, at noon.

Following are translations of this prayer in 389 additional languages, dialects or scripts listed according to the continents to which those languages are indigenous. Included are some recent translations which are not reflected in the preceding statistical listing.

The usage and spelling chosen for primary listings, and indication of dialect relationships, follow, where possible, C. F. and F. M. Voegelin, Classification and Index of the World’s Languages. It is recognized by the compilers of this list that these designations, therefore, sometimes do not reflect the name by which a particular language or dialect is best known, or the designation preferred by those who speak it. Some variant names and spellings, including variants previously reported, appear in parentheses.

Exceptions to Voegelin & Voegelin’s usage have been made in a few cases: where the name of a language has been officially changed in the country in which it is spoken; where Voegelin & Voegelin’s primary listing is known to be considered pejorative by speakers of the language or dialect; and in a few other instances. Also, certain of the European dialects of Scandinavian and Netherlandic-German have been listed as separate languages, on the basis of their long separate histories as literary languages. [Page 497]Where identification in terms of this standard reference has not yet been completed, the nomenclature reported to the World Centre by the National Spiritual Assembly responsible for the accomplishment has been used, and such translations are indicated by a dagger. An asterisk denotes an improved translation made available for this volume in a language which has appeared in earlier volumes.

The major countries, islands or territories where the languages are spoken are shown in italics; where no such entry is given, the places where the language is spoken are so numerous and so widely scattered that to list them would be unwieldy: many of these languages are found worldwide.

Totals for each continent are: Africa, 129; the Americas, 89; Asia, 90; Australasia and the Pacific Islands, 31; Europe, 49; Invented languages, 2; Braille, 1. The total number of translations and transliterations is 391.

• Denotes revised translations.

ADANGME (Ghana)

A. AFRICA

+ Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

Otumfoɔ, medi hia buroburo na Woyɛ ɔdefoɔ. Onyame foforo biara nni hɔ ka Wo ho, ɔhaw mu Boafoɔ, Wo na wote Wo ho ne W'ase.

AKAN: Fante dialect (Ghana) Oo Tsaatsɛ Mawu i yeɔ he odase kaa O bɔ mi konɛ ma le Mo nɛ ma ja Mo. Piɔ hu i ngɛ he odase yee kaa i be he wami ko; Moji he wamitsɛ, ohiafo ji mi se Mo Lɛɛ niatsɛ ji Mo Ngɛ Ose ɔ Mawu ko be hu. Moji wa yemi kɛ bualɔ ngɛ haomi mi nɛ haa wɔ wami.

AFRIKAANS (South Africa) Ek getuig, O my God, dat U my geskape het om U te ken en U te aanbid. Ek betuig op hierdie oomblik my magteloosheid en U mag. my armoede en U rykdom.

Daar is geen ander God buiten U nie, die Hulp in Gevaar, die Self-Bestaande.

AKAN: Asante (Ashanti) dialect (Ghana) O me Nyame, medi adanseɛ sɛ Woabɔ me sɛ menhu Wo na mensom Wo. Medi adanseɛ seesei sɛ menni ahoɔden biara na Wo deɛ Woyɛ

O, m'Ewuradze, midzi dase dɛ ɔwo abɔ me dɛ munhu Wo na monsom Wo. Midzi dase sesei dɛ mennyi ahoɔdzen biara na Ɔwodze Eyɛ Otumfo, midzi hia neminemi na Ɔwo Eyɛ odzefo.

Ewuradze, obiara nnyi hɔ kã wo ho, haw muƆboafo, Owo a Ɔwoara Etse W'ase.

AKAN: Twi (Akwapem) dialect (Ghana) O me Nyankopɔn, Midi Adanse sɛ Wo na Woabɔ me sɛ min hu Wo na mensom Wo. Midi adanse wɔsaa dɔn yi mu sɛ me de memfra na wo na Wowɔ tumi, meyɛ ohiani na Wo na Wo yɛ ɔdefo.

O Nyame bi nni baabi sɛ Wo nkutoo Korɛ Ahohia mu Boafo ne Onyame aɔnnan obi.

AMHARIC (AMARIGNA: AMARINYA) (Ethiopia) አምላኬ ሆይ! አንተን እንዳውቅና እሰግድልህም ዘንድ እንደ ፈጠርከኝ አመሰክራለሁ ካንተ ጋር በምነጋገርባት በዚህች ጊዜ የኔን ደካማነትና ያንተን ኃያልነት ፤ የኔን ምስኪንነትና ያንተን ሃብታምነት አረጋግጣለሁ " ካንተ ባጋ ጊዜ ረዳት ከምትሆነውና በገዛ ከምትኖረው ዓምላክ በስተቀር ሌላ ዓምላክ የለም!

AWING (Cameroon Republic) ራስህም nfomeh, nsi peh mbeh tsu yi mbe chiki nfoh. Nsi yi tsih langna yoh koh tchipo le tsoyoh Mbi Nsi-meh pah-aneh tsunkene me ngeh mbo-oh kwalemeh mbo ngeh, mbo-oh wa ngonke -yeh.

Nji yanengeh mangleh nwu te meteneh, Nsih peh nchi ne metiem eh chemeh, mangleh me-meh. [Page 498]

BAMBARA (Mall, Sénégal, Upper Volta)

Mbi shereya, E Alla, ka don ko e de ye nda konki'don, ki'batu. N'tikèra'ka ka'don ko se tè ne ye, setiki de ye e ye, fèn ntè ne fè, fèn tiki de ye e ye.

Alla wèrè shi'tè fo ekelen, E min bè se ka mògò dèmèn ka bò gèlèyala, E min ma da fèn fê.

BAMOUN (Cameroon Republic)

O nyinyia me na kuot nta mi U ka puoma mi njiU mbe kùepehU. Nji na mi Upua' Fosskù mbe fùeke't, mbuà mbùre u pe Fon yamyum.

Mo' Nyinyi ndi ali na vou, U puà nga yi ngamii tù ngùe', U pira' Nkake.

BASSA (GBASA) (Liberia)

M Nyu Zase O Ni Gedepáà kab

BERBA (Benin)

N'fare natwagǝm alahèn tiyomptu adwosé bǝnaars mma mantɛ m'mafaa. Swamswam n'nyé n'yaŋasi nem pwatǝm n'nwam a bigǝ. Tuwo kpa be katawé, a we bégaw a pwase hirbe a nwan hira ntinwé hira n'fusu u hiim.

BULU† (BOULOU) (submitted from Cameroon Republic)

Me ne nga a Zambe wom, na Ônga té ma na yeme Wo a kań fe Wo. Ma mem éyoń ji na, Ngul jam éno momo ve enjoé nje éné, na me ne azoé ve Wo Ône Kum; Zambe mfe anji bo ve Wo étam, Nyô a volô éyon ya njuk, Nyô a vee be emien.

BUSOONG (KUBA, BAKUBA, BUSHONG) (Zaire)

NANAYEPE NTSHIAMIEME, WAMPUAN- GIDI ADIOYO DIAYEPE A DIA TSHINI. NANAYEPE A ITENIKUYI, BUOLO BUEME, BUKUOKOYO BUAWA, NTANA MUEME, A m mɛ m bé m ké m dyi dyuo ɔ kè bé m BUDIYI BUAWA. KUA NTSHIAMA YEKE A ké ṁ bie kɛ.Ń Zaȧ Weń bo kààn dé kè dé Ni kpé Ni kpéɛ dyi hwε hwè, bédé bédé muɛ. dé Niga dyé dyé mu ɔ kè dé Ni bã bá mu Gidepós káko do se via sẻ n đoàn mà mùa Ngàn gbo kpá Nyɔ dé de séén muɛ, ké in sèágbo kpá Nyó mà kɛ.

BATUA (LUTUA-BAMBOTE)* (submitted from Zaire)

MAKUYIMBANGA WOBENTSHAMBE WAMI WANGUANGILA BUA MEME KUKUYIBA MA KUKUNEMEKELA MIYIBANGA DIOM- BANTSHI. BUNTALADI BUAMI NGOLO- SHABE, MUTANDA WAMI KUDIYI BUABE. KAKU TSHAMBE WIKA YELELE MULIOBE MUKUIDIDI WAMBANA MUENGU ULI OBENKE.

ici-BEMBA (WEMBA) (Zaïre, Zambia)

Ndesininkisha, Mwe Lesa wandi, ukuti Nimwe Mwa nengele uku Mwishaba ku Mpuepa. Nde sumina, pa kashita aka, kulubulwa amaka yandi nakubukulu Bwenu, kubupabi bwandi naku bukankala Bwenu. Takuli Lesa umbi kanofye Imwe, Kafwa mu Buchushi, Mwe Baikalila Mweka.

MUNA WENE, ANAMANA BAMUENGU, OLOKATUONO WENE MIETE.

CHIRIPON-LETE-ANUM (CHEREPONG, GUAN) (Ghana)

O! Me Onyankopɔn; megyi adanse sɛ Wo ɔbɔ me sɛ me bɛbɛ hu Wo ne me si Wo. Megyi adanse kaake mɔ sɛ me mmɛ ayule akoa ne wole Wo de ayule mmɔodahwɛ. Megyi ehia buburo ne woleɛ Wo de sika mmɔodahwɛ.

Onyankopɔn akoa bɛtɛ ka Wo so. Wo ne Wo hu ɛne mmɔbɔ bo ɛne amanehunu tɛ. Wo ne Wo ɛfɛ yi Wo yo so.

CIOKWE (CHOKWE) (Angola, Zaire)

Yami nguli chela che, O Yihova, Zambi yami wangutangile mumu ngukuningike ni ngukuhalise. Ngunatawiza ha shimbu line, kulela chami ni tachije, ushwale wami ni upichi we. Kushi Zambi mukwongwe yene, Yoze wa kupulula atu mu lamba lia ufwe, ni Yoze uli ni mwono wa mutolo muli iye mwene.

CREOLE, INDIAN OCEAN (Mauritius Island, Reunion, Seychelles)

Mo témoigné, Bon Dié, qui to fine creé moi pour conne toi et adore toi. Mo confessé main- tenant mo impuissance divan to puissance et mo pauvreté divan to richesse.

Na péna ène lote Bon Dié qui toi, celui qui aide dans danger et existé par li même. [Page 499]

DAGBANI (DAGBANE) (Ghana, Togo)

Nti, ti Duma Nawuni yeda, kaman nyini n Nam ma, ni n mi Nawuni, ka dzemdi nuni Na titam lana. N ti yeda punpno, kaman Naa n kani n pahi nuni Na ti tam lana; nun tiri nira fara ni buni.

Sheli kam n kani n pahi la nuni Nawuni Nati tam lana; nuni yihiri mira fukunsi ni, kao nam saxinrla o ko.

DIOLA (JOLA) (Upper West Africa)

Fetan fet, aw Atty Jamet, mate aw tepan min emanji de pop ne kobe. Kabajati oum sembe ku fetanfet nyemi momay, de sambaye yourley yamakaye, kabajatiyoum waff de fu bajafoley famakafu.

EMBUN† (submitted from Zaïre)

Mwenzem, me lengyuy: Nze oweng me ongir eyu, ongir eboyi, Lalé owu kapah, me ngy eyu obets onze, ngol anze, ompur ome, obwel onze.

Nze mur kabé fan, kadzé Nzem asa né Nze, Nze okolume bar engots, Nze oye kabewang.

EWE* (Benin, Ghana, Togo)

Medi ɖase, O nye Mawu, be Ewɔm be manya Wo eye masubo wó. Medi ɖase le yeyiyi sia me le nye ŋusemanɔŋu kple Wò ganyenye ŋuti, le nye hia kple wò kesinɔnuwo ŋuti.

Mawua ɖeke megali wu Wò o, Kpeɖeŋutɔ le Xaxame. Amesi le agbe le edokui si.

DIOLA (JOLA): Fogny (Jóola Fóoñi) dialect (The Gambia, Guinea, Sénegal)

Fiitanfiit, Jamit I Mati aw u tuukaam man i manji, ni saafi. Tan emmi iŋje let waaf, aw u ŋoolenum wanoosan, ni maŋmaŋ mati inje asúkateen, aw u kaanum erímbaan.

Bajut Atty Jamet ake a wujumi aw, aranbay nawu de bu gall aw akum fange.

Bajut emit yaakeen leejaataw, apakenem di katákasak, aw awbom di fukói.

DUALA (DOUALA) (Cameroon Republic)

Ne mbon, a loba lam na o weki mba o bia oa na o sesa oa. Na dube tatan bobo lam nginango, tue lam mbwań mongo.

Loba dipepe di titi buka te oa mene mo mongwanedi o ndutu nu nye na momene.

EFIK: Ibibio dialect (Nigeria)

Ami medi ntiense O! Abasi mi, nte ke Afo okobot mi, man ndiono Fi, nyun nkpono Fi.

Ami metin iko ntiense kemi ndiwut unana odudu mi, ye odudu Fo, nyun nwut nko ubuene mi ye inyene Fo.

Abasi efen iduhe ke ebede Fi, Andinyana kini nanenyin, Akama idem ikpon.

EKOI: Ejagham dialect (Cameroon Republic, Nigeria)

Njimé ntiesé Atta Obasi, bré Wéh oturéme lon sé nding Wah na nyubé Wah.

Méh nwoh otti kah njgimé nyih, kah ogong ohomé na kah ikonm Effah, kah okpagk ohomé nah kah effonome Obah.

Kpeh Obasi ettat chang bréh Wéh, nyoh anyangané Kpekpe nah Nfonéh arringeh Bejih Ebéh.

EWE: Ge (Mina) dialect (Benin, Togo)

Mougni dassé, o gné Mawu, odom bé madjessigné eyé massomonyé. Mougnan Ouélébé yaakeen leejaataw, apakenem di kéa apé housin mado. Coudo apo hounsin dodo apé aya coudo opo tchikpokpo.

Noudékpé mougbadé ouwo, amé ké hona na améo be afocoumé amékélé édokesia.

EWE: Watyi (Ouatchi, Waci) dialect (Benin, Togo)

Me qu ɖase, o Mawuyen, be ye ɖówun né má jesiye eye né má sumɔye. Le gayame a, me yán wunsenmadoyen ku wunsenɖodoo, ayayen kú ɖokuo. Mawu ɖokpo me gba lei tóvo neo, kpeɖeamewuntito le Xaxame, Ame ke su eɖokoi ji a.

FÓ (FON, DAHOMEEN) (Benin)

Ijeri no Mahu ché, do yèwè dami do gbèmè bo wa tu.

Mahu ché unt dô té nou houé dô houi wê sê mi dô bê mê bô ni na dô tun houé bô na non sin houé. Unt dô gbé gni nou troué wê dô hon lon ché sô nou dé a gna ché kpo do dokou mi ton kpo.

Nou dé bou so dé bo hou houègna houi mê dé é non houin lin gbê gan bô ka non sous sous hoyé nou mê houin dé sous non. [Page 500]

FUL (FULA, FULANI, FULFULDE, PEUL, TOUCOULEUR) (West Africa)

Mohal berde di labbinta ha dir berde an Allah an, a kesuna kala ku mi wadata dir herde an, wala wadowo bo sai an mo hisintammi. Der berde ma di labbinde a usatan ko dume ha berde am, ya an mo yidiyam hedi labbinde mangol ma, a holliyam gidol ma, de ni an on timitorde ku'a yidi. Defte warol ma di vonnatako waddi beldum ha dir berde an, an mo timminta be bo yokkowo do yukkol.

GBAYA (BAYA) (Central African Empire, Cameroon Republic, Congo)

Mi ne sadako, i Sô ko'm, Me dée am ha'm me ding-Me in me gasi Me. Mi to kinii gaa ko'm in ngai ko-Me, talaka ko'm in pkamo ko-Me. Ma Sô bona, Kaa ne Me, Wan ne gbak mo, sai fio, Wan ne duk ne te-A ne te-A.

FUL: Torado dialect (Sénégal)

Mi sedi, Ala, a'tagi lang mi andu mi julane. Mijabi heh wasude dole ang de heh mountinare ma, heh wasude am heh kebal ma ang. Wode Ala godo sina mada, walo wo fowu darani do hore mung. (O'do julde foti halade nyarol ma wo nyarolma.)

GA: Accra dialect (Ghana, Togo)

Miiye odase, Oo mi-Nyɔŋmɔ, akɛ Obɔ mi ni male Bo ni madza O. Miyes he odase ŋmeletswaa nɛɛ. Miiye migbɔdzɔmɔ lɛ kɛ Ohewalɛ lɛ, mihia kɛ Oninamɔ lɛ he odase.

Nyɔŋmɔ kroko ko bɛ Osɛɛ Dza Bo. Bualɔ yɛ fimɔ beiaŋ kɛ mɔ ni yɛ ha Lɛ-diɛntsɛ ehe.

GAMBAI (NGAMBAI, NGAMBAYE) (Chad)

Ei Allah lem, mam'too jee naige tarée, I ya ram kam geri lem mba kam mosso kul noin'g lem. Mayan missi noin'g basiné, ma m'to nje rem I too jé singa mon'g, ma m'to nje ndoo I too njé né kinga. Allah I ya ge kari ba, I ya too jé la ge dojé lo g toobel g I ya too deou doroi.

GOUN† (Benin)

Yin wê yi kpajjlè, oklu non ton, dé da na do yon in bo na do sin. Yin wlé to wénin nou dō ma do gan tché kpo houhlon to we kpo wa mon non gni gni tché po adō koun to wé kpg. Yê dō kpo non wê gni ji wê yê wê, yê mê non dé mê son ahou fièssa mê, yê dé ko gni nou da ho na dé wé.

GURMA (GOURMA, GOURMANTCHE) (Togolese translation)

N'tié Sééda O ntiénou, kaata gume, Ke min banda Ke ya dona-m'band molané m'bame yén ayabam, N'tan larem yén aya piam. Fum mbire. Wan yé bin loucoul. bare n'ba yaka tién Kiyé Kébé guna tipo ti tuo

GURMA (GOURMA, GOURMANTCHE) (Upper Volta translation)

n tie siedi, oo n tienu, k'a tagin ni ke min band'a, gi go ya jand'a n tuo moala moala ne ke n bani ke n tadi gaa pia paalu, gi go tuo ke n bani k'a pia upaalu, gi go tuo ke n luo, k'a pia Tien to gii ye kaa tie fin bebe yuan fa bidi gi nyandi fala ciamun ni. yua n fidii ye o yuli po.

olu-GANDA (LUGANDA) (Uganda)

Nina obujjulizi, Ai Katonda wange, nti wantonda okukumanya n'okukusinza. Nkakkasa mu kiseera kino obutesobola bwange, n'olwobuyinza bwo, mu bwaavu bwange, ne mu bugagga bwo.

Tewali Katonda mulala okugyako, Ggwe, Omuyambi mu kabi, Eyemalirira.

HAUSA (Nigerian dialect)† (Chad, Niger, Nigeria)

Na shaida, Ya Allah na cewa ka halicce ne domin in yi maka sujada. Ina furci a wannan lokacin cewa ni mara iko ne ta wajen ikon ka domin patara ta ta wurin yalwarka. Babu wani Allah sai kai domin ka yi taimako cikin wahala. Kai da kake mai riko.

HERERO (Namibia/South West Africa)

Ami meri hatoi Jehova kutja ove uendji odu kutjiua noku ku kumbira. Ami moruveze nekui meyeta okuhinomasa kuandje [Page 501]momasa uoye, ousyona uandje momautumbe uoye.

Kapena Mukuru uarue pendje naove omu- vatere uo momauzeu nomurikuramene.

KASEM (KASSÈME, KASENA, KASSENA) (Ghana, Upper Volta)

A yi kashetu, o a ko wɛ, ni mu mu yi teru, mun kia a mu, si a ta she mv.

Lele kun to a ye a bwənə, mu yi dan mama tu an yi yinigǝ tu, mi yi ŋoo mama tu.

Wɛ di don da terǝ, ku na da mu, wɛ din di joŋ tim, wɛ dim di kati wurǝ tim.

HOA+ (Botswana)

Má cě, ám št ||Gáma bé, ú č'éŏ á má nné má ctá ú kê n lnė ši če ŏ-šú ú. Má qhái cẽ, kì thẻ'e hạ kì, kì làm 3 kt lại của kh "au-št ke 0 st kt-16. ki "ám št ki-Igò'oa ki kà a qȧ kē 31 kf-ja.

Yà g'oa Gama Okoi ha ya n Jhoō ká 50. Ki- núi OX'SE, HA kì "tế.

HUA (!XO)† (Botswana)

Nje Ku-te, ma ||'ha ka g| kqon |i te: Inga ndi Inga i-ga. Ma l'ha cen kona l'a: te: Inga ih ||'ha ka kona i te: Inga, m ||'hâ cen a t'hani [ui te: Inga ih ||'ha ka ja t'hani ||'ali te: Inga.

Ku-te te'e n'a ka le !'an ti, ah'a: kan gubi uhi:, ah'a: !ngoa ka tam.

IGBO (IBO, IGHO) (Nigeria)

A bum onye aka-ebe, O Chinekem na ikerem kam mara Gin'etokwa Gi. Ekwuputawo kwe m, n'oge di ugbua, adighi ike m ma Gi Onwe Gi di ike; A di m ogbeye ma Gi Onwe Gi bara uba Odighi Chineke ozo ma ewezuga Gi. Onye iye aka na mgbe nmekpa aru, Onye Nwe Onwe ya.

KABA (SARA KABA) (Central African Empire, Chad)

Alama! Ma mi-gi ta kundoy ma, ta ki gi m-ai, ta koso ma kur kajama nuí. Ta yo ton, m-ob han ma ma te togon ngè, bi I a te togon bo, ma ma te ndon, bi I a te nan ndeyn.

Ala nge kumboi ndete. I ba i nge kajadé, I ba i nge ngom roí te njoí.

KANURI (Chad, Niger, Nigeria)

Wuye shadangena, Ya Ala, nyiga notęga abattega garo wuga alakkamro. Wuye sa allan tabatkęskena nem duno banyiga duno nemgaro nem denyiga nem qwowa nem garo.

Nyilan nguron Ala gade ba, banama yim banna'be, kendega kela nembelan kargam.

e-KELE (LOKELE) (Zaire)

O Mungu wami, isoɛnɛ mbo okelimi eoka iluweke la iinelek'Aɛ. Iswimela nda eye mbileye bowandu wami la bofoka w'Aɛ; iuw'ami la lifoka liaɛ.

Angoɛnɛ Mungu wasi sakoloko Aɛ, oyo atosungaka nda mbile ya tale, oyo ayali laya laya.

KIKUYU (GIKUYU) (Kenya)

Ndi muira Ngai ati niwanyumbire niguo ngumenye na ngugocage wee Mwathani Ngai.

Ninjui kahinda-ini gaka ni wa unini wakwa hari Wee na uthini wakwa ni undu wa utonga waku.

Gutiri Ngai ungi thengia Niwe hari uteithio vaku mathina-ini na Uhoti Waku.

KIMPIN (KIPINDI)† (Zaire)

Kierek, â Nzēm ami, Nze le mandoen umuin mukukuyebanga ti mukukufukiminanga. Tan alià, ekis bumol ba mi ti bungol ba Nze, busui ba mi ti bunvam ba Nze. Kukitene, lo kufuyini ti Nzèm amben, kaka Nze mbwes Nzèm, u useresa band mu bigonz, u uzing a mumpil e nzien mbwes.

KONGO (KIKONGO): ki-Tuba (Kituba) (Angola, Congo Republic, Zaïre)

Ngienina mbangi, o Nzambi ame, vo wan- vanga mu kuzaya ye mu kufukamena. Yisun- gamena mu ntangu yayi kiwayi kiame ye kim- fumu kiaku, ki sukami kiame ye kimvuama kiaku.

Ngeye mosi kaka i Nzambi, Ngeye wusadisanga muna sumbula, Ngeye wuzing- anga muna Ngeye masi.

KONGO: Kimanianga dialect (Zaire)

Ntele kimbangi, ô Nzambi ami, i Ngeye wa mvanga mpasi vo yakuzaya ye kuzitisanga mpe. Ye buabu, ngieti zaya vo lebakana kuami i lulendo luaku, bumputu buami i kimvuama kiaku. [Page 502]Kakuena Nzambi ya nkaka ko, ye mu ntangu a mpasi Ngeye wusadisanga, kadi Ngeye wena mu Ngeye kibeni.

koul ne koul mô Gwô, ne loukô mô gwâmbo, ne ikoum mo Gwô.

Chê fete ne Chambou fôkou chimiô, Mô kamlchê o bộcho, Mô ndônch nyoutchê djé tchitché.

KONGO: ki-Ntaandu (Kintandu) dialect (Zaire)

O Nzambi ame, ngina mbangi bonso unganga mu kuzaya ye mu kuzitisa. Yi kuzeyi bungangi mu ngolo zaku ye bumolo bumunu, mu kimvuama kiaku ye kimputu kiamu. Ga nkatu Mfumu nkaka bonso Ngeye, Yu ukunk- atula mu kigonsa, Mfumu yani mosi ukiganga.

KONGO: ki-Zombo (Angola, Zaire) (Kizombo) dialect

E Nzambi 'ama, nsidi 'e kimbangi vo Ngeye wa mpanga mukuzaya ye kukunda. Ewau ntambuluidi 'e nbovok 'ama ye ngolo zaku, kimputu kiama ye kimvuama kiaku. Kavena Nzambi 'e nkaka ko vo ka Ngeye ko, Ona unanga usadisi muna sumbula, Ona unanga muna Yani kibeni.

KPELLE (Guinea, Liberia)

ŋa I maa seri faa kɛ, O ŋa Talai, a gɛɛ yà gbɛté ŋa koloŋŋå I feli. ŋa faa ma kponɔ ŋi ŋa fii kpɛɛ su da I wala laa da kolo laa da I tɔɔ laai, Fala da kpɔni fe na fɛɛ nɔ yâ tɔnɔ, I kpɔŋ maai kukula mɛni kpulu su, I kɛtɛi I kpiŋ kponôi.

KRIO (West Africa)

God, ah know say you make me for know you, en pray to you. Ah day tell you new wit all me heart say ah can't do nattin without you becoss you power pass all, en nar you han all tin day. Nor order God nor day pass you: nar you day ep way trouble can en day keep life together.

KUSAL (KUSAAL) (Ghana, Upper Volta)

Mam niŋ Fu kaseta, O mam Winam, ye Fu mal mam ye mbaŋi Fu ka dol-li Fu. Mam niŋ yada nanna nɛ mam nɛ bu mɔt paŋa nɛ Fu nɛ mɔt paŋ; nɛ mam nɛ mɔt nɔŋ nɛ Fu nɛ mɔt naam. Winam kɛi gaŋ Fu; Fu son it kyɛ beene; Fu paŋ kyɛi beene.

KWAKUM (BAKOUM) (Cameroon Republic)

Ndji mo chenle o Chamboû wâmbô, gwé chi mê kwà mbê, n'na mben chenlo. Nyi nko tchimio nyi nkâche tchîng nôné, nyi mbêk ne

oci-KWANYAMA (KUANJAMA, KUANYAMA) (Angola, Namibia/South West Africa)

Ondi sisi, Kalunga kange, no ku tia ove ua sitange ndi ku sive, ndi ku linjongamene. Oha ndi, hokolola, pe fimbo eli, mo ku hena enono kuange ndelene mo lu enono Doje, moluhepo lange no mo luo upuna Uoje. Kapena nande Okalunga va mue ndelene Ove, Omukuafi, uopoupatekedi, Ou mu Ove Muene.

!KWI (Botswana)

Tse xo sa khe khoa ||ha, || Kama kha khi di be, kha tsae qxo khe a ts'ao ta tsa a kha, ta tsa tsaoama kha. Khe khoa dikum n|ngi |kam, khi kha tsaa sa tsa kha khedi se he, khi kha |xo m xa tas kha khobe se he. ||Kama hka |kú be ha be tsa | kwi'e, xwe kxam tsa se'ua, qx'oe kha tsa | kwidi s kha.

LOGO (LOGOTI) (Sudan, Zaire)

O Djuka, miba ta ma ami nizo mpe amiakumbamelizo. Andro konidi, mali mivo amitada ma ngufwa yo, ami ngufu lavu lavu ama tiza mpe ami mosoro. Djuka azia yo paka mi, api mondia alunguli ta mabi a, api adrile ise.

LOSENGO: Mangala (Lingala) dialect (Zaire)

Nazali nzeneneke, o Nzambe wa ngai, 'ta okeli ngai mpo nayeba Yo mpe natondo Yo; nakondima bebe na bolembo bwa ngai mpe bokasi bwa Yo, na bobola bwa ngai mpe bokumi bwa Yo. Nzambe mosusu lokola Yo azali te, ozali oyo akosalisa otango ya mpasi, oyo akotikala se Ye moko.

si-LOZI (Zambia)

Kina paki mulena mulimu waka, uni bupezi kuli ni kuzibe hape ni ku lapele. Na lumela ka nako ye kuli niya fokola wena ki wena ya mata, na mi shebile we na ufumile. Akuma mulimu usili kwanda ahao, kiwena mutusi mwama- nyando aluna, upila katato yahao. [Page 503]

ki-LUBA-KATANGA (KILUBA) (Zaïre)

Nakwabija, Leza wani, wampangile mwanda wa kukuyuka ne kukutota. Pa kifuko kino, nâsama kyakanwa kyami, kukulombola bunkomo-nkomo bobe, kulandapala kwami, ne buipeta bobe.

I Kutupu Leza mukwabo enka abe, eni ami nidiku ni ngolu, Ayi Nzambi Pungu, ami nidi musuyi, Ayi mvwama.

Nzambi Pungu mweka kadiku, Ayi wokutsusadisanga mu yigonsa, Ayi Fumu wodifuka.

LUBA-LULUA (TSHILUBA, CILUBA) (Zaire)

Ndi njadika, Wewe Mvidi-Mukulu wanyi, ne wakamfuta bua kukumanya ne bua kukutendelela. Ndi njadika mu tshitupa tshihi emu, bufuba buanyi ne bukole Buebe, bupele buanyi ne bubanji Buebe.

Kakuena Muidi-Mukulu mukuabo bu Wewe, M-Muambuluishi wa mu Dikenga, Nyeye udi wikalaku anu Yeye-Nkayende.

ci-LUNDA (Angola, Zaïre, Zambia)

Eyi Nzambi yami, eyi inkeni wankeñeli kulonda nikiwluki kulonda nikulombeleli. Nacheseki, hampinji yinu, ha kubula inovu jami, mukulema kweyi muwuzweni wami muku heta kweyi.

Kosi Nzambi ji Kwawu ja cheñiku china eyi hohu. Eyi inkwashi inhembi wayuma yejima.

ci-LUNDA: Ndembo dialect (Zaïre)

Nidi kanbaji keyi O Nzambi yami, netu yeyi wanleñeli muloña wakukwiluka ni kuku hameka. Nashimuni chalala lelu dinu kuzeya kwami ni novu jeyi, uzweñi wami ni küheta kweyi.

Kosi Nzambi mukwau china yeyi hohu, ona wakulaña mu malwa, ona wahaya nyaka kudi eyi aweni.

LWO (Uganda)

Ai Lubanga, aye ni In icweya me ngeno In ki woro In. Anyutu kombedi ni tekona pe ento diti tye, ni an lacan In lalonyo.

Pe tye dok Lubanga mukene kono In, Lakony ican, dok Ikwo giri keni.

LUO (Kenya, Tanzania)

An Janeno Nyasacha ni ichweya mondo ang'eyi kendo apaki. Awacho sani kuom nyawona kendo kuom ekoni kuom dhier na kendo kuo mmwanduni. Onge Nyasaye machielo ngang' mak mana in, Jakony e ndalo mag chandruok, Nyasaye manyalo duto.

ki-LUUWA (KILUWA) (Zaïre)

Nakumbula ha mesu matshu akhima eni ayi Nzambi wonguhangidi mu sambu die kukwizika ni kukufukimina. Kikitsudi eki, nezika witabanga mu bya malwa, kudi yewa ukulupie mudi aye mwine.

ci-MAKONDE (SHIMAKONDE) (Mozambique, Tanzania)

Ninkukupa utestamunya, wako Nnungu wangu, kuchi doni Wako uningumba nangu mwaha nikumanya na nikujugwe. Ninkulyaula, mu yola ai Kupola kwangu na dimongo dyako, umachikini wangu na utajuli Wako.

Pachanya Pakoapali Nnungu unji, Wakupochela muchijoidyo, ulikuluysila wako.

i-MAKUA (MAKHUWA) (Mozambique, Malawi)

Kinniwerelani namona, Kho Mulukwaka, wera wi Nyuwo Mokipatusha wi miyo Nyuwo Kosuweleni ni wokokhorani Kinnilapa mwa chuhu yela ethu yohiwereya mene ikuru sanyu, muthonyero aka ni muhakhwanya.

Khavovo Muluku Mukina opwaha Nyuwo, okikhunela mu sawopiha yowo onikhala Mwa yowo Mekhaiye.

MALAGASY (Malagasy Republic)

Toviko, Andriamanitro ô, fa Ianao no namorona ahy, mba hahalàla Anao sy ho tia Anao. Tsaroako amin' izao fotoana izao ny fahalemeko miolotra amin'ny herinao, sy ny fahantrako manoloana ny harenao. Tsy misy Andriamanitra afa-tsy Ianao, dia Ilay miaro amin'ny loza, Ilay misy tokoa amin'ny maha-Andriamanitra Azy.

MANDINKA (MANDINGO) (Upper West Africa)

N'sedeya, n'mari ko I'ye n'da le ke I'long aning ka I'batu.

N'sonta n'na sembeng tang ya la aning I'te la bungba ya, N'fua re ya anina I'la bana ya. Ala koteng mang soto fo I'te, I'dembari la, I'meng ye I'fang tarandi. [Page 504]

MASA (MASSA) (Chad, Cameroon Republic)

Nan wi touanou nan sama souloukna Launa vanou nang la nou, â nan wangou grivangou.

Wili ni nan wala toutga vanou ti denota vangou, haouta vanou nan tia tangou.

Lau mara meidi kouta kan nangou samara ma soua meidi.

MASABA: ulu-Bukusu (Lubukusu) dialect (Kenya, Uganda)

Esendi ne bung'ali, O, Wele wase, sikila Ewe wanonga khumanye ne khu khusikamila Ewe.

Nga ndola luno luri, khu mani kase kamakekhe khu bunyali Bwowo, khu butambi bwase, khu buhinda Bwowo.

Saliho Wele okundi nokhali Ewe, Omuyeti mubutinyu, Oliyo yeng'ene.

MASHI (Zaire, Zambia)

Neci Yagirwa Nnamahanga, manyirire oku wandemire mpu nkumanye na nkuharamye.

Bunola nyemire obuzamba bwani n'Obuhashe bwawe, obukenyi bwani n'Obugale bwawe.

Wêne Nnamahanga nta wundi, we burhabale omu mbaka, we Nnamubaho.

ki-MBUNDU (KIMBUNDU)† (Angola)

Ngabana umbangi uami u Nzambi iami, mukonda eiê ua ngi bange pala ku kuijia ni kukubeza.

Ngadifisala mu kitangana kiki o kubuila kuami ne kutena kuê, uadiama uamini unvuama uê.

Kanaku Nzambi iengi kikale Eie ngó, u Mubuludi bu i bidi, u Lenda-diâ lenda.

MENDE: Kpa dialect (Liberia, Sierra Leone)

Selimɔ lɔ a nge. O nya Yewɔi kɛ Bia mia Bi nya gbatɛni kɔɔ ngi Bi gɔɔ ngi yaa a hɛɛ Bi ma.

Nyaa gayema kiahuna, kɛ kpaya gbi ii nya wɛ, kɛ leke Bia kpaya Maha Wai a Bie; nya vɛɛlingɔe, kɛ leke Bia Kpatɛi gbi i Bi yeya.

Ngewɔ weka gbi ii na aa wie kia Bi na.

Bia mia Ba gbɔ mu ma kpundɛ gbi hu. Bia yakpe mia Ndɛvui i Bi hu kunafɔ va.

MORE (MOSSI) (Ghana, Togo, Upper Volta)

Mam yaa kaset soaba, O mam Wênnam, ti yâmb nâana ma ti m bânge la waoge Yâmba.

Mam wilga Yâmba mam pân-komsem morsâ, la Yamb pânga; mam naôngo la Yâmb aezegse.

Wênnam ato ka lebê n bee, kal Yâmb bala, Yâmb yaa asoaba ninga sîn fângda sê n data fângere, Yâmb yaa asoaba ninga sê n bee nè a meng pânga.

NAMA: Damara dialect (Namibia/South West Africa)

TI TA GE RA #GOM !KHUB !NA, TSÌ ||ÌB A GURU AO !KAI SA || BA TA NI #AN TSI IGORE |I SE.

TI #KAWU-SA SIB TSI ||IB IGAIB, TI IGÁSA SIB TSI || IB !KHUSUB, !KHUIXARE I HĀ TAMA HĀ ||IB OSE, HUIB TSU !GĀB DIB, TSI #OBAN HOAN !NÅ.

oru-NDANDI (KINANDE) (Zaïre)

Indi kyimisho, O Nyamuhanga waghe Ngoko wanyihangika okwikuminya n'okwikwanza n'olwanzo lunene Ngaminya okondambi'eno ovolo vwaghe n'ovutoki vwaghe Ovusama vwaghe n'ovungi vwaghu.

Sihali wundi Nyamuhanga oyuti'iwe Oyukasavula omonavi, oyuliho okwiye musa.

isi-NDEBELE (SINDEBELE) (Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)

Ngiyafakasa, O Nkulunkuly wami, ukuthi wangidala ukuthi ngikwazi, njalo ngikukhonze. Ngiyufakaza kathesinje, ngingelamandla kuwe OMkhulu, ebumpofini bami lekunothemi kwakho.

Akakho omunye UNkulunkulu ngaphandle kwakho. UnguMgcini eziNgozini Ungo Ncedayo.

ci-NDONDE (KIMAWANDA, KONDE)+ (Tanzania)

Nilikumanya, wako Nungu wangu, doni undingumba nikumanye nikupambedye Wako. Niku-kumanyia kwa wakati hau, kudidimanga kwangu na chakulula Chako, na umasikini wangu na uhumu Wako.

Apali Nungu junji ni Wako, Wakupwazela Mu-mauvilo Muwikala Umwene wa uti.

oci-NDONGA (AMBO, OCHINDONGA) (Namibia/South West Africa)

Gena okutumbulwa lumwe mootundi Omilongo mbali na ne, Omutenya.

Ongame otandi hempulula Kalunga Kandje, kutya ongoye wa shiti ndje ndi ku tseye ngame ndi ku longele nokukugalikana. Otandi hempulula mpaka uunjengwi wandje moonkondo [Page 505]dhoye noluhepo lwandje mUuyamba woye. Kakuna Kalunga gulwe ponto yoye, Ongoy Omukwathi mUudhigu, Ongoye Omuyapuki.

NGUNI: isi-Swati (SiSwati, Swazi) dialect (Swaziland, South Africa)

Ngiyafakaza, Maye Nkulunkulu Wami, kutsi ungidalele kwekuba ngikwati ngikukhonte. Ngiyafakaza, manje, kutsi anginawo emandla Wena unemandla lesabekako, ngimphofu Wena ucebile. Akekho lomunye Nkulunkulu nguWe kuphela, uMsiti etiNgotini, Wena lotiPhilela nge Kwakho.

NGUNI: isi-Xhosa (!Xhosa, Kaffir) dialect (Botswana, Transkei, South Africa)

Ndiyangqina O Thixo wan ukuba undidalele ukuba ndikwazi ndikunqule. Ngako oko ndiyangqinisisa ngalo eli thuba ngokun- gabinamandla kwam, nobungangamsha Bakho, ngobuglwenpu bam, nangobutyebi Bakho. Akukho Thixo ngaphandle kwakho Oluncedo emngciphekweni Ozimele ngokukokwakhe.

NGUNI: Zulu dialect (South Africa)

Ngi yafakaza, Nkulunkulu wami ukuthi ungidalele ukuba ngi kwazi nokuba ngi Ku konze. Ngi ya qinisa, kulo mzuzu, ukuthi angi namandla wena u namandla onke, nokuthi ngimpofu mina u cebile Wena. Amukho omnye u Nkulunkulu ngaphandle Kwakho, U wu Msizi e ngozini, U zimele ngo Kwakho.

ki-NYAMWESI (NYAMWEZI) (Tanzania)

Ndisanizya, Guku Mulungu wane ati wam- bumba kigele nkumanye na kukwisenga B’eb’e. Ndizumilizya, henaha ku vugayiwa nguzu kwane na kuvusondo wako, kubapina wane na kuvusavi wako. Kuduhu Mulungu ungi sumbwa B’eb’e wak- isa mumaluduko na wa kuhola kuhanya.

NYANG (KENYANG) (Cameroon Republic)

Ntei ntisé o ta Mandem, be me kewoke Wò, ndu beringe Wo ne besepti Wo, ntei ntisé tete ne, ndu bepab ebah ne betang Ebe, bdu nchep eya ne kefor Eke, Mandem achek apu ane acha Wo, Mpeme ndu esongeri ane atei chi ndu metyi.

ci-NYANJA (CHINYANJA) (Malawi, Zambia)

Ndicitila umboni, O Ambuye, Mulungu wanga, kuti munandilenga kuziwa Inu ndi kukondani Inu. Ndibvomela panthawi ino kulefuka kwanga ndi kukula kwa mphamvu zanu, kusauka kwanga ndi kulemela kwanu. Kulibenso Mulungu wina koma Inu nokha Muchinjilizi, Mwini zonse.

ci-NYANJA: ci-Cewa (Chichewa) dialect (Malawi, Zambia)

Ndicitira umboni, O! Mulungu wanga, kuti munandirenga ine kuti ndikudziweni ndi kukupembedzani. Nditsimikiza pa nthawi ino, kufooka kwanga ndi kukula kwa mphamvu Zanu, kusauka kwanga ndi kulemera Kwanu. Palibe Mulungu wina koma Inu nokha, Wothandiza pa tsoka, Wodzithandiza Nokha.

eke-NYAKYUSA: Ngonde (Konde) dialect (Malawi, Tanzania)

Nguyagha nketi wako, E! Kyala wangu, ukuti walimbelile une ukuti ngumanye, nukukwiputa yuyuwe. Ngwitikisya akabililo aka, nensita maka, kangi Mmaka ghako amakulumba, mbutolwe bwangu na mbukabi Bwako. Akayako Kyala uyungi loli yuyuwe popapo, We ntuli mbutolwe, Uliko kubumi wi Mwene.

oru-NYORO (RUNYORO-RUTORO) (Uganda)

Nimpayo obukaiso, Ai Ruhanga wange, ngu niwe wampangire nkuramye kandi nkumanye, nindanga omukasumi kanu, mu bugara bwange kandi mu buguuda bwawe. Busaho Ruhanga ondi, Kwihaho iwe wenka, Omukonyezi omukabi, Anyakwomeera. [Page 506]

OROMIGNA (GALLA, GALLIGNA, GALLINYA) (Ethiopia, Kenya)

ያዋቃኮ አካንሲቤኩፊ አካን ሲሰገዱፊ ናኡሙኬ ተኡሳ ናንመሰከራ " የሮ ከነቲ አኒ ዳዻባተኡኮ አቲ ኡልፋታ ተኡኬ አከሂዮመኮ ፡ ከሶሩመኬሲ ነንሃማ ኣቲ ባራ ረኪና ኡማ ገርጋርሳ ጐፍታ ኦፊንቡላ ፡ ሲመሌሞ ኡማን ገረቢራ አከንጂሬ ነንቤካ ።

PHIKAHNI (submitted from Mozambique)

Ndzi maha a fakazi, oh Xikuembu xa mina. Leŝuaku hambi leŝui u ndzi Wumbeke aku ku tiva ni kuku khizamela. Ndzi maha fakazi hi xikhati xai ŝuoŝui. Agomeni la mina, mintan- wini ya Wena. Aussiwanini la mina awump- fundzini la wena.

Akuna Xikuembu xinwana handlhe ka wena mumpfuni wa tinkarhato ni nwinhi Wamin- tamu.

RIFF (TARIFIT) (Algeria, Morocco)

شَهْدَغْ يَا سِذَ رَبِّ أَمَّ تُمَرَ قَدَي حَمَ أَشَسْنَعْ حُمَ أشْعَبدَعْ ، أَشْهَدَ عَودُ وَغَتَ سَنه ين دَجَهْد أَنَّشُ، رَبَدَ دَي رَاز ، شَكٍّ رَبْدَ

shi-RONGA (SHIRONGA) (Mozambique, South Africa)

Ni hamba bumboni Oh! Šikwembu šanga. Leŝaku nambi leŝi uni bumbiki akuku tiba niku ku nkhinsamela, ni yentša bumboni hi nkama wa ŝoŝi agomeni danga ami ntanwini yaku, abusiwanini bya nga abu pfundini byaku.

Akuna Šikwembu šimbe handle kwaku, mupfuni wa ntikarato nwinyi wa mintamu.

RUANDA (KINYARWANDA, RUN- YARWANDA) (Rwanda)

Ndemera Mungu wanjye, ko wandemeye kukumenya no kugusenga. Muli aka kanya, nemeye amagara make yanjye n'ubushobozi Bwawe, ubukene bwanjye n'ubukungu Bwawe. Ntayind'Imana ibaho itali wowe, Umufasha mu byago, Ubaho kubwe wenyine. [Page 507]

iki-RUNDI (KIRUNDI) (Burundi)

Ndi icabone, Ô Mana yanje, ko Wandemye ngo nkumenye kandi ngo nkusenge. Ndemeje murak' akanya ubuto bwanje n'ubushobozi bwawe, ubworo bwanje n'itunga ryawe. Ntayind'Imana iriho atari Wewe, Utabara mungorane, Uwibeshejeho.

SANGO (SANGHO) (Central African Empire, Chad, Congo Republic)

Mbi yékè témoin, O Nzapa ti mbi, biani Mo sala mbi, si mbi lingbi ti hinga Mo, ti vuro Mo, mbi fa sioni ti mbi na ngoi so na gbèlè Mo, passi ti mbi na ndoyé ti Mo.

Mbèni Nzapa ndé ayékè pépé, gui Mo oko Mo Jo ti bata ajo na ya ti ngangou, Mo yékè lakouè lakouè.

SARA: Sara-Majingai (Madingaye) dialect (Central African Empire, Chad)

M'Guergo Nuba yam, kade oubum, m'Gueri o, m'ndoï o. M'Guer rokum, ngolan'to Togum goto, yi Tog yaï, Rondo yam ke yån kinga yai.

Nuba ke rang ke toï goto, ngue kordje kem yam ke madjalgue te, ngue tog.

SARA: Sara Ngama dialect (Central African Empire, Chad)

Me guer go Allah yam, Kad yi râm Kad m'guério m'doi o. M'guer go rotam, tam ri wa |kam a n ||'áu, ta ci o hoa tsa kári hoa ta ye o |hoa tsa ||"ai |hoa.

Tôra ka ny:e h:ǎ tsàm se, Thō ke hu 'a kwára kwe, kûi se hk'òe kwe.

togoum goto ngang Yai o, ndô yam o i yan kingué Yai. Allah krang ki toi goto, Yi ngué korjiko kem yah ki madjal guetio, Yi kba tel roi yi Allah.

SHONA (Mozambique, Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)

Ndinopupura, O Mwari wangu, kuti makan- disika kuti ndimuzivei nokukunamatai. Ndine umboo panguva ino, mukushaya simba kwangu nesimba Renyu, kuurombo hwangu nekuupfumi Hwenyu.

Hakuna mumwe Mwari kunze Kwenyu Muhatsiri mumatambudziko, Uyo asingade rubatsiro.

SHONA: Kalanga dialect (Botswana, Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)

Ndo pa malebeswa, mu Ndizmu, kuti makandi eta kuti ndi mu zibe ne ku Mu shin- gila. Ndo tendeka mu tjibaka i tjetji, kuti shaya masimba kwangu ne simba Lenyu, Bushayi gwangu ne fumwa Yenyu. A kuna mwe Ndzimu kuzhe Kwenyu. Ntjidzi mu magwadzi, ntjili muli Moga.

SHUA (SHUAKHWE) (Botswana)

Tse hu se re o ké ta kō, tî Tôra to, tsa ta 'a se nya aha, ti tsa 'a 'ǎ na tsa 'a hyaa ma tia. Ta ke é |kam a n ||'áu, ta ci o hoa tsa kári hoa ta ye o |hoa tsa ||"ai |hoa.

Tôra ka ny:e h:ǎ tsàm se, Thō ke hu 'a kwára kwe, kûi se hk'òe kwe.

SIDAMO (SIDAMIGNA, SIDAMINYA) (Ethiopia)

ማጋኖያ አቴ ኤጌኔሞና ሳጋዴሞሄ ጌዴ ባላቆቶኡሁኒራ ማሳካሬሞ ዞ ht: ሌዶ ጮይራሜሞ ወይቴ ጣ ቴ ያና አኔ ዎልቂዌሊማና አቴ ጃባቲማ ፤ አኔ ቡቺ ማና ኣቴ ዱሪማ ኩሌሞ ኣቴ ቡሻ ያና ካላኣንቾ ኢኮቶኒና ሜሲኪኒ ሂራቶ ማጋኒ ቤሎ ዎሉ ማጋኒ ዲኖ [Page 508]

SOMALI (Somalia, Djibouti, Kenya, Ethiopia)

Waxaan marag ka ahay, Eebbow, inaad ii abuurtay aqoonsigaaga iyo caabudidaada. Waxaan hadderba marag ka ahay tabardarridayda iyo karitaankaaga, cayrnimadayda iyo hodanimadaada.

Eebbow, Ilaah kale majiro adiga mooyee, dhibkabixiye, weligijire.

lu-SONGE (KISONGE) (Zaire)

Nankumina shi, Obe Yaya Efile Mukulu ngi bampangile bua kukuiuka na kukuuma. Kano kapindji nambuela bobofule buande na bukome buobe, bulanda buande na bulolo buobe.

Takui mungi Efile bu Obe ni nya, anka Obe apasana ku masaku, Obe namene shi mukitshibue na mungi.

SONGHAI: Zarma (Djerma) dialect (Niger, Nigeria)

Aï Koy-Béro! Aï ga saïda ni naï taka aï mi ni bay-sé, aï mi ni bérey di mo.

Aï tabatandi aï hinabana-ga dini gabo-ga, ai tabatandi-mo aï djang-a dini dura-ga.

Koy-si kan nin daru, nin kan tchi faba-ko, nin kan nini bon taka.

SOTHO, NORTHERN (se-PEDI) (South Africa)

Xore e rapelwe xa tee ka moraxo za masome a mabedi le mentso e mene ya di Iri, Xoba mosexare o moxolo.

Ke nea bohlatse, O Modimo waka, xobane O mpopile xore ke xo tsebe, Ke xo o khunamele. Ke ineela mo nakong e, bofokodi byaka maatleng a Xaxo, bohumanexing byaka Khumong ya Xaxo. Xaxo Modimo e mong xa e se Wena. Mothusi melekong, Wena E o tiileng.

SOTHO, SOUTHERN (se-SOTHO, SESOTHO) (Lesotho, South Africa)

Ke paki, U Molimo oa ka, Uena U mpopetseng hore ke be le tseho ea Hau, 'me ke U khumamele.

Kea itlhatlhoba, motsotsong ona, ho hlokeng matla hoaka ho Ea matla 'ohle, bofumeng ba ka ho ea ruileng tsohle.

Ha ho Molimo o mong hape haese Uena, Mothusi litlokotsing. Ea iphelisang-ka-Boeena.

ki-SUKUMA (Tanzania)

Nalinzunya, Bebe Mulugu wane, giki ukanisumba nakumane Bebe na kukulemilija. Dmzunya ung'wi ikanza ili, ubusunduhazu bone na kunzu jako, mubihabi bone na usabi boko Bebe.

Hatiho Mulugu ugi hambunu Bebe Nduhu Ng'wambilija wa Mayaga, Uyokikalaga Muweyi Ng'wenikili.

SWAHILI (Central and East Africa)

Nashuhudia, Ewe Mungu Wangu, kwamba Wewe Umeniumba mimi kukujua Wewe na kukuabudu Wewe. Nahakikisha, katika wakati huu, juu ya unyonge wangu na uwezo Wako, juu ya umasikini wangu na utajiri Wako.

Hakuna Mungu mwingine ila Wewe, Msaada katika Mashaka, Aliyepo-Mwenyewe.

SWAHILI: Mashingoli dialect (Somalia)

NA SHAHIDHI MNUNGU YUANGU KAMA WEYE KUNUMBA NI KUMAGNE NA IBADHA YAKO NA SH AHIDHI KAMA JERO KUA UZIVU NA NGUVUZAKO NA BILLA NGUVU NA GUDURA YAKO NA UFAGHIRI UANGU NA UTAGIRI UAKO HAKUNA MNUNGU MTUHU ILLA NI UEYE NA HUKUMU YAKO UEYE.

TEMEN (TEMNE, THEMNE): Northern (Sanda) dialect (Guinea, Sierra Leone)

I sɔŋ mǝseri Okuru kami, munɔŋ po bɛmpa mi tǝktara mu; yi kǝbatho mu rǝmǝ lompi. I lanɛ ka alɔkɔ aŋe. I teba ayɛthɛ mi ka munɔŋ kaba afɔɔ: ka amɔnɛ mami yi munɔŋ ka rayola ramu.

Ukuru ulɔm ɔyi yɛsɔ thambe munɔŋ. Ka mar mi ka masibo, munɔŋ I yi gbora təkbatho.

TESO (ATESO) (Kenya, Uganda)

Arai eog ikajenan, Wu Ekadeke, ebe Ijo ibu kosub eog aijen Ijo kakukonokin Ijo.

Etogogogit kapak kana, akalogwau ka agogong Kon, ikabakor ka amio Kon.

Emamei bobo Edeke ece dimarai Ijo, Ekesigalikinan kotoma Amudiaro, elopet-Aijar. [Page 509]

TIGRINYA (Eritrea)

ያ አምላከይ ! ከ ፈል ከነ ኬልቨከ ነ ፡ ከም ዝፈጠ ር ከ ኒ ከም ስከ ከ አ ሎኩ :: አብዛ ከ የ ገዚአ ከ አ : ሻ ጎ ስ ነ ተ ይ ስ ን ፍ ና ይ ን ሰ ይል ሃብ ትሸን ኤረ ጋ ገ ጽ ብ ጊዜ ጸ በ በ ዳ ኢ ኣ ብ ገዛአ ር ስ አ ት ነብር ፡ ብጀካካ ካልአ አምላሸ የሎን ፡፡

TIV (Nigeria)

Mo mngugh shiada, Aondo wam, mfa U gbam wer mfaugh man shi mchivir We. Me fatyo u oron hen shighen ne mer, mo yo mngn a agee ga kpaa ka We tseegh u lu a Tahav ye, shi mngu a kwagh mom mom ga kpaa ka We tseegh u lu a hanma kwagh ye.

Ma Aondo ugen je ngu ga saa We, We u lu Iwasen yam hen sghighen u kwagh atserem kpaa ye, man ka we stsegh u lu Ityongh you mtswen ye.

se-TSWANA (CHUANA) (Botswana, South Africa, Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)

Ke supa bopaki, O MOdimo wa me, gore ke Wena yo O ntlhodileng go Go itse le go Go direla. Ke paka, mo motsotsong o', bokowa ba me go matleng a Gago, khumanego ya me go khumong ya Gago.

Ga gona ope o mongwe Modimo ga ese Wena, Mothusi mo Botlhokong. Motshidi ka Esi ba Gagwe.

TUMBUKA (TIMBUKA, CHITUMBUKA) (Malawi, Tanzania, Zambia)

Nkucita wukaboni, A! Ciuta wane, kuti muli kundilenga ine kuti ndimumanyani imwe, na kumusopani imwe. Nkupanikizga panyengo iyi, kwambula nkongono kwane na kwa nkon- gono zinu zikuru, ku wukavu wane na kuwusambazi Winu.

Kulive Ciuta munyakhe kweni ndinwe pera, Muvwiri muvisuzgo, Muliko bamoyo Mwekha.

TOBOTE (BUSARI, BASSAR)† (Ghana, Togo)

N’sah sédah danh, ô N’botou, yi Ahsah woun' naméh yi m'bésseh kn'gnonkisseh. N'dakah n'yountinéh n'wofíyi ah ponhou n'sori ah gadjatih.

N'botih oubo catibi ki kouti Apouh, Oun'd- joh im' koumnéh, Oune'dibih Oubahpouéh.

WOLOF* (JOLOF, OULOF) (The Gambia, Mauritania, Sénégal)

Seedenaa ne, yow suma yála ne dangama sos ngir ma xam la, jaamu la, Seedenaa ci jamano ci suma ñák katan ak ci sa mágaay, ci suma mbaadola ak sa am-am.

Beneen yale amul ku moy yow, ndimbal gi ci musiba, ki dul daanu.

ci-TONGA, MALAWIAN (KITONGA, SISKA) (Malawi)

Ndichitiya ukaboni, O Chiuta wango, kuti mukundilenga kuti ndikuziweni ndikumuso- pani Imwe. Ndikhozga, panyengu yinu, kufowka kwangu ndikukuwa kwanthazi zinu, kusawuka kwangu ndikulemera kwinu. Palivi Chiuta munyaki kweni Imwi-pe, wakovya pasoka, wambura kusowa kanthu.

ci-TONGA, ZAMBIAN (PLATEAU TONGA) (Zambia)

Ndime kamboni mwami Leza wangu, kuti wakandilengela kuti nkuzibe alimwi nkukombe. Ndazumina cino ciindi kuti ndimuteteete webo ndiwe singuzu, mebo ndimucete pele webo ulimuvubi.

Kunyina umbi Leza zunze kwako ndiwe mugwasyi mumapenzi esu, ulapona mukuyanda kwako.

ci-YAO (CHIYAO) (Malawi, Mozambique, Tanzania)

Nguwichila umboni O Mlungu jwangu! Kuti Mwanenjile une, kuti nim'manyilile nikum- popela. Ngwitichisya pa-je ndawi jino, kulem- buka kwangu niukulu wa machili Genu, kulaga kwangu nikupuka Kwenu.

Pangali Mlungu jwine akawe M'mwe Jikape, Wakamusya muyakogoya.

YAOURÉ (YAHORE) (supplied from Ivory Coast)

Bie na yé. E Bali, Bie man gnain ambolah, Biandrè yémitô gnenmipan. Bian pah lah nah goo.

Bié plebble le main pleublé. Kah é kiand ahngna ya leh tehzan, gnien bré ki fè yezan Bali péh kah lénah blé. Ouizoude oui péhnon yéh qui guir re yahe evleeah. [Page 510]

YORUBA (Benin, Nigeria)

Mo se ijerii si i, Iwo Olorun mi, pe Iwo da mi lati mọ ọ ati lati sin O Mo jewo ni akoko yi niti ailagbara mi, atiniti agbara Re, niti aini ati niti Ola Re.

Ko si Olorun miran bi ko se Iwo Oluranlowo nigba isoro, Eni ti ki i ku, Ẹni ti o le da duro.

ZANDE (Central African Empire, Congo Republic, Sudan, Zaire)

Mi ni gamu bolo, ai Mboli, wa ma vungule tipa hinolo, tipa hilisolo. Mi idi, ti ku logobo le gimi nangala na gamu ngulu, gimi lungo na gamu hiliso.

Meinongo kula Mboli balo 'te, Kuko na hundo a bolo lo lungo yo, Kuko nala na a gala nitiko.

olu-ZIBA (olu-HAYA) (Tanzania)

Ninjuliza Iwe Katonda wange, okwo Niwe wantonzile kukumanya Inye kandi noukuabudu Iwe. Ninjuliza akanya aka, ombujege bwange kandi nomumani Gawe, no omubunaku bwange kandi nomubutungi Bwawe.

Taliyo Katonda ondijo shana Iwe, Omujuni omunaku, Nyakubaho.

B. THE AMERICAS

• Denotes revised translation.

ALACALUF (Chile)

Chao quijéna, O Arka K’séles chewe. Chao illatana chi quijena, chi afsaksta. Chao quijena laf, che keáp. Chao chechal-eché, che keáp, chao akiai. Chao tarso ak’senes, chao ala’ai. Che asár. Chao ak’senes.

• Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

ALEUT: Eastern dialect (Cyrillic characters) (Alaska, Aleutian Islands, Siberia)

Имина лина андахтихъ акб кина Игогона Агана АГИНАХ АКБутхина, тина АКАТАЛИХА Клюка имина KAMIAKЯNZ, SANZ, racAMZ H_ ANZ CANAɣz THSHAгACAHAH Блоха акатаккина каюха кадимига агнаха АНАНА H&HZ KHNSŕHTACAKSKHHZ KAWXZ TEKSCAHAHA.

Угайкимина Игогока Алька ВГАЙКИ АМИН" Ан ATAMZ АМА МАЛГАКАНАНЫ MAXZ HAAHZ THMHHZ CH_ CMHK8XZ CMHKSY AAAKAXZ.

THNZ AMACH, ES'NE'PIO, TARAÑA PEHÜAMEN NAÑA AMA ES NE CHENO. PA ATAR PE' CHEQUEM AMA' EÑALLE POPOŇ YOMPOR ENE PIA NET YEYENPUENE ERA PIAREN YE'SEN NET EŇALLETETSA NOT.

APACHE: Mescalero dialect (United States)

Bikeguindan ne na sha; Bikeguindan nibika' nshin ti, negusii, ashi ni chi itedishdlii binka. Dakugu adishdi, shi shin dzileyaedį. Ndi ni dzilegulj, shi te'nsjjne, aku ndi yata diyi dike nishi jash. Na'shi duhan kato bikegu dahindada, dandina nikegu dahinda, naichudanne. Ha'a duguzhuda a agutegu dandi niKeguinda.

ARAUCAN (submitted from Panama)

Nas Kakaravico, Manan hizana Yuesanguasi nagasananguasi.

Iva testigo name maguasiri avinaskaví mare nómasina guneri, Ayua Zakaravico cuni maimani. Be maseingunamase gacaca Bema nenán avuankin.

AMUESHA (Peru)

NA PA NECHMETENEP NEPARESTSS YOS PACA NEYECHCATE. AÑEQUEP OCH NECHMETAP NAMA OCH NESHERWIAP.

ARHUACO+ (Colombia)

Matuni gukui naji Ghalaghwasha ma naghwamalé má natunanamighzeja (y adorarte) matuni gukwa ghaika gwásu nituku, má ghamamekwa yá daznada nashi dazna ghawia, [Page 511]ayze nadaki yá Ghalaghwasha yónagholija niashi yonghwapa.

AYMARÁ (Bolivia, Peru)

Nayajja unjtwa Dius Tatay, jumawa lurista nayaru jumaru unt'añataki, yupaychanataki, nayajja unjtwa anchhicha uruna jani ch'amanita ukama; juma ch'amanitama, naya- jja uñjaraktwa anchhicha uruna jani kunanita ukama, juma taqe kunanitama, janiwa yaqha Dius Awkijja utjkiti. Juma spakitawa, jumawa yanapt'iritajja taqe jan walinakansa, jumawa utjta juma pachapata.

BAURÉ (Bolivia)

Di reshitóu, to vekiyir, piti kem shokóvi kesko vichipti ash vekiyichip. Di reshiróu nerekike, doka nasé rejën ash piti asérokon, di pohour ash piti kótirón.

Do kat kapónpóu ponshohué piti. Piti as inkoróbi ash chapchóvi doka kansérpou tikuer ti.

BRIBRI (Costa Rica, Panama)

YERUR BEBIKETSU BERO YE SIBU ECUEKY BETUYEYU EDIRIRSU EBIKETSU YE WASCHEN Y YERURETA YE QUE DIRIRCHETA, BERCHE TAIE YE SIORARA BE BURU TAIE ER KIO QUE SIBU SCATU BE IMEKE YISCATU YEI SKIMENE ISURUETA IERBI IBUBRABA IEBUSCO IBUBRABA.

CAKCHIQUEL (Guatemala)

Yin nibij riyeht, nu Dios, yin aquiytisan ri nuguatamaj aguach y gantiguajó.

Yin nibij ri jun ti rato ré ri nu ban y riyalan ri aguachuka, ri nu mebahil y ri abellomal.

Majun chik jun Dios mas que regui riyet, ri gatohon cheré ru queyebal, ri xa ban riret mismo.

CAMPA (Peru)

Naka cantacotirirí, nashi nowabani abirota- qui ovettzikaquena, oncantcha niyotantaiymiri nancanenpi. Nocantaco timpi iroñaca te noshinttzitage pishinttzincaqui Noca nashinonca. Abiroka pashararo. Tekattzi pishini pawa. Abiroka pamitacotana ocaven- cati, abiroka añincari.

CARIB: Galibi (Cariña, Karinja) dialect (Brazil, French Guiana, Guyana, Surinam, Venezuela)

AOU SOUGOUCA TAMOUCHI, TWUE GASSER O OIR OIR A YOU OUCOUTOMER MENGAR O SE OIRTIOMER.

AOU SOUGOUCA ET LOU MELO, AOU PALIPEOIR A YOU ABOROT MENGAR QUADAMADOR A YOU OIR BOROT RICHEMINS.

A MOEIR OUR TE LA PASMENT TAMOUCHI A OIR LA NO COLAT DANDER COMOMINPOENT OA ASSEQUERO.

CARIB: Moreno dialect (submitted from Honduras)

Au pu'uneauwa. O Lloso kuru, amoro puas- canenpo amoro mana adupu'ustoome érome óseguachoome. Au pu'uneauwa co'ollene éropo, au piorésmaba érome amoro tu paripiín, au poreauwa érome amoro tu cabal- lero.

Lla'aba Lloso amu bátuman abiñoscopore, abapune lapiopunta adasta, amántoto aseque tu cuguentaremue.

CARIB, ISLAND (CARIBE)† (submitted from Honduras)

lidas dimii amiidi lan maniguaty munilla vaa- Lun nasñaneyaa lidaa ven gaadeirei daan nibey bo ubabey.

! Bungui neigeichy. Búgiellaa agúrea- jaavadinaa.

Sun nazúbú dirúnibieú. Sun biciendeiu: nugulaa bobabey lindao danlee luagu beere suma billariañaa.

Luguli luma Birizi.

Uvaaty amú Búngiú.

Bubedigisa le Hidajabey lidaan Hinavariny Luagu. Burigúana ru.

CATIO+ (Colombia)

Bútru mua asia Búra caira cawabamanea Búra zhi biara jaraita. Ma jaraya jōmaža Bú ne éaba múa o be ea. Búra wārinu obeya. Mura zhi supuriata Búra shi wai bua bara buta.

Búra Caragabia tewara ne ea. Shi dai ne cazhirua cawade ni mi buru ewate Bú tru careba bua Béra to aba bua tewara wai ea bu ea. [Page 512]

CHEROKEE (United States)

ᏓᏓᏁᏤᎸ ᏗᏓᏙᎵᏍᏙᏗ ᏍᏆᎳ ᏓᏓᏁᏤᎸ ᎠᏓᏙᎵᏍᏙᏗ ᏌᏊ ᎢᏳᏩᎪᏗ ᎠᏓᏙᎵᏍᏙᏗ ᏏᎦ ᎨᏒᎢ. ᎢᎦ ᎠᏟᎢᎶᎯᎲᎢ .

ᎠᏴ ᏥᎦᏔ, ᏥᏃᎮ , ᏂᎯ ᏍᏆᏁᎳᏅᎯ, ᏍᏉᏄᏅ ᎠᏴ ᏂᎯ ᎬᏲᎵᎩ ᎢᏳᎵᏍᏙᏗᏱ, ᎠᎴ Ꮒ ᎬᏯᏓᏙᎵᏍᏓᏁᏗᏱ Ꭰ Ᏼ Ꭼ ᏂᎨ Ꮢ ᏂᎬᏁ, ᏥᏃᎮ, ᎪᎯ ᎠᎵ- ᎵᏒᎢ. ᎠᏴ ᎾᏆᏝ ᏂᎬᎬ Ꮎ Ꭸ ᏒᎢ, ᏂᎯ ᏣᏝ ᏂᎬ Ꭼ Ꮻ ᏂᎬᏅᏓ . ᏤᎾᎢᏳ ᎨᏒ ᏫᏂᎬᏓ . ᎠᎴ ᎠᎩᎾᎥᎢ ᏂᎯ ᎥᏝᏃ ᏄᏓᎴ ᎤᏁᎳᏅᎯ ᏱᎩ, ᏂᎯ ᏨᏒᎯᏳ ᏍᎩᏍᏕᎵᏍᎩ ᎠᎴ ᏍᎩᏳ Ꮣ ᎴᏍᎩ ᏂᎦᎥᎢ ᎠᎴ ᏂᎪᎯᎸᎢ . ᏂᎯ ᏨᏌ ᎠᎵᏍᏕᎵᏍᎩ .

CHIPAYA (PUKINA) (Bolivia)

Wertre Yooz distike amchuaweke pachamke paj zapa, amkin Mayziz zapa, anz- chiruktra tee urake, wuer am azizaricha, wer anachullchica, amke thapa chulltakchichmcha, mazek yakha Yooz zallzzie, yanapt'icha anawalinakista, amzestra personkistra.

CHIQUITANO† (Bolivia)

Y quiococa hoy baistuparrá tagú na hay samuté para suputaru y anauno. Chusa quisri napanaucu chacusivica taya acheca. Chanapú tiatarrs bacher un tañá naqui baiytuparrs bayurá iño untañas ugge chusá quirrs

CHOCÓ, COLOMBIAN (Colombia)

Mi marchi, en berá, ma criabuá ma criamá tachi afuni. Mi marchi empera muena, quema quinupineabua mu truá, paratani quinú emp- era patabarabia. Tachi sese audubua, care facia pea bodota tachi sese ituba bua.

CHOCÓ, PANAMANIANT (Panama)

Müira testigua tayhí Ancoré bedea devena büía odávera injásita büi cavavai carea y büi carea triabaya.

Müira testigua nahua enda fuerza nee büímina y büira necua büímina, pobre büímina y büira nejomá iri büímina, Dayhí Ancorera abábüiri büi úmera neea, Tayhi care bávarira porque büiábira pueábirí jomá mana büibera.

CONIBO: Shipibo dialect (Peru)

Enra mia onanque nocon Dios, min ca jonia iqui mia onanti itan rabite, Enra ohuiquen ramabicon yosma betan min coshi, ea jahue- quioma itan mia jahuequiya

Yamaraque huetsa Dios mia quesca, jan noa aquinti onsanconia, mia iqui minbish ja.

CREOLE, HAITIAN (Haiti)

Moin temoin, O mon Dieu, que ou cree um pou moin reconnait ou, pou moin Adore ou, moin gin conscience ya de impuissance moin avec pouvoir, grandeur ou et richesse ou tou. Pa gin lot bon Dieu cancou ou, ce ou qui secouri nan tout mauvais moment ce Ou qui fort passe tout.

CUNA (KUNA) (Colombia, Panama)

Be nuga an nudakedi, Be an Baba, Pe pin- sadí anudakégala. Pe purba anualicágwa, perguínanmala an bendake. Pe purba anse oguaegala, neitirpimákar abdaibugua. Pe do di napiraguad tule tumad, percuable per carmadi.

DAKOTA (SIOUX): Lakota dialect (Canada, United States)

Wakan Tonka mitawa slol ceye na ceyo onihau kta ca maya gage. Mahon ke sni na neye ni waski, onma si he na naye nejinca, lel owape hin el epin kte. Okokipe na ni som onyanki yapi, Wakan Tonka ni some towa wi sin.

DIEGUEÑO (KUM-YİY) (Mexico, United States)

Néá mat-e-kénőp, O Myhá, Nea-pów we-ów Whee ach-ple Whee. Néá mat-e-kénóp néá-pel spir-máuw Mŷhá quáw-tie, ti-poll Shin nèá wü queen-a-witch quáw-tie. Něá ma-eye něá mitch tå-på máuw Mŷhá Shin, Myhá nü-ik Niambě něá wů Ma-lie me-toy-yám, Yike nå Mitch-päshów.

GOAJIRO (GUAJIRO) (Colombia, Venezuela)

Tatuja auch, piá Maléiwaa, piain ainjin taya zupúla terrájuin piá ma aijachin tapula piá Tatuja auch jolucho, marchin tayá ma piainja katchin, mulieshtayá pumá piainja washirin. Nójoish wané maléiwa makaika piá, ja makai jumúin ekai mojúin mukuwaipa, chi ekai numúinwa. [Page 513]

GUAHIBO (GUAJIBO) (Colombia, Venezuela)

Jjánu tánuje, Oh tája Dios, nejjáname cayaputajitsiétsi pinijiyómu. Jjánu táneju ajéna conojjáe táneje pacpáinajn, jjáme asaubéjemu; jjáne bijyóbene y jjáme acábecobuyeimu.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): Keewatin dialect (Canada)

PAGAL JOL sacp- بادbPrld بابا adal A Jodo LQ AJobral ALL ALbrad Aro JncbгL AA Bra Ab- A JAɔLA.

Apoejanáime itsá Dios pecatojjéntsinu, necayayénena piayai-cujiro, bajará-poné ecarápeju poné piyesáutja.

GUAYMÍ (Panama)

Ti es gáde, Oh Nubŭ tígüe! Mägués ti mígá ni tubá Mädrugaí gáde tí-e. Butá tigüé es mátaréde. Ti-e gáde ménguáre. Ti tŭ braí mátů críbidä. Ti täbre riqueza mähüé būtá. Nubů můdá nácarr.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): Kobuk (Kotzebue). dialect (Alaska)

Ookauheieah, aungayootmang, eilvich einik- taheima eilichoheilotin sooli pikhaheitcoplo- tin. Ookauheieach ahkoovuk syaktoiliah sungeepnune; nohleiliah oomalholiknune. Autlamik aungayotachuke ahvatipcoon, ekahyokti nuvaynami, engmik pityi.

Mäbe ítibé mä ára dé migága mä ára ni nobá bidiga.

HAIDA (Alaska, Canada)

Hlaa, weiyat suus uu dii dung Tl'aahlaany; eihl uu saa dungeng dii guudengaan. Uhl giis- luu wy'aat tlii dii xaagaas k'an uu, is siis dii k'ungisgdygaas k'ang tlii dung iitlaa gadaas. Dung squun nuueitl dung klaaiidunggung. Dung kil Eihl ging gets sqwaagu saang.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): Barren Grounds dialect (Canada)

Uvanga qauyititsivunga tapsuma Gutip sanala ursimamanga imminik qauyimaqupluni tugsiavigiqublunilu. Tukisititsivungalu man- amit pitguniqanginimnik tapsuma pitguni- qaninganut, akslunimnutlu aksluinirnut. Asingnik Gutitaqangilaq igvit kisiuit, ikay- uqtauyargiaqaniptinit ilingnit ayugaqan- gitumit.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): Barrow (North Slope) dialect (Alaska)

Ilisimarauruga Godiin, Ilinnun savaŋatilaam- nik Ilisimatquvlutin suli nanġaquvlutin. Quli- aqtuagigiga akkupak suaŋŋataiññiga suli ilvich suaŋŋatiqpain, uvana iliappauniga suli ilvich umialgunigin.

Allamik Godaitchuq ilvich avatikkun, ikayuillarutin siġġaġniuġnami suli ilimik analatchumiñaiquni iliruni.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): South Baffin Island dialect (Eastern Arctic Syllabics) (Canada)

JYCDL, JA, SecPLAL BD- PLYDON DR HARD don Do Lac Phool Del brore, od ALLA ANG JACbFL.. b^<> < b c c ADC <) Jan ALS AT ADC ADC Ja>>>n"

JICAQUE (XICAQUE) (Honduras)

¡O Dios Mand! An timnon ni na mayá, si suanda was ten iga. Po qui noi es sun. Dios, te qua la ti way, na polra monse sa a ti qui Dios pa ha li cum. Pan u hay Dios, in oy le Dios, un ving baten Dios.

KALISPEL (SALISH): Flathead dialect (United States)

Quin Kolinstuten, lu til Anawee U ko kolintwhu lu que ks soohum U que ks putenem. Ku yes konkonstinum yetilwha lu ye til eass.hopt U jasyoyit, U ye til eas konquint U jas s.koyoleewhu.

Tat suewet wes olkosheetums oopen es olkosheetwhu lu es yapastenee. Lu ta epl chinaks Kolinstuten, e.chimish Anawee.

KOYUKON (Alaska)

Ego ninh nit'odeetaaghath'aa' ts'a nits'a hadeenaaghasdaak ts'a haghance go ninh kkokk'a neeseeneenłtaanh ts'a isee huyił asiniyh. Sinh nitt'il eent'aanh dahoon see hał [Page 514]

KUCHIN (KUTCHIN) (Alaska)

eelstr'ilaa. Doyonh eenlaanh dahoon saahaa k'its'ohudeeht'aa ts'a eesee koon huyił asinihy. Ninh yaan' adit'o deenlit'aa ts'a ninh yaan' Dinaahuto' eenlaanh.

Nawandak shi'jj, shiVit'eegwijyaahcy'aa shoghtsaij naahashandaii ts'a' nats'a' khagihih- jyaa geenjit. Juk geegwaldak shat'aii kwaa, nat'aii nitsii shigehdan t'oonchy'aa nidehtee gwintsii

Neeghaii łaa K'eegwaadhat gwanlij kwaa gogwaajat dai' gwits'iinyaa. Khik gwandaii gin-

KUCHIN (KUTCHIN): Fort Yukon dialect (Alaska)

Osi vittekueichanchyo, netitinihsha, Nit tsut. Kititihchya tenitenitutula Kenjit, kuikit sidhatsei choog. Tzut-nikueinidhut. Sut tei, Kkuea ei tzut. Sinersitkwichachyo, nitsi, nichile Kitinichi. Nekhe, vittekwichanchyo Koolikkua, nunrzi, kookontrhi. Tei, kwutsut thitihndul. Kokwadhun.

KUCHIN: Loucheux dialect (Canada)

Sit ve tte kwut cha chyoo nya le sen dei ako nit tsut ki le ti chya choog. Kwe tha zit te let ti nja. Sit tei kkwa, kwit zit nun nit chi tei, sit ne rsil kwit cha chyoo kwi zit. Ako nit kwit chilee chi zyoo kkwa nun zi.

Vitte kwit cha chyoo kouko nyoo, kwut tsut tri chi ili.

LOKONO (CONTINENTAL ARAWAK) (Guyana, French Guiana, Surinam)

A baa bekotoi gia ka de Wathinathie bie wa maritana da de dei thien bia be goe nang da sika da-ka-ke-wa gowe babong. Tataa-go damong ka sjoko dja rong, bee wa tataa abo- na, matho damoeneka dja ko mahto baboewa djako. Abathie go sabona, Adajaali bie rong kie, bie rong kie boeroewata na ma da de damoeneka loko de bie rong kie.

MACHIGUENGA (Peru)

Viro Naro noncamantaquetería, Aparioshi, camictitaqeria pitomidákena narunocama táqueri narotáqui noneaquitém- bira y nungamagitaquémbira Viro. Pineaqué- nari oca maicca teranagábe pagabeáquena teranonsanmaíte Viro pashe.

Mameri pashiniacparióshi payoyabisaqui- viro irirori ymectacutáqueri notsaroganáque, iriori ictímira por irirori.

MAPUCHE (ARAUCANIAN) (Argentina, Chile)

Ng illatun raŋiñ antü men.

Inche waldaŋun, Eimi Nganechen, Eimi tremümen tami kimafiel tañinillatuael. Inche wǝldǝŋun feula tami neweŋen, iñche yafüŋelán; tami ülmenŋen, iñche weshacheŋen. Ngelai ka Ngǝnechen Eimi mǝten, kellukelu kunin men, kishu moŋelnieulu.

MAPUCHE: Chilean dialect* (Chile)

Feipiael, ülkantuael, rañi antüle zeuma. Wül zunun ta inche, Awem Nünechen, eimi mi tremumol, tami kimafiel, tami poienael. Mupiñ, feula tani wezakonañen, ka tami newen nen, tani kuñifall ñen ka tami ulmen ñen. Eka nelai Nünechen Eimi müten, Kel- lukelu ta kuniu meo, Kizu Moñen ñelu.

MASCO: Huachipairi (Amaracaeri) dialect (Peru)

Do a Waadic apagapi, pecuite Diosta wac- nopunwate, yadpaunwate wanopunwate wabuanda wayoro queri paida iue un dicnanda inupuene catembet iene nunda apag ewe ue ununin wambachiwapuere, dacue eete joaeri.

MASCOY: Lengua dialect (Paraguay)

Acyasamco coo Dios Sivaninquiscama alhta Thip yuyan oyicpilcojo quinjan opayicsojo. Acyasamco coo Dios janjay apyimatemlhip acma apquilatam paj poc Dios apasmom najan ayasomquilha avanquilhip Dios emyoc.

MATACO (Argentina, Bolivia, Paraguay)

Ohap okalethtayajwo, oka Dios, Ta Am ta enekno yamlek otajwueth amej wet ochaame.

Ohap okelethtayajwo hapet atana ta tek okaj- nayaj ihi wet Am akajnayaj, hap opathtseyaj wet Am aniyatyaj.

Tsi tek iche eth Dios thamet Am, o-eth ta Ichote ta owitay ihinya, o-eth Tek latunj- wuaihi. [Page 515]

MAYA (Belize, Guatemala, Mexico)

Ten ilé, oh, in Jajal-Dios, tech dzaen yolal in kajoltquech yolal kulquech. Ten iláe tí jun- zutáj, minaan in muk, teché yan ȧ muk, otzilen; teche ayiklech yetel yacunail. Minaan u laak Jajal-Dios, chen tech, tech ca antaj can anac baal kaz, cu cuxtal chen letí.

MICMAC (Canada)

Oeligtjitjito, O NISGAM, Gil gisiitepotjit gisi nenolin a gepmitelmolim. Oelnimito, enge asma, nin mnagôtim ag Gil migignôtim, nineolegeagnin ag Gil milsotim. Mo eimog piloei Nisgam pasig Gil tan Apognimasoti metoegigtog ag Gil laptjoei.

MISKITO (Honduras, Nicaragua) (MOSKITO)

Yang witnisna O God man yangra paskatma man kaikaia bara man mayunaia. Yang nan witnisna naha pyua sip apia kapri bara man karnikamra; yang umpira lakasna bara man ailalka.

Nan.

Bahara God apusa bamansma. Help Patra, ba mita witin Selp rayasa.

MOHAWK (Canada, United States)

Wa-geh-ni-wha-gwa-risi, Ook Niyo, Neh Ihse dá-ká-dis-son ne á-gon-yen-dé-rih-hok ta-non dá-gon-non-wha-ra-don-sek. wá-geh- ri-wha-ni-rot, nook-non-wa. ji-niah-teh-geh- suts-teh ta-non Ihse, ji-ni-seh-sots-tens-seh- ro-waneh, ji-ni-wá-ki-den ta-non ji-ni-sah- gwe-nya-tsa-ro-wa-nen. Ihya-gonega oya ne niyo néok Ihse, ne-gah-yeh-na-wa-tsérá neh- yo-da-ri-hok, ne-ihse sa-ri-wha-gwa-noh.

MOTILON (Venezuela)

Aue cutré Papachí yupune, amo sanuta tacomena céntopo yopone, aue cutré amicha yarsna i muquepe, aue camisique i amo apenyóntaca. Guáneque conipa Papachí, cumarco Papachi agüéyabo a'n'tace anipape guáneque yóntaca.

MOXO: Trinitarios dialect (Bolivia, Brazil, Paraguay)

Núti néchoyóre, oh Viya, piti pepyaknó'i tayé'é nimotviraviyre éne njiruchviyre. Necho- vóyre té fuíti naripu tahina ntumayvina. Ene piti túmevijch'á, núti póvréno éne piti ricovi'i. Nahina ponéna Viya pkévorichu piti, p'áyudachvokówi té' to vyátahibóno, éma maké-voríchu kjówrikówri.

NAVAJO (United States)

Diyin Shitaa' Nínílíni shít beehozin éí athínáhodiilzijh biniighé áshijnlaa áádóó Niji' sodiizin do. T'áá k'ad bee haszíí', háálá shich'i' nahwii'ná áádóó Ni t'éiyá Nidziil, té'é'í shidaah ndahkai áádóó Ni t'éiyá t'áá ałtsoní Ni holó. T'áá Ni t'éiyá Aláadi Diyin nilí háálá nihich'i' nahwiììá'ígíí t'ạạ' fíníńsin, Hool'áágóó Honilo.

OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Mississagi dialect (Canada)

Gi windimon, Nimin Dom geget Geen ogee ozhi yun odji kenmin nan gaie odji Anamie ton

Nan.

N windima gae nongoom, ezhi bedjee wee yan Geen dush epeecheeweeyun, Nigidi- magiziwin pee dush Geen gwandiziwin. Kawin waia bikan Manido Geen eta, Widokazwin Sinagaziwining, Mindjimnaman Bimadziwin.

OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Salteaux (Saulteaux) dialect (Canada, United States)

Gee Kayne dah mah zon, Ke shay Manito, che ke kayn ne me nan, Shegwah che mah wim we to nan, Che mean e go e ze yan. Che ke kayne ne me nan ke kaye da ma zon ke zong e ze win she quah neen aye pee chee nay sou e ze yan, shegwa ka a pe chee we note e ze yun. She gwah neen apee chee ke tee mak e ze anne. Keen aye ta go ka Manito win, ka we che tas so win, Apee saig e ze an, kah ke kay kah ah ya yin.

OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Woodlands dialect (Canada, United States)

Neen dibaindaun kikaindamowin O neend Gitche Manitou, tchi keen ge gezhetod neend tchiway kikaindjigay keen gahyay tchiway aunamiaytahwah keen, Neen megiway debaudjimowin, tchigayi mahndan ningopas- sangwaubiwin, tchiway neen kawween gash- kiyaywisiwin gahyay tchiway ke mash- kauwisiwin, tchiway neend kitimaugisiwin gahyay tchiway ke dauniwin. Eemahgay kauw- sen bahkaun Gitche Manitou, anishaydask keen, widokaugaywin pindje bapinisiwaugan, tebinahway aupidanisiwin yegibimadis. [Page 516]

OTOMI (Mexico)

Ji testigueska, oh juchiti tatá diosi, eskarini t'u kueraska parakini mitini ka k'eri ambé arhinguini. Ji testígueska ia iasi, juchiti jukapárhakueri ka chiti uiŋápikueri para iámindu ambé uni, juchiti komu jáŋgueri ka no ma jatsíkuarhikueri ka chiti chiti kánikua jakapárhakueri jimbokari iámindu ambé jat- siska.

No jarhasti máteru tatá diosi eŋga sánderu k'erika eska cha, emaŋga jarhóajpka enga kánikua uétarhijka, emanga jarhajka mentku isi nájkiru no nemá jarhóataka.

PAPIAMENTO (Aruba, Bonaire, Curaçao)

Mi ta doena testimonio, o mi Dios, coe Bo a cria mi pa mi conoce Bo y pa mi adora Bo. Mi ta testigo na e momento aki di mi flaqueza y di Bo poder, di mi pobreza y di Bo rikeza.

No tin ningun otro Dios, sino Bo, e auxilio den Peliger, Esun coe ta subsisti di su mes.

PIRO (Peru)

Gita testigo goyakalo pixa gira uturu petashatanru nunanu gita gi ixchcota gika gike wanciru, pixa waneru ponikolu maleshnu satu goyakalu. Pixa satu pupxakan nukyo wikolni pixa pagoone tengogne

QUECHUA: Bolivian dialect† (Bolivia)

Noqa rikuni, Aa Apu Yaya Diusniy, Qan rikhurichiwasqaykita rejsisunaypaj, yupay- chasunaypaj. Cheqamanta yachani kunan- pacha mana atiyniyoj kasqayta, Qan Manchay Jatun atiyniyoj kasqaykita, mana imayoj kas- qayta jinataj Qan Qhapaj Kasqaykita. Mana Waj Apu Yaya Dius kanchu Qanmanta astawan, Pichus mana allimpi yanapakuj, Pichus Kaj Payllamanta.

QUECHUA: Cuzqueño dialect (Peru)

Noqan yachani, Diosniy, qampaq kanawas- kayquita recsinaypaq, yupaychanaypac. Yachanitaqui kunan pachapi, nana atiyniyoq qqaskayta, gampaq jatun atiyniyoq kaskayta, waqcha kaskayt, kcapaq cayniquita.

Manan joc Diosniy kanchu qanmanta as- tawan nana allinkunamanta yanapaqniykun, qqanllan Diosniy kausanqui qqanllamanta.

QUECHUA: Ecuadorian dialect* (Ecuador)

Nuca dius tistigu cani ñucaman viñachiscan- gui Canman sirvingapa alabaringapa. Tistigu cani cay ratuta ñuca, mana ushay cani, Canmi tucuy ushay Cangui, nuca pubri cani Quiquin chari cangui Mana Tianpash shug Dius ashta yali hurmana huraspi yanapangui Canmandal- latami causangui.

QUICHÉ (Mexico, Guatemala)

In xin wiló, oh nu Dios, chi ri at xinaq'uisaj rech quin weta'maj awach y quin lok'ok'ej awach Weta'am quin ri camic ri' na c'o ta ri nu chok'ab y ru, nimal ak'ij ri at, ri nu meba'li in ri ak'inomal ri at.

Maj jun chi Dios xew ri at, at ri cat tob pa ri jun c'ax, y ri ca c'aslic chi rilic rib.

SALISH, PUGET SOUND (United States)

"astǝtildx" čad, šaq si'ab, dabad dx" al kwi t(u)adshuyuc dxwal ki gwadsǝs(h)ay- dubicid. gwal ask "adicut ki gǝdstiwit dxal dǝgi. lacut čǝd ?al ti?a? al ti xi gadsqiq" i t(i) adsg"a" adsq"iq", dxwal ti'a(") dsas'ušababdx"il it(i) adsga itqah. xi ki balǝli šǝq siab dx">al dagi, dx sk"ax"ax" "al skakil, ki a ck Waqid ǝsista.

SHOSHONI (SHOSHONE) (United States)

NEE OO-KOO TI SOOM BADUGH UPEH SOOK DA-MEH UH NU-MEH NIP-H UMEH DA-MEH SOOM BA-DO-H KHANDO-HUMEH DA-MEH OIYOS NA-NEH SHOON-DI KHAN-DOH. NEH UGH SOOKA DA-GWATS, NEH WI-H GA HEENA MA-BA-NI-Wİ-HÜNEH WI-H DA-MEH GOO-PANDH, WI-HU DA-MEH DIH TIH HAUNC UMEH WI-HU DA-MEH OYOI-DEH-WHUP. UNEH WI-HU DA-MEH UPEH GA-DEAS 00-AH NEESH DA-MEH UPEH BI-H UNEH WI-DU DA-MEH BOONIH UPEH, DA-MEH DEH-MA-ZI-DH DIH TIH DA-MEH NA KHANC OIYO-GOOS HE-INH GOO-PAS NANA-SOO-WOO ĠINDH.

SHUARA (JIVARO): Aguaruna dialect (Peru)

WIRJAÍ ETSEGNUNUK, MINA APUJU, EMEMÁTJITI WAITUKTUSAM NAJATUA- WAITAN DUWI. [Page 517]WÍTJAI CHICHÁGKAGTINUK YA BAISH- KAM, AME SENCHIJUM SUGUSBAWA DUWI YABAIK ÁGKAN PUJÁJAI.

TIKICHIK AMEA IBAUK ATSAWAI, ISHA- MAINUMVAIJÁTMAINUK, AMEKETNIE PUJUT SUKAGTINMEX.

SIRIONÓ (Bolivia)

EBii aba chéé dau chéé. Sá dau abatu chéé, ima-chéé chiian Sande imachéé chian Sande. Yasu tata a. De-aygue de-quiran cuantuchii mbia chii. Tendam ñandeiiti taua de-aygue chéé chaura nyebe eirachéé rache-equia déjera deningue Dios-ra.

De-aygeu chéé dea-catura.

SRANAN (SRANAN TONGO, SURINAMESE, TAKI-TAKI) (Surinam)

Mie e kotoigie-o mie Gado-datie Joe mekie mie foe sabie en aanbedjie Joe. Mie e kotoigie na tapoe na momenti diesie, mie zwat- jie en Joe maktie, mie potiefasie en Joe goedoe. No wang tra Gado no de lekie Joe, na Helpiemang ini notoe, na Wang-Die-De-Na- Hing-Srevie.

TANANA (Alaska)

Senoghłk'okhoodelet, see Bet'odeelt'a, see dheełtseen nał esdeney, nek'okhoochedhet. Senoghełk'okhoodelet, k'odeeyeet, seteeya' kula, eentl'eth. Tajoo nosoditlt'a, doyon een- lan.

Nen yan' Bet'odeelt'a eenlan. Soghun neeneenneek, dek'onadheelton.

TANANA: Tanacross dialect (Alaska)

Maghhihhey, Sht'oxt'iht'eh, shihtsį, me'ish- daey, paghhexnuhdet. Maghnihhey, k'ah du' t'ey, sht'aey kol, Nt'eay xuntlçh. Shelzaz kol, Nelzaz' zuntleh.

Wut'oxt'iht'eh wukaedh kol. Ts'axunt'eh neghanitandaek. Wut'oxt'iht'eh k'aa nits'- axandaeg'.

TEWA: Santa Clara Pueblo dialect (United States)

Naa o toh ne (Nave Taa jo sii) (HaY ti) UU Ti Te PAA Na wi TAAE UU He-ta wi Jo sii a mi tee (naa o TUUNI) (Naa bo) Navi Ka bi ni gati He ta UUVE (Kaa-in ga ta) Nave CHE Biin in gata He ta uuvi CHE IN GATA wiaa wi na aan pi wi Taa jo sii UUTAH; KHA GA TE Di Khun WO DA TE Wi boh gi moi.

SUMO: Musawas dialect (Honduras, Nicaragua)

Yang witninis yang Papahnki yang yamus naman yang matilik man kul makulnini. Akaminit yang witninis yang sip awas sai yangki man paun makaupak sipki, yang minikun yangkat man yankli mankat.

Papahn ukdiska man waliki, patkaupa ilk maiataman, witin silp sanka litki.

SUMO: Twahka dialect (Nicaragua)

Yang witnis yang, yang Godki Man yabina- man Man ma talyang anik. Yang warakat laik yultayang yang paraski Man parasnikira Man. God has lapki, Man Kamank ki, ya paras taman dutni Man Kau, A las Sawonki.

TACANA (Bolivia, Peru)

He marda mi que testigó, oh mia dada Diushú, mia dada ve peitia Diushú eshenapa pují. He marda mi que testigó ye orashú mi que poder mi que impotencia, que ma purí que ma mi que riqueza. Hay ma ve pia Diushú, mi dabai ejejeña, mi dabai Diushú ejejeña.

TLINGIT (Alaska, Canada)

XAT YEEKAXNEEK AX DIKEE ANKOW YOO KASA- XATYEEKLEEYETK EE KOOWOO EE YA SCHKAKAWK. XAT YEEKAXNEEK YA YEEDAT KLETH XAT OOTSEEN KA YEE KLITHSEENA, KA XAT KANISHKEEDEI, KA YEE ANKAW.

WE EE CHEEKLEINAK DIKEE ANKOW YEE SITEE KA YEE YEDASHEE, KA CHEEWEAH-SKEEDANEEK.

TOBA (Argentina)

Ayem naq taxananeq, oh ŷalamxat' Dios, ye 'am ayem ad'onataq savotaique da 'am savat'ton qataq' shioqhen. Saq'taxan vetoigui nagui da iqalaxa qataq' da ad'añxaq', yacho- qyic qataq' da ad'sallxá.

Qaica ca lŷa Dios napacaleq' 'am, Nimaye detaunaxan da souqapoigui ca lchic, Nimaye qaica ca iben'a. [Page 518]

TUCUNA (TICUNA) (Brazil, Colombia, Peru)

Llumaen pora tocuchigan Choma curi guhen, Cuma pa chori tupana tacufa choun cu na goen ñima na cha cuhan ñi ná cugo na chari inin. Ehohin na curi guhen nomar gunengo chori tura y curi pora, chori tahunma curi guhinma. Tauma a nay a tupana, curin poraqui, toin ri guhenqui nima chienfa, nima por aqui nichatahan.

YAQUÍ (Mexico, United States)

Inapooné testicó in Dios, enpooné yóturiac paquéne enchitallane. Paqueté enchiwatane. Inapone téstico en lautipo, caemo beki jume in uteám caen utean bequi impovea poovetana emporitoorico. Cabe intok Dios, jú lleanisme, enpo jibapó be chiibo jiapsá.

TUPI: Chiriguano (Chahuanco) dialect (Argentina, Bolivia)

Che aicuá ma che Tumpa, de che apoaba rocua baera jare romboete baera. Che aicua ma aña ve che chepueréa coba jaré depuere, che cheparabete jare. De denbaeyecou Baetij imru Tumpa ma De güi ba, Poromborij icabibaepeba, jare iyeu guiño oicoba.

TUPI: Guarani dialect (Argentina, Brazil, Paraguay)

She aikua'a she Tupá, Nde japó hagüe, roikua'a hagua, haró Tupa'itu hagua. Aikua'a aveí koaga, la she kangy ha, ha Nde, Nde mbaretéha, Ha she Mboriahú, ha Nd, Nde riko ha. Ndai pori ambu'éishagüa, Ñandejara, Nde ñoite pytyvohára roimé va'í javé, Nde noite reikó Nde jehevé.

TUPI: Guarayu dialect (Bolivia)

Ché deỹ vŷindar cherů tumpá, de cheápo heve de cuagüa deú. Ché yeroyŷ augüa añen- cua vehy deú có corintein deú ché vaé causá de recó pirantaza veinó ché paraizusaveinó de recó yemboeteisá veinó dipoiri ambuaé tumpa de noité hore pytÿinbÿin vaé, vaé yabaeté vaé sui. Deahé ere yeupivaé de recocuer pype.

YAGUA (Brazil, Colombia, Peru)

Rá andiatene, unindano sun, dejano ún rá andiante, ragita huantanani Ungé Ragitá dat- erá Ungé tunshondá ne andietané datera ne tratén i criquitin Tie qui sauchera Unge uirti qui saucherá urindenó Sunú chera unicho sansquitá unich- era ninda.

YARURO (Venezuela)

Dadémene koné. Dadémene koné kodé uní optéa. Mené cua ja no rê dêrrēr dabáicreine. Dabáicreine cua jámene derrĕr. Dáicre udércre uchércre. Guardemércre guamérene chereguámerenene. Aéme véi optáedi kanémedi optáedi. Optáedi da jua di chi cua. Optáedi da diu di que juing.

YUKPA (Colombia, Venezuela)

Aunene, ol Cúmoco, ouncat auуune óope oyénepe, áapera ayampo auyá tócshinco. Aunene, juarketáu, yóitpai auvía, amorcotip- shin, aumeréjera'ya amori mavare jaapera ma. Óloco mak amoroco olmak, Cumoco tóc- shinco, ólok oyémerúcané cupétuécoyo, toápanoperám.

YUPIK, CENTRAL ALASKAN: Kuskokwim dialect (Alaska)

Nallrunitua, Agayutma Piliaqellruavnga Nallunricesqelluten Ciktarvikesqelluten-llu. Watua, Nallrunritua Pingailucimnun Pingirpanun-llu, Arrsaucimnun tukuutevnun- llu. Allamek agayucetaituq Taugaam elliirek, Ikayulaavkut Aamarqellramek, Camek elpet Piunrilavet.

YUPIK, CENTRAL ALASKAN: Yuk dialect (Alaska)

aungakaka, Agacutma. Kahnaryahan Doyooha billyakelrhuavoonga, nahtlooskif- kanuk, chale ookfakishkatlootin. Waneheuha nahtlunrehkaw chaywelujekah etlpet dowghan gahaywavit. Chale ahrsowlowa etlpet dowgh- ken chut dummyetah bektlooghe. Awtlamikt- loo owahten Agaeutchetdownnuneh, cheyun- ahrbootloo nawtloovghahrngownakoo awh- rnahgegunn. Keevitloo ahnehrtooreshten- goolootin. [Page 519]

ZAMUCOAN, NORTHERN (AYORE, NORTHERN AYOREO) (Bolivia, Paraguay)

Urepiseyu, Dupadea, uje je vapesute yu, ujetiga yiraja uato ega ujetiga yisi vabay. Yígome ua uje que yó bajopire gotique, uje mataqueyu jeque cuchapeua, que Dupade uñeque cusego gusuuá. Ua ú uje barate yoque, ome cucha gajnaregone, uje je ua u cuchadej- nese.

ZAPOTEC† (Mexico)

NAQUE TESTIGU SHIOSE, YEB LU BAS LA NAHRE TE GUMBE, CHANE LAZ SE YEBLU. NAKQUE TESTIGU NAH SHTEN YEL GU, BIH'N, SHTEN YEL NAZAK. Ruti steh dad loh yeb lu, ni rak ne nu re che cayac nadzin, ni nabahn shteb tis.

C. ASIA

• Denotes revised translation. + Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

AGTA (Philippine Islands)

SAKSI AKO, O KANA KONG DIYOS, NA MINA AKO, KANIMONG LINALANG TAN- GANING MA MIDBID TAKA SAKA SAM- BAHON KA. SUMASAKSI AKO SA ORAS NA ADIE SAKANI MONG PAG KAODA KAN KUSOG SAKA KANIMONG KAPAN- GYARIHAN, SA KANAKONG KADUKHAAN SAKA SA KANIMONG KAYAMANAN. ANA ODA IBANG DIOS KUNDE IKA SANA, NAGTATABANG SA PELIGRO, KANIMO BA SA KANYANG SADIRI.

AGUSANON (AGUSAN) (Philippine Islands)

Ako motindog nga saksi, oh akong Dios, nga Ikaw nagbuhat kaniko para magkila kanimo hasta magsimba kanimo. Ako mosaksi ini doon, sa ako pagka wa do-oy gahum, sa akong pagkapobre, hasta sa ako bahandi. Wi nay lain iban Dios kondi Ikaw, ang panabang sa kalisud, ang nagkaugalingon nangabuhi.

AKLANON (Philippine Islands)

May pagtestigo aco, O Guino-o, nga Icao ro nag himo cacon para magquilala kimo cag mag ampo sa atubang mo. Nagtestigo aco sa sining momento, sa acon buya cag sa imong ng ca cusog, sa acon ca pobrehon cag imong mangad. Owa lon it ibang imong Dios con indi cao, mananabang sa tanan capiligrohan cag ang mainantuson.

APAYAO† (Philippine Islands)

Apo Kabunian, inuman ko un Sika din nangwa kan Sakon tan matagammuak kan mapadayawak Sika. Testigoak sinsaton, maid kabkaboolak kan Sika, kamas dan! Bilongno, kinakapus ko kan kina Babalin no. Maid udom si apowok no adi Sika, Katulun- gan di makasapul, Sika din Mannakabalin.

ARABIC

See p. 496.

ARMENIAN

ոՈվ Տէր, ի Աստուածս կը վկայք որ Դուն ցիս սան- ծած ս Բող ճանչնալու և Քեղ սաչտելու համար . 1 3 վայլա կեանի կը խրտտովանիմ ակաթութխնս և Բու զօրութխնգ, իմ ացքատութխնս և Բու հարստութիւնա: իզմէ զատ Սրուած չկայ, պաչտպանող և ինքնագոյան [Page 520]

AZERBAIJANI (ÁDHIRBÁYJÁNÍ, AZERI) (Írán, Soviet Azerbaijan)

ای منم ه منی خلق ایله - م شهادت ویریرم بونا كـ تانییام و سنه عبادت ایلمیم ایندی شهادت ویریرم ئوز عاجزليغيما و سنين قوتلي اولماغيوا شوز ضعیفلیگمه سنين قدرتلى اولماغيوا شوز فقیر لیگمه ه ليك وه یوقد ور سننن سوای همیشه نین فنی لیگی حفظ ایل ين اللـ

BAGOBO: Gianga (Guianga) dialect (Philippine Islands)

Monna O nama ko, ngo poggali no ogo para kohaddon asta nikko. Mallo-o kloni mismo ngo hago lomilomit nikko keng kollos, ngo ogo keng kaayo-ayo, hikko keng malikoddo anda ottad ngo nama, hikko na eng kotawang neng hirap eng boy-yottow neng naw-wo mo.

BAJAU (BADJAO) (Borneo, Celebes, Sulu Archipelago)

Aku makasaksi, Ya Tuha ku, dah bay hinang aku ni katoo-nan maka ni duwaahan. Aku nulay ma kadjapan iti ni kalunaan maka ni kamiskinan ku maka dayan.

Mahananiya saddi Tuhan suga siga nabang ma kalaatan Kaulluman.

BENGALI (Bangladesh)

হে আমার ঈশ্বর, তুমি আমাকে সৃষ্টি করিয়াছ তোমাকেই জানিবার জন্য এবং তোমারই অর্চনা করিবার জন্য, সেই সাক্ষ্যই আমি বহন করিতেছি। প্রতি মুহূর্তে আমি আমার শক্তিহীনতা এবং তোমার অসীম শক্তি ও আমার দারিদ্র্য এবং তোমার ঐশ্বর্য্যের প্রমাণ পাইতেছি। তুমি ছাড়া আর কোনো ঈশ্বর নাই, বিপদকালে তুমিই পরিত্রাতা, চিরস্থায়ী।

BENGALI: Assamese dialect (Northeast India)

হে প্রভু, মোৰ ঈশ্বৰ ! ম‍ই জানো যে তোমাক জানিবলৈ আৰু পূজা কৰিবলৈ তুমি মোক সৃষ্টি কৰিছা। এই মুহূৰ্ত্তত মই স্বীকাৰ কৰোঁ যে ম‍ই দুর্ব্বল, তুমি সবল, মই গৰীৰ তুমি সম্রাট, তুমি ত্রাণকর্তা, স্বয়ংপূর্ণ; তোমাত বাহিৰে আৰু অন্য দেৱত| নাই। [Page 521]

BENGALI: Tripuri (Kok-Borok)† dialect (India)

আঙ ছাঁরাই ছারাই মুগ ও মতাই, তামনি হিনবা, ন-ন ছিনিনা বাগৰ ভাই পূজি-না ৰাগঃ মুঙ আন আচাইরি জানা। ভাঙ আর নিয়া খায়া, হঙ রাঙ ধরিনি ফান-কুরুই, হস্ত কামনা ইরাকাণ্ড, তাবু আমার ছাই মানা। ' মিতাই-ন কারীই অ ওরাভার বিরমান নাওক চুগাছ-রিনাই, মাথাগের তন-নাই তে কেৰ তুরুই।

BIHARI: Bhojpuri dialect (India)

हे ईश्वर हम गोनाही देत बानी कि सोहरा के चिन्हे आ तो पूजा करे खातिर तू हमरा के पैदा करने बाद हम एह घरी कव्ल करत बानी कि हम वेसकति बानी तू सब सकती से भरल बाड़ हम दलिदर बानी आ तू सब सकति से भरल पूरल बाड़ हम तुच्छ बानी आ तू सब सामरथी बाढ़ ।

तोहरा के छोड़ के दोसर के परमात्मा नइये। तूही हब भयावन संकटन से तारनहार आ स्वनिर्भर

BIKOL (BICOL) (Philippine Islands)

Nagpapatotoo ako, O Dios ko, na linalang Mo ako na mamidbid Ika asin sambahon Ika. Nagpapatotoo ako, sa oras na ini, sa pagka dai ko nin kapangyarihan asin sa Saimong Kusog, sa sakuyang kadukhaan asin sa Saimong kayamanan. Dai nin ibang Dios kundi Ika, an Tabang sa Peligro, an Mismong Nagdadanay.

BILAAN (Philippine Islands)

Fnanglut go O Duwata na ge i ftabo deg na mimo deg agmade ge na mangamfo de ge. Gade go de kagkahon ani de klande gnagan go, dee de akgaganam de kablasok go na dee de kalgadom. Lande dame Duwata ko la loghe de lande sen kafyem na tabongam di kat sato de gami.

BISAYA (Sarawak, Borneo, Brunei)

Aku jadie saksi, O Tuhan ku, Ikau nganjadie di jaie supaya aku ngatuie di Ijun, sarata nyambah di Ijun, Tito no aku mara, karana sangaie-ngaie no di jaie kurang, sangaie-ngaie no Ikau Yang Bakudarat, sarata ombo saja ontob alap ku, aku akan mamanau perintah Mu.

Onjop aro lagie Tuhan Yang lain, melainkan Ikau nga no Tuhan, Yang nulung musim suat susah. Yang Panakuara.

BUKIDNON (Philippine Islands)

Testigosan ko, O Magbabaya ko, ha iyan ka nigtul-tul kanak ho pagkilala imo daw pag- simba imo. Matun-an ko ha laus taini ha gutlo-a ha hura ko agkabaloy daw sa gahum no, sa ka pobre ko da sa Bahandi no.

Hura un lain ha Magbabaya; kodi Ynaka, magbubulig ho Katalagman; nagkinaugalin- gun-ho Pagpanginabuhi.

BURMESE (Burma, Bangladesh)

သုံးရွှင်ထာရဘုရား သ ခ င် ၊ အ ရွှ င်တို့သိနား လည်လျှက် ၊ အ ရွှ င် ကို ပူ ဇော်က တေ ရန် တပည့် တော်အား ဖန်ဆင်း တော် မူသည်ကို ယုံကြဉ် ပါသည်။ ယ ခု လ ၁ လ ၁ men 5d 4 Ny 1 & 2 E Q ady ရာ ဒီကို ၄ င်း ၊ mပြည့် ၏ ဆင်းရဲနွမ်း ပါးခြင်း နှင့် အင်၏ Baပေများ ခြင်းကို၄င်း၊ ၀န်ဒီ ပါ သည်။ စောင့်ရှောက် တ 5 မူ သော ထာ ဝ ရ တည် န uga ဒီ သော အင် မှတပါး ၊ အခြား မည်သည့်ဘုရား မျှ [Page 522]

CHINESE

者,我 是 是 貧 自困 生的 自, 在 的是 • , 富我 裕現 的 「我認識你而尊敬你,我現在證實,我是懦弱的,你是全能的 啊我的上帝,我可以宣稱我的生命是你賦予的,因而使 之 沒 上的 是全 保能而 護的

CUYUNON (Philippine Islands)

Naga testigo aco Dios co nga icao ang may buat canaquen, nga kilala ta cao ig ing gueguegman. Naga testigo aco sa mga oras nga dia Dios co nga inde sarang macacomparar ang aqueng keseg sa canimo ig ang aqueng calised sa imong manggad. Icaco lamang ang Dios, ig icao lamang ang sarang macabawi canamen sa tanang cacorian.

DANGI† (India)

gyid in godior YM aud gu ui TEL HEAT માની દુબ ળતા અન તુની અન`ત સામર્થ્ય'ની, માની ગરીબીની તથા તુની સઘળી સપન્ન- windoll au godi uaull auren તાની સાક્ષી પુરાહા. i iodler want નાહીં, તુજ અટ્ઠા ભયાનક મુશીબતમાહૂન તારનાર તથા સ્વનિભર,

DAYAK, LAND (BIDAYUH): Bau dialect (Sarawak)

Oku mo ogi menyaksi, O Topa ku, nang Ingan mo ogi nai oku dah puan dup Ingan duch nyomah Ingan. Oku mo pikirien tarah adin itis dengan doii kuasa ku nudu kuasa Ingan de ayuh manah duoh dengan penyusah ku nudu pongipaguh Ingan. Doii loh Topa de bokun pakeh Ingan de jagin Penulung daang penyusah duoh de Ping- Mitiateidip.

DAYAK, LAND (BIDAYUH): Bukar Sadong (Tebakang) dialect (Sarawak, Borneo)

Aku jaji saksi ndug tanpa aku, akam mbuh ngundah supaya aku empuan akam serta lalu nyembah akam. Aku besaksi ndug iti seh, minan semoa pengurang kuasa aku ndug semoa pengagah akam, serta dingan pinyiranta aku dengan pingiraja akam. Anyap tanpa da bekun masu akam, pinulung masa susah, pinulung adup. [Page 523]

DAYAK, SEA (IBAN) (Sarawak, Borneo)

Aku nyadi saksi ka Petara Aku, Nuan udah ngaga awak ka aku nemu Nuan sereta lalu nyembah Nuan. Aku besaksi ka diatu, ngena samoa pengurang kuasa aku, ka samoa penger- ing Nuan, sereta enggau penyeranta aku enggau pengeraja Nuan.

Nadai bisi Petara kalimpahari Nuan, Penulong leboh Tusah, Penulong Diri.

GADDANG (GADDUNG) (Philippine Islands)

Pacuruhuan co, O Dios co, se pinaratunac ta quesi maamuan ta Ca e idayadayo ta Ca. Tad- danggan cu, sitoya ya quinacafece ya pacapan guam, ya diyariyat co ya quinamayamannu

Awan a corhuan a Dios nu baccan a Icca, na Acquisesalacan si Quetaggacan, na Acqui- taronan.

GARHWALI (India)

हे भगवान मियी बातक गवाहू इ कि थिइ जगना खुणी घोर तेरी ही पूजा करणा सी म्यारू हवाइ मि वीं बान थइ मन छऊ कि तू सब भन्या ताकतवर छड, मि गरीब छउ पोर तू ताकत, मि छोटु छऊ और बीम सब कुछ छन ।

त्या अलावा कुइ भी भगवान मीचा । स्वीटी केवल बड़ा कण्टों में पार करारा वलू छ तथा स्वीही सहायता करा वलु छइ ।

GONDI : Bethul dialect (India)

हे भगवान नवा इद मेन्दूल इद पोल्लोदा मवाद आन्द कि नोकुन समझे मायलाहरू अन पूजा कोलाहक इन्जोर पडतीन ।

नना इजेक कमजोर आतान अन निमा खूबे લાવ બિતાન મન્તોન, અન નિયામા ધન હુડુકાયો મન્તા અન નના ગરીબ આતાન ।

નિકૂન તાસીન દૂસરા ભગવાન હિલે, નિમાતી ખુદે ઈતા આન્દી, અન નિમાય સત્યાનાશ કી સહોયાતોન !

GUJARATI ( India, Pakistan )

'હું સાક્ષી આપું છું, જૅ યोजना તથા તારી માશ હમ, કે તને પૂન . શક્તિમાન મારી ઉરવા તે મને સલ્યા હુ મારી तुम्છતા અને વારી અપ સપન્નતાની તથા મારી પરાજિત અને તારા દરિદ્રતા અને તારી પરમસામર્થ્ય'ની સાક્ષી આપું છું.'

HANTIK(ANTIQUENO) (Philippine Islands )

May pag testigo aco, O Guino-o co, nga cao ang nag himo canacon para mag quilala canimo, cag mag ampo sa atubang mo. Nag testigo aco sa sining momento, sa acon caluya cag sa imong ca cusog, sa acon ca pobrehon cag sa imong manggad.

Wara ron it iba nga Dios con indi Icao, man- anabang sa tanan capilogrohan cag ang mainantoson.

HEBREW

אעירה לפניך, אלוהי כי אתה בראתני לדעת דרכך ולעבדך בלבב שלם. מודה אני היום כי לך הגבורה ואני חסר אונים, דל אני ואביון ואתה מושל בכל. אין אלוה מבלעדיך, עונה בעת צרה, אלהי העולמים.

HINDI (India)

हे ईश्वर ! मैं साक्षी देता हूँ कि तुझे पहचानने और तेरी ही पूजा करने के लिए तूने मुझे उत्पन्न किया है। मैं इस क्षरण स्वीकार करता हूँ कि मैं अशक्त हूँ और तू सर्वशक्तिमान है, मैं दरिद्र हूँ और तू धना है, मैं तुच्छ हूँ और तू सर्वसमर्थ है।

तेरे अतिरिक्त अन्य कोई परमात्मा नहीं है । तू ही संकटमोचन, सर्वव्यापी है।

HINDI, EASTERN Chhattisgarhi dialect (India, Nepal)

कुछु ये मोर भगवान, तहिच्च मोर गवाही हस कि तहिच्च મોના બનાયે હમ તોલા પહિચાને ખાતિર ઉર તોર પૂજા કરે ખાતિર । મેં યે બખત યે બાત માનત હોવ કિ મોર મા શકતી નઇ હે તહિન્ચ હા સર્વશક્તીમાન હાવસ મેં બહનેચ ગરીબ હોન હા સબો પરકાર સે ધની હસ તૌર સિવાય કોનો દૂસર ભગવાન નઇ હે । તહિન્ચ હાવસ જવન દુખ મા મોર સહાયતા કર સકત હાવસ ઉર તહિચ્ચ પ્રપન ઉપર નિરભર હાવસ [Page 524]

ILOCANO (Philippine Islands)

Ipanecnecco, O Dios ko, a Sica ti namarsua caniac nga umammo Kenca ken man- gidaydayaw Kenca. Panecnecac, iti daytoy a canito, ti kinacapuyco ken awan bilegco ken ti kinabilegmo, ti kinapanglawco ken ti kinabac nangmo.

Awan ti sabali a Dios no di Sica laeng, ti Catulong iti tiempo ti peggad, ti puon ken gub buayan dagiti isu-amin.

JAHAI (Malaysia, Thailand)

Yek tanggongkan ley sa-bagai saksi, Mei Tuhan yek, Pai yei manjadik-kan yek ney gelong yek kenel Pai dan bersembahyang Pai.

Yek luek saksi bahawa peryam ta'ah, ok lemeh yek dan ok et et Pai maken basat yek dan Kayak Pai.

Berak Tuhan peu chan lebah Pai, Tulung keleng Bahayak, yang Henjan Belak.

ILONGGO (HILIGAYNON) (Philippine Islands)

Nagasaksi ako, O Guino-o ko, nga guinahimo Mo ako agud makakilala Icao cag makahalad sa Imo. Naga pamatu-od ako sa subong nga ti-on sang akon kakabus cag sa Imo gahum, ang akon kapobre, cag sa Imo nga mangaranon.

Wala iban nga Guino-o kondi-cao ang bulig sa katalagman ang mabinuhaton.

JAKUN (Malaysia)

H'ma měna-ngongkan dirik sabagai saksi, O Tuhan h'ma, bahawak Ajeh telah menjadikan h'ma ontok měngěnoo Ajeh dan semayang Ajeh. H'ma naik saksi, pada masa ka, akan kělěhoman h'ma dan kudrat Ajeh, padah képapaan h'ma dan kōkayaan Ajeh.

Hempak Tuhan lain daripada Ajeh, Měnulung dalam Chelaka, Yang Berdirik Sen- dirik.

JAPANESE

存中いまおまあいまま神 棟 ます。あなたの他に神は おん豊かさとを証明致し また私の貧しさとあなたの あなたのみカの大いなることを いまこそ私の無力なことと ますことを証言いたします。 あなたと崇拝するためであり ましたのは、あなたを知り 神様 あなたが私と造り拾い 短かい日々の祈り いまさす あたと 御にあ 荘な 証あ 存在し拾う御方に在します 中のみ救いに在し御自力にて あなたは危難の 給救

KALINGA (KALINGGA) (Philippine Islands)

Sacan y testigo O Diosco nga Sicaw y namaravvu ta niacan tape nu ammuattaca anna dayawattaca. Testguaccu ta sangaw y cawaccu tu awa-awayya anna y dacal nga pacawayyam; to quinapobre anna ta quinaricum.

Awatta tanacuan nga Dios nu ari laman Sicsicaw; y Cabbag ta tiempo na ziga anna Mangyawa ta ngamin nga mawmawag. [Page 525]

KANNADA (KANARESE) (India)

ದೇವಾ, ನನ್ನೊಡೆಯಾ ! ನೀನೇ ಸಾಕ್ಷಿ, ನಿನ್ನನ್ನು ಅರಿಯಲು ಮತ್ತು ದಿನ್ನನ್ನು ಆರಾಧಿಸಲು ನೀನು ನನ್ನನ್ನು ಸೃಷ್ಟಿಸಿದೇಯೆ; ನಾನು ಬಲಹೀನ, ಸೀನು ಬಲಶಾಲಿ ; ನಾನು ಬಡವ, ನೀನು ಶ್ರೀಮಂತ. ಇದನ್ನು ನಾನೀಗ ಸಾಂ ಹೇಳು ತೇನೆ. ನಿನ್ನ ದೂರತು ಮತ್ತಾವ ದೇವರೂ ಇಲ್ಲ. ನೀನೇ ಜಗದ್ರಕ್ಷಕ, ಸ್ವಯಂ ZD88F !

KASHMIRI (India, Pakistan)

ای میانه پروردگاره! بوچھوس بیمه کنند مینز گواری دوان نه بو کر نفس ژہ اور خطرہ پیدا زه بو گره چیان زان نه چیان بندگی کو چھوٹس یہ فرقته پکینہ عاجزی سهند نه چانه طاقتوگ، پفته فقیری بند نز چانه غنی سنگ اقرار کران۔ نیز پاٹھ چھو نہ چانہ ورائے بیے کا تھے خدا ۔ تو ٹی چھو کی حفاظت کرون نگرانی کردن اے میانہ خدا یہ با

BEH DENG SENG AK KATALAU LA'AN MEH UH TENANGAN BIH IKA'TUA, ALENG NYEKANG AKUI, ALENG TE' MURIP NYELIMAN

KAYAN (Borneo, Sarawak)

AKUI NAH ITUNG TAKSI KA', O TUHAN, TENANGAN KUI, IKA' ALENG UHNYELUNG AKUI NAI JADI JAM IKA' DAHIN NYEPIDA IKA'. KERAI NIH AKUI BARA LEMA KUI KATYAHA DAHIN KUASA KA', KETAH KUI DAHIN KAYA' KA'. USITE' KET ALENG HA

KHALKHA (MONGOLIAN) (Mongolia, China, Tibet, U.S.S.R.)

Тэнгэр Та! Та намайг бий болгосон нь би таныг мэдэх ба хүндэтгэхийн төлөө юм гэдгийг би гэрчлэье. Би одоо л миний чадалгүйг, таны чадалтайг ба Үгийгүүг минь, баялгыг чинь гэрчлэье. Танаас өөр Тэнгэр байхгүй, Та бэрх зовлонгийн дотор дандаа аврал тус байна даа. Та өөрөө амь зуугч Тэнгэр HOM.

KHMER (CAMBODIAN) (Kampuchea, Thailand, Vietnam)

បពិត្រព្រះជាម្ចាស់ ខ្ញុំសូមទទួលស្ស្គាល់ថា ព្រះអង្គបានបង្កើតខ្ញុំ ដើម្បីឲ្យ ស្ស្គាល់ព្រះអង្គនិងគោរពព្រះអង្គ ។ ក្នុងពេលនេះសូមមញ្ជាក់ការទន់ខ្សោយរបស់ខ្ញុំនឹង បារមីដ៏បវររបស់ព្រះអង្គ ការក្រលំបាករបស់ខ្ញុំ និងការមានសម្បត្តិដ៍ធំរបស់ព្រះអង្គ ។ ក្រៅពីព្រះអង្គចេញ គ្មានព្រះជាម្ចាស់ណាមួយយកមកប្រៀបផ្ទឹមបានឡើយ។ ព្រះអង្គជាអ្នកជួយរំដោះឲ្យក្តីភ័យរបស់សត្វ ព្រះអ្នកង់នៅជានិច្ច ។

KOREAN (China, Japan, Korea)

오 저의 하느님, 제가 증언하옵나니. 당신 이 저를 창조하시어 당신을 알고 당신을 경배 하도록 하셨사옵나이다. 지금 이 순간에도 저 의 무력함과 당신의 강력하심을. 그리고 저의 가난함과 당신의 부하심을 제가 입증하옵나이 t], 위난에서 도와주시고 스스로의 힘으로 계시 는 당신 이외에 다른 하느님이 없사옵나이다. [Page 526]

KUI (KHONDI) (India)

ଅପେନୁ ! ଇନ୍ତୁ ଯେ, ନାଂଗେ, ନଂଗେ ସୁନ୍‌ ଭାଂଗି ଏଂଗା ସ୍ଖଳା ଭାଂଗି ଗାଡ଼ ରିଆଦ ଏଇ ଦନା ଡ଼ାଣ୍ଡ ପକ, ବେସିଲ । ଆଳୁ ଇବେ ନନ୍ଦାର ଡ଼ାହା ଭାର ସଂଗା ନାଇ ଡ଼ାଶା ସିଡ଼ାନାର, ନନ୍ଦା ପାସ୍‌ ସଂଗା ନାହା ସିଡ଼ା ନାଗୁ କ୍ଳାର୍ତ୍ତା ବେସି ।

ହଂଗି ରୁହାନା ଅଟେ ଏମ୍ବା ଇ ବେଏ ପେରୁ ସିଡ଼େ । ଇନ୍ତୁ ଅଡ଼ା ନନା ମନ ଡେଇ ଆଲାନ୍-ଜାପାନ୍ତାଈ ବାନା କାନ ଦ୍ୱାଦ ।

KUMAUNI (KOUMANI, KUMAONI) (India, Nepal)

हे ईश्वर, लील जापुर जारपना-पदारका लिजी, argfur gar foot at , मैं मत आण दलिद्दर और तेरि समरिद्धि में, आणि ' हे संकट मोचन स्वजीवी या तु छाड़ि सौ क्वे ईश्वर न्हातिन ।

KURDISH (Afghanistan, Armenian S.S.R., Írán, ’Iráq, Syria, Turkey)

شهاده بت مردم به مه روی خورد که در سمت کرد بو ناسین وه به زنده گی خوت .

ندم بکاته شهادت که دوم به ناتوانی خوم وه توانایی تو : بچو کی خوم ده گه وره یی ود (توانایی ( تو . نه داری من وه دارایی تو به راستی خودایی نیه جگه له تو به نا ده روه مایری ژين وه ژیان

LAMBADI (India)

మారోయీ దేవ్! ఊదేవ్! తార్ సేవా కరేవాళేన దలే నా ఏక్ కర్నో వడ్డీ తూంకా యింకజ్ గోవాత్ వన్నకై రూన్కో జ్కవాత్ వజ్జీ హకమ్ దో జూన్ ఊ దేవ్: తో ఓర్కా మే మసయీ కారమ్ వేణూ తో తార్ సేవా కరేక్తో తో శక్తి మనదే. ఊ దేవ్: ఉననా ఛോడేజూం తారదలేమా చాలాంతర్ దివేమా చలాపును. తార్ ప్రేమతీ ఓర్ దలేనా దీవేర్ జుం కర్నూ. సాసితూ మాలిక్ ఛీ, వడ్డీ సాయీ కారమ్ కర్నూ మన్నే.

LAO (LAOTIAN) (Laos, Thailand)

ໂອ ພຣະຜູ້ເປັນເຈົ້າ ຂ້າພຣະອົງ ເປັນພະຍານວ່າ ພະຜູ້ເປັນເຈົ້າໄດ້ສ້າ ງາ ເປັນຜູ້ບໍຣິສຸດດ້ວຍຄວາມນ້ອຍວ່າຫນາຂອງພຣະອົງ ແລະຕໍ່ຄວາມຜູ້ຊົງເດຊານ ພາບຂອງ ພຣະອົງຄື ແລະຕໍ່ຄວາມສຸກສົມບູນຂອງພຣະອົງ ບໍ່ມີພຣະຜູ້ເປັນເຈົ້າອົງອື່ນໃດ ນອກ ຈາກພຣະຜູ້ເປັນເຈົ້າພຣະອົງດຽວ, ຜູ້ ຊົງໃຫ້ຄວາມຊ່ວຍເຫລືອໃນເມື່ອຢູ່ໃນຂ່າຽອັນຕຣາຍ, ຜູ້ຊົງໃຫ້ຄວາມເປັນຢູ່ ຊີວິດ

MALAY (Malaysia, Indonesia)

Saya měnanggongkan diri sa-bagai saksi, Ya Tuhan saya, bahawa Kamu tělah menjadikan saya untok měngěnal Kamu dan bersěm- bahyang Kama. Saya naik saksi, pada bentar ini, akan kělěmahan saya dan kudrat Kamu, kapada kemiskinan saya dan kekayaan Kamu. Tiada Tuhan lain daripada Kamu, Penolong dalam Bahaya, Yang Berdir Sendiri.

MALAYALAM (India, including Laccadive Islands)

ദൈവമേ, അങ്ങ് എന്നെ സൃഷ്ടിച്ചു. എനിക്ക് മനസ്സിലാക്കാനും, അങ്ങേ എനിക്ക് പൂജി ഈ നിമിഷത്തിൽ എന്റെ ശക്തിയില്ലായ്മയും, അങ്ങയുടെ ശക്തിയും, എന്റെ ദാരിദ്രവും, അങ്ങയുടെ സ്വത്തും ഞാൻ ഇതും സത്യം. അല്ലാതെ മറെറാരു ദൈവവുമില്ല. വിദി [Page 527]

MALDIVIAN (DIVEHI BAS) Divehi character (Maldive Islands, Minicoy Island)

زيا ودو در ہو تو مروري و دو اگر پولکے گرمی کے گے مگر ایپ میں کا شور

ސުވާމީންގެ ފުދވާئށްލާލެޅ. އިބަސުވާމީ ޕޔވައ ލާ

MALDIVIAN (DIVEHI BAS) Latin character (Maldive Islands, Minicoy Island)

Alhaa hedhdhevi kalakko!

Hasuvaameenge dheelathi vaatha kamua alhaa ufadhdhavaa fai vanee Hasuvaameenge ah alhukan kusumahttakai kamah alhu hekivameve. Mihin'dhu alhu hehivameve. Alhaa ge mikamethi kamashaai Hasuvaameenge kulhadhun vantha kamah adhi alhaa ge mikamethi kamashaai Hasuvaameenge fudhi-vodigen vaa kameve. Hasuvaameenge fiyavai Haahaku neiy kamashaai hunihaa kamakah ekalaange dhemivodigen vaa kamah hekivaaieve.

MANOBO (Philippine Islands)

Bannalan ko no kaddin nad Langagan na id baballan do siak amid killa kikaw owayd simba kikaw. Kaddin nad pangintowan kaungkay edda kaddin wara sadda tat kikawn katussan oway edda kikawn katussan tat kaddin kapobrian oway tat kikawn kayamanan.

Warad as-san manama gawas kikaw, eddad tabang ta kahimpan, oway naantay ta salili rin.

MARATHI (India)

हे माझ्या ईश्वरा ! तुला जाणावे नि पूजावे या साठी तू मला निर्मिलेस याची मला जाणीव आहे. मी निर्बल आहे तर तू सर्वशक्तिमान आहेस, मी निर्धन आहे तर तू सर्वसंपन्न आहेस ! असे मी या क्षणी स्वीकारतो.

संकटात साह्य करणारा स्वयंभू असा तूच एकमेव परमेश्वर आहेस.

MELANAU: Mukah dialect (Sarawak)

Akou menyaksi, O Tuhan kou, wak Ka'au menyadin akou itou bei-lah bak mena'au Ka'au jegum bak menyembah Ka'au. Ajau itou kawak akou menyader ji-wak lemah akou jegum ji-wak kuasa nyat Ka'au, kawak ji-wak miskin akou jegum ji-wak kaya raya Ka'au.

Nda bei Tuhan ke keman Ka'au, un wak kena bak Menuluong akou Lian Susah, jegum Lian Lubieng Siksa.

MELANAU: Oya/Dalat dialect (Sarawak)

Ako menyaksi, O Tuhan ko ien Kaau nga manamangun ako ba ta-au Kaau jegum ba menyebah Kaau. Ako pasadei jaka ito, ji ako nda bei kekuasa jad jegum Kaau a-kuasa temegah, ji ga ko a-sase jegum ga Kaau a-kaya berkuasa.

Ien lah nda bei Tuhan ke kida Kaau, a Menyapul Mara-bahaya Udipan Kakal. [Page 528]

NEPALI (NEPALESE ) ( Nepal, Sikkim )

हे मेरा ईश्वर ! म साक्षी दिन्छु कि तिमी लाई चिन्न जान्न अनि तिम्रै पूजा अर्चना गर्न तिमी ले मलाई उत्पन्न गन्यो ।

म अहिले यो तर तिमी सर्व- स्वीकार गर्दछ कि म प्रशस्त छु शक्तिमान छ, म दरिद्र छु, तिमी सर्व सम्पन्न छौ, तथा म तुच्छ छु, तिमी सर्व समर्थ छौ । तिम्रा अतिरिक्त अन्य कुनै परमात्मा छन । तिमी नै हौ भयानक संकटमा तारण हारा एवं आत्म निर्भर ।

ORIYA (India)

ଆପଣଙ୍କୁ ଜାଣିବା ପାଇଁ ଓ ଅପଣଙ୍କର ଉପାସନା ପାଇଁ ମାଗେ, ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିଛନ୍ତି; ପ୍ରଭୁ ବହ ! ମୁଁ ପ୍ରମାଣ ଦେଉଛ, ଏଇ ମୁଦ୍ରରେ, ମୁଁ ତମାର ଶକ୍ତିହନତା ଓ ଅପଣଙ୍କର ଶକ୍ତିମନ୍ତ୍ରୀ, ମୋର ଦୈନ୍ୟ ଓ ଅପଣଙ୍କର ସମ୍ପଦର ପ୍ରମାଣ ଦେଉଛ । ବିପଦରେ ସହାୟ୍ ଓ ଅମ୍ଳ-ଜୀବନ ଧାରଣ ପାଇଁ ଅପଣଙ୍କ ଛଡ଼ା ଅନ୍ୟ କେହି ଦେବଭା

ORIYA: Halbi (Halabi) dialect (India)

हे मोचो भगवान । मोचो ए देह ए गोठ चो सबूत कि तुमी मुके तुमके जानतोर समझतोर काजे आउर तुमचो पूजा करवा काजे बनाय ला आस । मोके ए गोठ सत लोगेसे कि मोचो लगे बल खिण्डिक बले निहाय, आउर तुमचो लगे कतक बल आसे तुमी कतक बलवान आस, मोचो ने कतक गरिबी आसे, घाउर तुमचो घन कतक संमुद जयन आसे तुमके छांडून आउर कोनी भगवान नूहात, तुमी निज ने चे प्रास, तुमी सब बरतो- बेरा सहामक आस ।

PANGASINAN * (Philippine Islands )

SAMBAAN KO, O DIOS KO, YA SIKAY AMALSA ED SIAK PIAN KABATEN TAKA, TAN GALANGEN TAKA. TESTIGUAN KO ED SAYAN BEKTA SO KAKAPOYAN KO TAN SAY PAKAPANYARIM, SAY KAPOBRIYAN KO TAN SAY INKAYAMAN MO. ANGGAPOY AROM A DIOS NO AGSAY SIKA, MANANULONG ED KAIRAPAN, ONTALINDEG-ED-KABUKBUKORAN.

PALAWANON (Philippine Islands )

SAKSI AKO O DAKEN AMPO NA BLUAL MO AKO AMPANG KUMILALA DIMO AT SUMIOM SA DIMO. SUMASAKSI AKO SA DAKEN KAYANG BASAG AT SA DIMONG 38 BASAG, SA DAKEN KALYUTAN AT KODYONG KAKAYAHAN. KAYA IBA PANG AMPO LIBAN DIMO ANG TABANG SA MAGKAKLAS, ANG SARIRING HANGALO.

PANJABI (PUNJABI): Gurmukhi character (India, Pakistan)

ਹੇ ਮੇਰੇ ਸਵਾਮੀ ਮੇਰੇ ਈਸ਼ਵਰ ! ਮੈਂ ਇਸ ਗਲ ਦੀ ਗਵਾਹੀ बीजाम बी म ਸਵੀਕਾਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਮੈਂ ਨਿਰਬਲ ਅਤੇ ਤੂੰ ਸਰਬ ਸਮਰਥ ਹੈਂ, ਮੈਂ ਦਰਿਦਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਤੂੰ ਧਨੀ ਹੈਂ। ਤੇਰੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਦੂਸਦਾ ਕੋਈ ਈਸਵਰ ਨਹੀਂ । उधर भने प्रतक्ष मिय हैं। [Page 529]

RAJASTHANI: Gujuri dialect (India, Pakistan)

اے میر یا معبودا ہے میرے خدا نے مالک میں میں گل دی گواہی دینا ہاں کے ہوں گواہی دیہوں۔ کہ تیں میاں اپنی واقعی نے اپنی عبادت توں مینوں اپنی کچان واسطے پیدا کیتا اے تے اپنی عبادت واسطے واسطے پیدا کیوا سے ۔ ہوں اس ویلے پیدا کیتا ہے۔ میں ایس ویلے اپنی کمزوری دا اقرار کر نا ہاں نے تیری اپنی عاجزی تے تیری طاقت ۔ اتنے طاقت دا اقراری ہاں ۔ میں غریب ہاں تے توں امیر تیرے سوا ہور اپنی غیر ہی تے تری بادشاہی اتے اپنی کو خان انہیں بھیڑا ساڈی محفاظت کرے۔ توں ہی توں ہیں ۔ کمزوری نے تیرا اقتدار کی گواہی دے رہیو ہوں ۔ کوئے ہور خدا پیدہ پر توں ۔

PULA (MANGYANPULA) (Philippine Islands)

Kangko patuhuyan gid, O kangko Pan- kawo ay kilalanon kag sambahon. Kangko patuhuyan inda pag udas sa kanme on man may kapangyarihan kag sa kanmo pakusog sa kangko pagkurian kag sa kanmo pag man- garangon.

On man may Panginoong Dios no kontay kawo lamang ti umawat sa tanan nga palad kag sa on man may katabuha.

PORTUGUESE, MALACCA CREOLE (PAPIA KRISTANG) (Malaysia)

Jenti ja beng, you-sǎ Deyu, pra fala Bos ja faze ku yo supayǎ yo mesti sabe dan reza ku Bos. Agorǎ-agorǎ yo ta testifika yo mulyadu dan Bos forti; yo pobri dan Bos riku.

Nte utu Deyu, teng Bos nsong, keng ta juda ku nu na tempu di mal fortuna, Bos keng nggere utu jenti pra juda ku Bos.

RAJASTHANI (India, Pakistan)

म्हारा परमात्मा मैं साख देऊ हूं के थाने पेदाणेरे वास्ते थारी पूजा करणरे वास्ते ही मने जनम दियो है। इण पल मैं म्हारी नवलता ने धारी सबलता, भाणी, दुबलता ने थारी ऐश्वर्यता ने परमाणित करूं हूं । थारे विना जोर कोई भगवान का नी है। ने तू संकट दूर करण वाहों ने सग जग तू हज है ।

RAJASTHANI: Marwari dialect (India, Pakistan)

हे ईश्वर ! मैं साथी देवूं सूं... पिछान ने ताई तथा तेरी पूजा करने ताई, तें मना पैदा कियो सः । मं ए बखत मंजूर करूँ यूँ कि मैं निर्बल सूं और तू सर्व- शक्तिमान सः मं गरीब सूं और तू बहुत धनी सः तथा मं तुच्छ मूं तथा तू सामरथ सः ।

तेरे अलावा और कोई परमात्मा कोनी तू ही भयानक संकट में तारणां हार और सामरथ सः ।

SAMAL (SAMAL BAHASA) (Philippine Islands)

Adu makasaksi, Ya Tuhan ku, dah bay hinang aku ni katoonan maka ni duwaahan. Aku nulay ma kadjapan iti ni kalunaan maka ni kamiskinan ku maka dayah Mahananiya sakki Tuhan Suga Siga nabang ma kalaatan kaullu- man.

SANSKRIT

अहं साक्षी अस्मि | हे मम प्रभो । त्वां परिज्ञातु पूजयितुं च त्वयाह उत्पादितः । इदानीमह आत्म- दुर्बलतायाः, तव शक्ति मत्तायाः स्वदरिद्रतायाः तव सर्व सम्पन्नतायाः साक्षी भवामि ।

संकट सहायकः, आत्मनिर्भरः, त्वां बिना, कोsप्यन्यः परमात्मा नास्ति । [Page 530]

SEBUANO (CEBUANO, VISAYAN) (Philippine Islands)

bahyang ha-Jun. Eng perhut saksi, ku-ma seadeh, ha kelemahan eng ru ha kekuasaan Jun, ru ha nahajap eng ru ha kenayak Jun.

Saksihan ko, O Diyos ko, nga Ikaw mao ang naglalang kanako sa pag-ila Kanimo ug pag- simba Kanimo. Matud-an ko niining gutloa, sa akong kawalay mahimo ug sa Imong gahom, sa akong kakabus ug sa Imong bahandi.

Wala nay laing Diyos kondili Ikaw, ang tabang sa katalagman, ang Nagkinaugaling- ong-Pagkinabuhi.

SENOI: SEMAI (CENTRAL SAKAI): (Malaysia, Indonesia)

Eng menanggonkan berok ng sabagai saksi, Ya Tuhan eng, ajeh-lah Jun tělah perjadikan ha eng untok ha pannei ha-Jun ru ha sem- kate Bahaya, yang der Chukup Jun Sendiri. Walah Tuhan asik ju pader Jun, Jun Pěnolok

SENOI: TEMIAR (NORTHERN SAKAI) (Malaysia)

Yeeq menanggongkan diri yeeq-deh re saksi, O Tuhan yeeq, naq Haaq-top mentegel- kan yeeq untok neh-neh Haaq wab bersem- bahyang Haaq, Yeeq naik saksi, ma-mentar- deh, akan teq bersil yeeq wab bersil Haaq, kapada kemiskinan yeeq wab kekayaan Haaq. Hoi Tuhan yang moi num Haaq, Pembeseh dallam Bahaya, yang Ehtet tet tenaq.

SINDHI (India, Pakistan)

هي منهنجا پر ہو، مان ساکی تو ڈیان ته تو مونکي پنهنجي سچائنا ، پنهنجي في اياسا عرف لاء پندا كيو ء ئي آهي. هن کن مان پنهنجي د رېلتا ؟ تنهنجي شكتي ، ولهائي ؟ پنهنجي هيتانيء ؛ تنهنجي طاقت ؛ پنهنجي ولا تنهنجي ونهيائي سويكار كربان تو. تو كان سواء كوب ايشور كون آهي. لون لي خطري بر مددگار آهين ؟ پنهنجي قوت ڪرائي سان پینل آهين.

SINHALESE (SINHALA) (Sri Lanka)

නවස්සර කිරීමත් සඥාහා සිබ වහන්සේ වා යැවූ බවට එම සාක්ෂි වෙමි. දුර්වලත්වය සහ ඔබගේ ශක්තියත්, මාගේ අසරණකම සහ ඔබගේ සෞභාග්‍යයත් පිළිබඳව, වේ ඓනොතෙහිදී එම සාක්ෂාත් වෙයි. උපද්‍රවයේදී ආධාර කරන්නාවූත් ස්වයංජ වීවූත්, ඔබ වහන්සේ හැර වෙන

TAGALOG (FILIPINO) (Philippine Islands)

Ako ay sumasaksi, O Diyos ko, na ako ay Iyong nilikha upang Ikaw ay kilalanin at sam- bahin. Aking pinatutunayan, sa mga sandaling ito, and aking kawalan ng kapangyarihan at ang Iyong lakas, sa aking karukhaan at and Iyong kayamanan.

Walang ibang Panginoong Diyos maliban sa Iyo, ang Siyang Tumutulong sa lahat ng pan- ganib at ang Walang Kawakasan. [Page 531]

TAGBANUA (Philippine Islands)

Taksi ako O Dios ko nga pianak manan mo ako nga sumonod Kanimo baw ikaw e nag buat kanaum. Natandaan ko kayte nga yon kiarotan ko nga sabap, kanimo baw kat Kakorongan ko daasi kat ka doonan ko baw yan Kadoonan mo. Uga nay bakun ng Dios ekaw lamang, nga825. mananabang et Kakorean baw Ka gayonan et usa baw usa.

TAMIL (India, Malaysia, Sri Lanka)

என் கடவுளே, தங்களை அறிந்து வழி படுவதற் கெனவே என்னைப் படைத்திருக் கிறீர் என்பதற்கு நானே சாட்சி. இத் தருணம், என் பலவீனத்திற்கும் உந்தன் வல்லமைக்கும், என் வறுமைக்கும் உந்தன் செல்லாக்கிற்கும் சாட்சியம் கூறுகிறேன். ஆபத்தில் சகாயன், சுய உருவயான தாங்களன்றி லேறு யாருமில்லை.

TAW SUG (JOLOANO SULU) (Philippine Islands, Borneo)

Aku, in saksi, O Allah, ikaw in nagpapanjari kaku, umingat kaimu iban magsumba kaimu. Sapahan ku ha way kung ku iban ha gausmuhatzzaijwz£oj6 12ulEkhwu╗7ti1ju1/7£snmjwtu ka miskin ku iban ha daya mu. Wayruun dugaing Tuhan hambuúk-buuk da ikaw, tabang ha kasusahan, in way nagpapan- jari.

TELUGU (India)

తెలుసుకోడానికి నిన్ను పూజించడానికి సృష్టించావని చెప్పడానికి నేను సాక్షీభూతు డను. నా ఆశక్తతను నీ శక్తిని నా పేద రికాన్ని నీ సంపదను ఈ క్షణంలో నేనంగీక బాధలలో సహకారిగ ఆత్మ సంయ మన పరునిగవుండే దైవం నువ్వు తప్ప 4oË85° 8.

TEMUAN+ (M@alaysia)

Akuk menanggongkan dighik sabagai saksi, Yak Tuhan-Kuk, bahawak—lah Ong, telah menjadikan akuk untok mengenal dan memu- jik Ong. Akuk nait saksi, padak waketu nin, akan kelemah akuk dan kekuasak Ong, kemis- kinan akuk dan kekayak Ong.

Nyap adak Tuhan melainkan Ong, Pelin- dong dalam Bahaya, yang Bedighik Sendighik.

THAI (Thailand)

โอ ข้าแต่พระผู้เป็นเจ้า ข้าพเจ้าขอเป็นพยานที่ พระองค์ ได้ทรงสร้างให้ข้าพเจ้าได้รู้จักพระองค์ และได้

แล้วต่อการไร้กำลัง พระองค์ อำนาจของข้าพเจ้าต่อฤทธิ์เดชของ ต่อความขัดสนของข้าพเจ้าและต่อความมั่งคั่ง ของพระองค์ ไม่มีพระเจ้าอื่นใดนอกจากพระองค์ พระองค์ผู้

& • ༸ ྂ", ov༔ °a5»8。DnzuwnuiunzatL ua2w7£DaribnsyinŞ༄t Inginwi

TIBETAN, CENTRAL (BHÔTIA): Lhasa (Dbus) dialect (Tibet, Iwdia)

༄༅། །བདག་ཞི་དཀོཞ་མཆོག། བདག་གིས་ཆིད་ལ་ཤེས་ཐུབ་བ་དང་། མཆོད་ཐུབ་པིཥ་ ཆེད་དུ།་ ཉིད་ཀྱིས་བདག་བསྐྲུཊ་པར་མཛད་ཡོད། ཅེས་བདག་ཉིད་དཔང་བོར་ ཡོད༽ བདག་ཞི་སྟོབས་མེད་ཉམ་ཐག་དང༌། ཉིད་ཞི་སྟོབས་རྩལ་ཆེ་བ། བདག་ནི་དབུལ་ཞིང་ཕོངས་པ་དང་། ཉིད་ནི་ཕྱུག་ཅིང་མངལ་ཐང་ལོངས་སྤྱོད་ ལྡན་པ་བཅས། བདག་གིས་རྟོགས་བྱུང༌། ཉིད་ལས་ལྷག་པའི་ལྷ་གཞན་ ནི་ཡོད་མ་ཡིན། ཉིད་ཀྱིས་བདག་རྣམས་འཇིགས་པ་ལས་སྐྱོབ་པ དང༌། ཉིད་ནི་རང་དབང་དང་ལྡན་པའོ།། 11 · བྷ་ཧྰ་- ཨུ་ ལཧཱ །། [Page 532]

TIRURAY (Philippine Islands)

Ge-tindego ko Tulus si be-em me'y le-me- nimbag ge begen inok ge-tuwa ku be-em brab ge-datu-o ko be-em. Ge-safa-a ku bene'y enda e ke-ataga ku brab ati'y barakat Mu-we, e ke-meskina ku-we brab keungangen mu-we. Enda e se-giyo Tulus we-e Be-em sa-en, e Temabang ngo enok u-wen ni kamarasayan, e Turun.

TULU† (India)

ದೇವರೆ ! ಈರೆನ್ ತೆರಿಯರೆ ಗಾಡ್, ಮಲ್ಪರೆ ಗಾದ್ ಈರಿಯನನ್ ಸೃಷ್ಟಿ ಮಲ್ಲರ್ ದಾಂತಿನಾಯೆ ? ಈ‌ ಶಕ್ತಿವಂತೆ, ಯಾವ ಈರೆನ ಪೂಜೆ ಯಾನ್ ಶಕ್ತಿ ಬಡವೆ. ಈರ

ಈರ್ ಒರಿಯೇ ವೇವೆ‌. ಈರ್ ಕಳ್ಕೊಡ್ ಸಹಾಯ ಮಲ್ಪುನಾರಿ, ತಾನೇ ತಾನಾದ್ ಉಪ್ಪುನಾರದಾ ಈರೇ, (38

TURKISH

Ilahi! Senin, beni, Seni tanimak ve Sana tap- mak için yaratmiş olduğuna şahadet ederim. Şu anda kendi aczime ve Senin Kuvvetine; kendi zaafima ve Senin iktidarina ve kendi fakir- ligime ve senin enginligine taniklik ediyorum. Müheymin ve Kayyum Ilâh ancak Sen sin.

TURKMEN (TURKOMAN) (Afghanistan, Írán, Turkmen S.S.R.)

کو ملی بر پایان ای تیک اسلایم حسین منی با دا شد یک امریکی تانا تمن و عبادت اتمک اوچین، شهادت بریارین شد حالده ، روز یا را مز لقمه و سن نیک قوت لتنکا و روز سوکل لکه وسن نیک اقتدار لفنگا و روز بوق نیز لقمه و سن نینگ بای تفنکا بوق سندನ್ با شفا خدا قدر تلی ایام سنیک

VIETNAMESE (Indochina)

Lay Thượng Dữ của cậu, con sin chứng nhận rằng NGƯỜI, đã tạo còn đề hiểu biết NGƯỜI, đề tôn thờ NGƯỜI Con xin thú nhận ngay lúc nay con that là bit-le trire uy-lure của NGƯỜI và nghèo nàn trước sự phong phú của NGƯỜI,

Không có ai ngoài NGƯỜI là Thượng De, NGUOI là Dang Cirn-kho Ciru-nan Đăng Tự.Tôn Tự Tại,

WARAY (SAMAR-LEYTE, SAMAREÑO, WARAYWARAY) (Philippine Islands)

Testigos ako Nimo, Dios namon, nga Ikaw an naghimo ha acon para kilal-on ka ngan tuuron. Natuod ako hini yana nga oras nga waray aco gahom ug ha imo gahom, ha acon kawarayan ug ha imo caricohan.

Waray na iba nga Dios con diri Ikaw, ma naracop han maka-luluoy, ug mga waray na paglaom. [Page 533]

• Denotes revised translation

† Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

BAINING (New Britain Island, Papua New Guinea)

Ngo tes nas, aingo gu Kalau. Sa na rong na nge ivengo taram inge dilotu. Ai langit ingo koir kunga kurot dap ai nge di di kurot. Aingo di ama ralak ka na ngo dap a inge di ama hurong bara ka na nge. Ai re Varivat ki di koir a nga Kalau dokop sokop nge. Katat naramut na mara ma guvengirong, kosaki koir memar varung dokop sokop e Lalau.

CHAMORRO (Guam and other Mariana Islands)

Mandeklara yo', si Us'us-hu, na un fatinos yo' ya para bai bu tungo' Hao yan para bai hu adora Hao. Tumestitigu yo' pago' Momento, ni tai nina' sina-hu yan ma acompara gi fuetsa-mu, i pobla-hu yan i Abundasia-mu Taya mas ke guaiya na Yu'us i a'ayuda gi pelegro i todo i tiempo layana na Yu'us.

EASTER ISLAND (PASCUENSE) (Easter Island)

Au testigo, o tooku Atúa, a au ianga i iaau memahani i atu i a koe. Hanga rahi i te horo nei taaku mee hanga rahi tamee itau tetahi mee i tau ono.

Ina tetahi Atúa ko koe noma, tangata moaina ite ati, tangata mohapao ia ia tangata riva riva.

EFATE (EFATESE)† (New Hebrides)

A noa pae nalomauana Supe anginau, O! Nanga ningo ku dawonaki nau nanga anga ataeko po do lotu kingo. Doko rangi waia a noa pae nalomauana nanga kinau a manainai ngo a dika nakasuana ma ningo ku peani nakasuana waina e parua liu; a pei tea tika sa ma ningo kupei tea songolapa ki sara naleo.

Ningo ku masikima pei Supe, ku silae doko rangi ni nariesokiana ngo ku mariatae dumama doko pae nakasuana aningo masikima.

FIJIAN (Fiji Islands)

Au sa qai kila, Oi Kemuni na noqu Kalou, ni sa i Kemuni ga Koni a vakatuburi au mai me'u kilai Kemuni ka dau masu vei Kemuni. Au sa kila tu e na gauna oqo ni'u sa ka malumalumu wale Koni sa kaukauwa Ko i Kemuni, ni'u sa ligalala Koni sa vutuniyau Ko i Kemuni.

Sa sega tale ni dua na Kalou au kila sa i Kemuni duadua ga, Oi Kemuni Koni sa Dauveivukei e na Guana ni Leqa, O i Kemuni na Kalou Bula Vakai Koya ga.

FUTUNA (Futuna (Hoorn) Islands)

Ekau tui maoki loku Atua, na ke faka tupu au ke kau iloa ma atolasio ki lou agai.

Ekau tui maoki ile temi nei, iloku gaegae ki lou puleaga, loku mativa ki lou kalasia.

Tie kau tui fuai kile Atua etasi, kole pule taualuga mo mafimafi.

Eina saofaki tatou mei le fakasala, mo tuutamaki kesekese ole malama.

GILBERTESE (Kiribati, Nauru, Ocean Island)

Atuau, I kaotia ma te koaua ba Ko a tia ni karikai ba N na ataiko, N na tangiriko ao N na noboiko. Ao I kaotia n te tai aei ba boni moan te m'aaka Ngkoe ao ngai boni moan te mangori. Moan te korakora Ngkoe ao ngai boni moan te kainnano. Bon akea te Atua temanna ba ti Ngkoo ae Ko maiu i bon Iroum ao te Tia Buokiira.

HAWAIIAN (Hawaiian Islands)

KE HI'I NEI AU I KA'U HOIKE, E KUU AKUA, UA HANA MAI OE IA'U EIKE IA OE A E HOOMANA IA OE. KE HOIKE NEI AU, I KEIA MANAWA, I KO'U PALUPALU AI KOU IKAIKA I KO'U ILIHUNE A I KOU WAIWAI. AOLE HE AKUA E A'E O OE WALE NO, KE KOKUA I KA MANAWA POINNO, KE KOKUA O KEIA KINO NOU NA POMAIKA'I. [Page 534]

KOSRAEAN (KUSAIEAN) (Eastern Caroline Islands)

Nga fwakak, O God luk Kom oreyula nga in ete kom a in alu nu Sum, Nga fwakak ingena ke munas luk a ke ku Lom, nu ke sukasrup luk a ke kasrup Lom.

MARSHALLESE (Marshall Islands)

Ij, kamol, O ao Anij, bwe Kwoar komanmon io bwe in jela kin Yuk. Ij kwalok, kio, kin mwojno ko ao, nae Kajur eo Am, kin jeramol eo ao, nae maron eo Am. Ejelok bar Anij ijelokim, Dri jiban ilo ien ban, Dri binmur ilo Mangin God Sayom, mwe kasre kut in pal in ien otemjij. fosrgna, a ma ku in sifwana.

LAU (Solomon Islands)

Nau ku fa mamana oe, a God nau, na o, haungai nau, uria kua haitamamu, ma kua foa hatamu. Nau ku fitoomu asi kada na, kua alua makeso la nau gi, i fafo na rigita la oe, na siofa la nau i fafo na initooa oe, e langi lau ta God, teeni oe na, na fufa kada ana ta'a la, ma a toto firi.

LIFU (LIFOUAN) (Loyalty Islands)

Akötesie ti fe, nyipici koi ni laka Cilie la Atre xupi ni matre troni a adraië Cilie. Ini a öhne hnyawa enehila laka Atre ka kucakuca ni, nge thei Cilie la egöcatr. Atre ka pë mo ni, nge Cilie la trenamo.

Nyipici, pêkö ketre Akötesie hui Enëtilai, Joxu, la Atre i xatua ngöne la ijine hace, la Atre ka cilehuti epinēti palua.

MAORI, COOK ISLANDS (RAROTONGAN) (Cook Islands)

Ko au te kite E taku Atua e Naau au i anga mai kia kite ia Koe e kia akamori ia Koe. Te akapapu nei au i teia nei i toku puapingakore e i Toou ririnui, ki toku putaua e ki Toou ki e manganui. Kare atu e Atua ke mari ra ko Koe anake, te Tauturu i roto i te tuatau o te kino, te Tauturu o te oraanga.

MAORI, NEW ZEALAND (New Zealand)

E meinga ana e au, E toku Atua, Náu au i hanga kia mohio ki a Koe a kia koropiko ki a Koe. E whaka puaki ana au, i tenei wa, ki toku ngoikore a ki Tóu kaha, ki toku pohara a ki Tou oranga.

Kahore he Atua i tua atu ko Koe anake, te Awhina i roto i te Mate, te Mana noho Motuhake.

MELE: Fila dialect (Fila and Efate Islands, New Hebrides)

Feuia foki akoe Atua akoe gani konia auau sirtaea akoe, go akoe gani komaro.

Tmaramararaga niau iaro maramana poulapa, kit teulia go mujia miefa geia tmouriraga. Go kainugia foki akoe geia nekekela gani mafitlakena toturu akoe Atua.

MOTU, HIRI (Papua New Guinea)

Lau hereva momokani, lauegu Dirava e, Oi ese lau karaia Oi diba bona Oi tomadiho henia gwauraia. Lau gwauraia, harihari, lauegu manoka bona Oiemu goada dekenai, lauegu ogogami bona Oiemu kohu dekenai.

Dirava ta be lasi, Oi sibona, Durua-Dika- Dekenai, Sibona-Noho Diravana.

NENGONE (MAREEN) (Loyalty Islands)

Kolo ca Madrarungo, uni ci asesekoni, ko hnei Buango hna puli nu thu bane carajewe du Buango, ne ahmani Buango, inu ci waamilu du Buango ri gula hawa ome, wenore kogo ke inu ri tadawaien 'ore nene ni Buango, ka deko ace ke inu ri tadawaien 'ore aca ace ni Buango, ka deko se Makaze, ka Buango so 'ore thu thakui nu ri tadan 'ore tango, ne Buango 'ore ci wien kani Buango ko.

PALAUAN (Western Caroline Islands, Guam)

Akmui el medengei, O Dios erngak, el kmo kau a milebak el mome dengelkau e mengull er Kau. Makuuchais er chelechal time el kirel a elitechetuk ma klisichem, ma elebulek, ma chiltetem.

Ngdiak a ngodech el Dios ngkmal di kau el tang. El mesiou ra chelebuul edingar el mo cherechar. [Page 535]

PIDGIN, NEW HEBRIDES (BISLAMA, BICHELAMARE) (New Hebrides)

Mi talem stret O God blong mi se yu mekem mi blong save yu mo prei long yu. Long smol taem ia mi save talem tru long wik paoa blong mi mo long strong paoa blong yu; mo mi talem se mi kat nating be yu yu kat planti samting. I no kat nara fala God be yu: yu yu help long taem blong trabol mo yu yu save stap oltaem yu wan no mo.

PIDGIN, PAPUAN (NEO-MELANESIAN) (Papua New Guinea)

O God bilong mi. Mi tokaut nau long Yu yet i bin wokim mi baimbai mi nap long save long Yu na mi nap long preia long Yu. Nau tasol mi tokaut, olsem mi no strong na Yu i strong moa. Na mi tokaut tu olsem mi rabis pinis na Yui holim olgeta samting.

I no gat narapela God. Yu tasol i stap. Na Yu i halivim ol long taim bagarap i laik kisim ol na Yu tasol i lukautim Yu yet.

PONAPEAN (Eastern Caroline Islands)

I wia kadehdeh, Oh ai Koht, me Komwi me ketin kapikiedahr en esei Komwi oh en kaun- dok ohng Komwi. I patohwanehr, ni ansou kiset, me ngehi me leut oh Komwi me mana- man, oh sohte ahi mehkot ah Omwi te mehkaros.

Sohte pil emen Koht pwe Komwih te, me Sawasepen ansoun apwal, oh Koamoaur Poat- papoat.

ROTUMAN (Rotuma Island)

Gou aier'ak 'otou 'Aitu, ne 'Ae ta fup'akim gou la 'inea 'Ae. Gou aier'ȧk 'e ao pau hete'is, ne gou 'af af ka 'Ae ne'ne', gou keią ka 'Ae'es koroa.

Kat 'es 'Ait hoi'akit ra, 'Ae 'esea Gagaja, ne asoa gou 'e ao noanoā. 'Ait se 'es a'ofige.

SAMOAN (Samoa, New Zealand)

Lo'u Atua e, ou te molimau atu, na faie, e Lau Afio a'u ina ia ou iloa Oe ma tapuai atu ia te Oe. Ou te tautino atu i lenei itula, lo'u augavale ma Lou malosi, o lo'u mativa i le ma Lou tamaoaiga.

E leai lava se tasi Atua na o Oe, o le Fesoasoani i Puapuaga, o le Puna-o-le-Ola.

TAHITIAN (Society Islands, Tuamotus, Marquesas Islands, Gambier and Austral Islands)

Te ite nei au e ta 'u Atua e ua hamani Oe ia'u Note iteraa ia e te haamuriraa atu hoi ia Oc. Te ite nei hoi au na roto i teie nei taime i to'u nei paruparu I mua i to Oe na Puai Hope, e, to'u nei veve i mua i te rahi O ta Oe na Tao'a.

Aore roa e Atua è atu maori râ o Oe ana'e, Oia tei hi'o aroha mai i tae i te mau taime ati, Oia tei tupu mai mai toro mai ia'Na iho.

TANNA: Nupuanmen (Weasisi, Whitesands) dialect (Tanna Island, New Hebrides)

lau iakani nuparian, o rahak larumanig, in namol iau iakarun ik iakafaki kamik. Iau iakani nuparian u roaiu o rahak napauian, ik iatam askasik iau iatos takaku.

Iarumanig katimun tika matou ik pusin ama, ik nakasiru ia nian raha narahain, ik pusin ama.

TONGAN (Tonga Islands)

Lotu Ho'ata. Ko e fakamo'oni au 'e hoku 'Otua, kuo Ke ngaohi au, ke u 'ilo koe mo u hu kiate koe, 'Oku ou faka-mo'oni'i 'i he momeniti ni ki hoku vaivaí pea ki Ho'o Málohi, ki hoku masivá pea ki Ho'o Koloa 'ia. 'Oku 'ikai ha toe 'Otua kehe ka ko Koe, ko e tokoni 'i he tu'utámakí, ko e mo' ui pé íate Koe.

TRUKESE (Eastern Caroline Islands)

Ua puaratta, O ai Kot, pun En ka fori inisi pun upwe sile En o fel ngeni En. Ua puer nganuk non ei atun pun ngang use fakkun tufich nge En ka atufichi ai, ua osupuang nge En ka apiseki ai.

Ese wor eman Kot pun En chok. Ewe Tufich lon feiengau, O Ewe-unusan Anuwor.

URIPIV (Malekula Island, New Hebrides)

Inu nurai weritun, o Atua suk, ga nik kuloli inu re borong wosi nik ko re bosrove nik. Inu nurai weritun leligen wolik re inu sete nu teter ko teterin som, re jorok ejki ko re jorom elep.

Atua san ejki ko nik, ku metmet kem re nanu ga marsej, nik ga kumaur tetajer. [Page 536]

UVEA, WEST (OUVÉAN) (Uvea Island, Loyalty Islands)

Oge me haihnathuu, Khong lö, ujë up nya me oge méhé ka oganöu. Me hai hnathuu ogé mé haio monu hnyi traém ang hnyi hnyimakan hnäm hna hu, me änyam hnathu me anyik thedruöc me hnäm hna tren.

Ebë ke Khong aé ücü möu, at aé hana jé ünyi hia, mé hé ka hum öta hnyi hwetr aé gan, uthibi at aé tibentenge.

VAHO (New Caledonia)

Gotchogn 'héré némé Gn'hon Yova. Gn'hon ro wéra mé gorowé atché wé Gn'hon. Gn'hon tai go mé noué ka Gn'hon. Arégn'h wéhn gn'hin gn'hré gn'hiri, ka, iken, mon wéhn gn'hi i go mé oumo wéhn: go tchogn'héré némé Gn'hon venvürü ton ra. Gn'hon bo tonhenran nohu ta vi patou, mon na ta ko'hen mé vinniré. Gn'hon tai, Gn'hon Yova, aya kon, tdha mon ari koa.

YAPESE (Western Caroline Islands)

A Got kemichu wun'ug Ni kam sunmiyeg Ni ngug mathange-luwol. Nigem mug liyor ngom. Gum nang ni gage dariy Rogog ma gure gab fala-ab. Dariy rebe Got ni taareb Rogon ngom mi wod Fanam mathange luwol.

E. EUROPE

Denotes revised translation.

• Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.

ALBANIAN

Deshmoj a Zot, i em Perëndi! që ti më ke krijue mue për me të njoftun tyë dhe për me të adhurue tyë. Deshmoj këtë çeshtje në dobsi- nën t'ime dhe në fuqinë tate, në vobeksinë t'eme dhe në pasuninë Tate, S'ka tjetër Perëndi përvec se teje, Mbrues, i vet-gjendun!

ARABIC: Maltese dialect

Nagħti xhieda, O Alla tiegħi, li Int ħlaqtni biex nagharfek u nagħtik qima. Nistqarr f'dan il-waqt kemm jien bla hila u kemm Int set- ghani; nistqarr il-faqar tieghi wil-ghana tieghek. M'hemmx Alla ieñor ghajrek, il- Għajnuna fit-Tiġrib, Inti li Tgħix fik Innifsek.

BASQUE (France)

Seguratzendut oi néré Jainkoa égin na zula zu ezagutuzeko éta adoratuzeko. Seguratzen- dut orai néré ahalgabétasuna éta zuré podéria néré béhartasuna éta zuré ontasuna. Esta bertze Jainkok zu bésik, bera iraun dena Guré lagintza galbitdetan.

BASQUE (Spain)

Ene Jainko hori, Zu ezagutzeko eta adorat- zeko egin nauzula sinesten dut. Une honetan banaiz neure botererik ezaren lekuko, zure ahalmenarena, bai eta neure pobrezia eta zure aberastasunarena.

Ez dago Zu baino beste jainkorik, arriskuan laguntzen duena, bere baitan bizi dena.

BIELORUSSIAN (BYELORUSSIAN, WHITE RUSSIAN) (U.S.S.R., Poland, Lithuania)

Я сьведчу, О Божа, што Ты мяне стварыў, каб я пазнаў Цябе і Цябе сла- віў. Я сьцьвярджаю ў гэтую хвіліну маю бездапаможнасьць і Тваю моц, маю убогасьць і Тваю веліч.

Няма іншага Бога, апрача Цябе, Да- паможца ў бядзе, Самаіснуючы.

BRETON (Northwestern France)

Test on, o ma Doue, ac'h eus krouet ac'haron evit da anaverout hag azeulin. Anzar a ran d'ar c'houlz-man ma dic'halloud ha da galloudegezh ma faourantez ha da binvidigezh. N'eus Doue all Eset egedout, an hini a sikour e-barzh an danjer, an hini a zo drezhàn e-unan. [Page 537]

CATALÁN (Andorra, Balearic Islands, France, Sardinia, Spain)

Sóc testimoni, ¡oh Déu meu! que tu m'has creat per a conèixer-te i adorar-te. Sóc testi- moni en aquest moment, de la meva impoten- cia i del Teu poder, de la meva pobresa i de la Teva riquesa.

No existeix altre Déu, més que Tu, el que Ajuda en el Perill, el que substitueix per Sí Mateix.

CROATIAN (SERBOCROATIAN, Latin character) (Austria, Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Italy, Romania, Yugoslavia)

Ispovedam se, o Gospode, Bože moj! Ti si stvorio mene da spoznam i obožavam Tebe. Ispovedam u trenutku ovom slabost moju a moć Tvoju, siromaštvo moje a bogatstvo Tvoje. Nema drugog Boga sem Tebe, Sves- pašavajući Samopostojeći!

CZECH*

Dosvědčuji, ó můj Bože, že jsi mě stvořil, abych Té poznal(a) a vzýval(a) Té. Doznávám v tomto okamžiku svou bezmoc- nost a Tvoji moc, svou chudobu a Tvé bohat- ství.

Není jiného Boha kromě Tebe, Pomocníka v Nebezpečí, Sama v Sobě Existujícího.

DANISH

Jeg bevidner, o min Gud, at du har skabt mig, for at jeg skal kende og tilbede dig. Jeg vidner i denne stund om min afmagt og din styrke, om min armod og din rigdom.

Der er ingen anden Gud end dig, hjælpen i farens stund, den enerådende.

DUTCH

Ik getuig, o mijn God, dat Gij mij hebt ges chapen om U te kennen en te aanbidden. Ik betuig op dit ogenblik mijn machteloosheid en Uw macht, mijn armoede en Uw rijkdom.

Er is geen ander God dan Gij, de Helper in nood, de Bij-Zich-Bestaande.

ENGLISH

See p. 496.

ESTONIAN

Tunnistan, oh my Jumal, et Sa oled mind loonud Sind tundma ja teenima. Sel hetkel tunnistan oma jõuetust ja Sinu Vägevust, minu vaesust ja Sinu rikkust.

Pole muud Jumalat kui Sina, Abi hädas, Iseolev.

FAROESE (Faroe Islands)

Eg asánni, Gud mín, at tú skapaði meg til at kenna teg og tilbidja teg. Sanneliga kenni eg, í hesu løtu, mitt hjálpar- loysi og tína megi, mitt fatækdømi og titt veldi.

Eingin annar Gud er til uttan tú, bert tú hjálpur í vanda, bert tú ert um alt annað fer.

FINNISH

Todistan, oi Jumalani, että olet luonut minut tuntemaan sinut ja palvelemaan sinua. Tuon julki tällä hetkellä oman voimattomuuteni ja sinun voimasi, oman köyhyyteni ja sinun rik- kautesi. Ei ole mitään nuuta Jumalaa kuin sinä, apu hädässä, itsestään oleva.

FRENCH

Je suis témoin, ô mon Dieu, que Tu m'as créé pour Te connaître et pour T'adorer. J'atteste en cet instant mon impuissance et Ton pouvoir, ma pauvreté et Ta richesse.

Il n'est pas d'autre Dieu que Toi, Celui qui secourt dans le péril, Celui qui subsiste par Lui-même.

FRISIAN* (Frisian Islands, Germany, The Netherlands)

Ik tsjugje, o myn God, dat Jo my skepen hawwe om Jo te kennen en te oanbidden. Ik betsjûgje op dit pas myn machteleazens en Jo macht, myn earmoede en Jo rykdom.

Der is gjin oare God as Jo, de Helper yn need, de Troch-Himsels-Besteande.

GAELIC, IRISH (ERSE, IRISH)

Tugaim fianaise, a Dhia, gur chruthaigh tú mé chun thú a aithint agus a adhradh. Dearbhaím san am seo mo neamhéifeacht agus do Neart, mo bhochtaineacht agus do Shaibh- reas.

Nil Dia ar bith eile ann ach tú, an Cúntóir i mBaol, an FéinChothaitheach. [Page 538]

GAELIC, SCOTTISH

Tha mi toirt fianuis, O mo Thighearna, gun do chruthaich Thu mi gu eòlas a chur ort agus gu aoradh a dheanamh Dhuit. Tha mi ag aideachadh, aig an àm seo, mo laigse fhìn agus Do chumhachdsa, mo ainnis agus T'ionmhaissa.

Chan' eil Dia eile ann ach Thu, ar Còmhnuidh ri àm gàbhaidh, an Uile-bheò.

GERMAN

Ich bezeuge, o mein Gott: Du hast mich erschaffen, Dich zu erkennen und Dich anzubeten. Ich bezeuge in diesem Augenblick meine Ohnmacht und Deine Macht, meine Armut und Deinen Reichtum.

Es ist kein anderer Gott ausser Dir, dem Helfer in Gefahr, dem Selbstbestehenden.

GERMAN: Alsatian dialect (France)

Isch bezeï, o min Gott, dass du mish erschafft häsh, disch ze erkenne un anzebette.

Isch bezei én dem Aüebleck mini Schwäsche un dini Macht, mini Ärmut un din Rischdum.

Es gét ken Gott üsser dér, dem Beschétzer. dem ewich seïende.

GERMAN: Luxembourgian dialect (Luxembourg)

Esh bezeien, O mei' God, dass Dû mêch erschaffen heust Dech ze erkennen an Dech unzeibeden. Esh bezeien an dessem Ableck meng Schwachhêt an Deng Macht, meng Armut an Dein Reichtom.

Et gèt ken anere God ausser Dier, dem Hellefer a Gefohr, den durch sech selwer beste't.

GREEK

Μαρτυρῶ, ὦ Θεέ μου, ὅτι μὲ δημιούργησες για νὰ Σὲ ἀναγνωρίζω χαὶ νὰ Σε λατρεύω. Επιβεβαιώνω αὐτὴν τὴν στιγμὴν τὴν ἀδυναμίαν μου μπρὸς στὴν ἰσχύν Σου, τὴν πενίαν μου μπρός στὸν πλοῦτον Σου. Δὲν ὑπάρχει ἄλλος Θεός ἐχτὸς ἀπὸ Σένα, τὸν βοηθὸ στὸν χίνδυνον, τὸν Αυτοσυντήρητο.

HUNGARIAN

Oh Uram, oh Istenem! Tanusága vagyok annak, hogy Te teremtettél engem, hogy megismerjelek és imádjalak. Beismerem a jelen pillanatban gyengeségemet és a Te Hatalmadat, szegénységemet és a Te Gazdagságodat. Rajtad kivül nincs más Isten csak Te, a Védelmező, az Önmagában Létező.

ICELANDIC

Ég ber þess vitni, Ó Guð minn, að þú hefir skapaò mig til þess að þekkja þig og tilbiðja big. Ég staðfesti á þessu augnabliki, vanmátt minn og mátt þinn, fàtækt mína og auðlegð Þína.

Enginn er Guð nema þú, Hjálpin í Nauðum, hinn Eilífi.

INUIT (INUPIAQ): Greenlandic dialect (Denmark, Greenland)

â, Upernarsauvunga. Gútiga Ivdlit pingortíkangma ilisariniásagavkit patldorfiginiásagavkitdlo.

Mánakorpiak navsuerpunga pigínauniki-ningnut ivdlitdlo pissaunekarnernut, pitsuning-nut ivdlitdlo pissûjunernut.

Avdlamik Gutikángilak Ivdlit kisivit, navianartune ikiortek, tamanut sapigakangitsok.

ITALIAN

Io faccio testimonianza, o mio Dio, che Tu mi hai creato per conoscer Ti e adorar Ti.

Io attesto in questo momento la mia debolezza e la Tua potenza, la mia povertà e la Tua ricchezza.

Non v'è altro Dio all'infuori di Te, l'Aiuto nel pericolo, Colui che Esiste da Sè.

ITALIAN: Corsican dialect (Corsica, Italy)

So testimone, u me Diu, chi mi hai fattu per conocedi e per amarti Digu, da stu momentu a me debuleza e a to forza, a me poereza e a to richeza.

Un ce altro Diu chi tu, l'auido in u periculu, quellu chi è per ellu stessu.

ITALIAN: Piedmontese dialect (Northwestern Italy)

Mi faso testimoniansa, ò Nósgnor, che Ti 'T l'has creame për conòss Te e adore Te. Mi diciaro ant cóst móment mia debólëssa e Tóa pótensa, mia póvertà e Tóa richessa.

A j'e gnun àutr Signor che Ti, l'Agiut ant ël perícol, Col ch'a esist daspërchièl. [Page 539]

ITALIAN: Sardinian dialect (Sardinia, Italy)

Deo fatto distimonìa, Deus meu, chi Tue mi has fattu omine/femina, pro Ti connoscher e pro Ti adorare.

In custu momentu, deo attesto sa debilesa mia e i-sa potenzia Tua, sa poberesa mia e i-sa ricchesa Tua.

Non b'hat atteru Deus a in foras de a Tie, Azudu in su perigulu, Cussu chi est solu dae Se.

NORWEGIAN: Nynorsk (Landsmål)

Eg vitnar, o min Gud, at Du har skapa meg så at eg kan kjenna Deg og tilbe Deg. Eg vitnar i denne stund om mi maktesløyse og Din styrke, om min fattigdom og Din rikdom. Der er ingen annan Gud enn Deg, Hjelparen i fare, den Evig Sjølvståande.

NORWEGIAN: Riksmål (Bokmål)

Jeg bevitner, o min Gud, at Du har skapt meg for at jeg kan kjenne Deg og tilbe Deg. Jeg vitner i denne stund om min maktesløshet og Din styrke, om min fattigdom og Din rikdom. Der er ingen annen Gud enn Deg, Hjelperen i fare, den Selvbestående.

POLISH

Swiadczę, O Panie, Boże mój, iżeś mnie stworzył, ażebym znał Cię i wielbil. Swiadczę w tej chwili mojej slabości a Twojej mocy, memu ubóstwu a Twemu bogactwu. Nie ma Boga prócz Ciebie, Obrońcy, Samoistnego.

PORTUGUESE

Dou testemunho, ó meu Deus, de que Tu me criaste para eu Te conhecer e adorar.

Confesso neste momento, minha incapacidade e Teu poder, minha pobreza e tua riqueza.

Não há outro Deus além de Tí, o amparo no perigo, o que existe por sí próprio.

ROMANIAN

Stau mărturie. O Stäpáne, pentru a Те cunoaste și a Te slāvi. Märturisesc in clipa aceasta slăbiciunea mea şi Puterea Ta, sărăcia mea şi Imbelşugarea Ta. Nu e alt Dumnezeu decat Tine, Cel Ocrotitor, Cel de Sine Stätätor!

ROMANSCH: Upper Engadine (Puter) dialect (Switzerland)

Eau fatsch testimoniaunza, o mieu Dieu, cha Tü am hest creó per At recugnuoscher e per At adorer.

Eau attest in quaist momaint mia deblezza e Tia potenza, mia poverted e Tia richezza.

I nu do üngün Dieu oter co Te, quel chi güda nel prievel, quel chi exista in Se stess.

ROMANY

Penáu, Devla, ke Tute sas ka kerdyán ma te žanáu Tut, hai te rudžív Tuke. Penáu akana, ke me süm slábo 'ai Tu san zoraló; ke me süm čoró 'ai Tu san barwaló. Nai kavér Devél, feri Tu hínka; o ažutimós and'e prikáza. Tu kai kórkoro ažutís Tu, či trubúl Tuke avrén.

ROMANY: Anglo-Romany dialect (Canada, United Kingdom, United States)

Mandy's acai te sikka as it 'uz Tooty as caired mandy te jin Tooty, ta te del cooshty borra lavs to Tooty sasky Tooty's morra Divvel. Ocknaw mandy's rokkarin trustel mandy's bee-roozlo ta Tooty's tacherly roozlo, ta mandy's chorro and Tooty's barvallo. There's kakkava Divvel ner Tooty, morra haskipen canna mendy's dray waffody cherras, Tooty con kakka coms chommany te ge along.

ROMANY: Sinto dialect (Northern Italy)

Me crava zaiga, o Mur Devel, che Tu kerdal man Ti pingiarap tut unt camap tut. Me ginava in cava ziro miri schwacha unt tiri zor, miri elenta unt tiri barvapen. Na hi vavrò Devel har Tu vri Tuter, holfa an u ferlocho, cova cai hì peske.

RUSSIAN

Я свидетельствую, о мой Боже, что Ты сотворил меня, чтобы я познал Тебя и поклонялся Тебе. Я подтверждаю в эту минуту свое бессилие и Твою мощь, свою скудность и Твое обилие. Нет Бога, кроме Тебя, помощника в опасности, Творителя самосущего. [Page 540]SAME (LAPP): LULESAMISKA (LULE LAPP) (Swedish Arctic) Mån vattau vihtenastemau, Jupmelam, tan pirra, aht Tån läh sjiunjetam mu, vai mån táptâu Tu ja rähkåtalau Tunji. Mán táptȧstau talle ietjam famotisvuotau ja Tu famov, mu hädjovuotau ja Tu pantavuotau.

I läh ietja Jupmel kå Tån, viehkke vata aiken kuhti läh ietjanat.

SLOVENE (Austria, Hungary, Italy, Yugoslavia) Priznavam, o moj Bog, da si me ustvaril, da Te spoznavam in molim. Prinznavam v tem trenutku svojo šibkost in Tvojo moč, svojo revščino in Tvoje bogastvo.

Ni Boga razen Tebe, Zaščitnika, Večnobivajočega.

SAME (LAPP): NORDSAMISKA (NORTHERN LAPP) (Scandinavian Arctic) Mån addán duođaštusa, Ibmilan, dan ala, atte Dån læt siv'dnidan mu, vai mån dåvdan Du ja gåbmirdan Du. Mån duođaštan dál ieččan haeddjovuođa ja Du fámo, ieččan gefudaga ja Du rig'gudaga.

Ii læt iežá Ibmil gå Dån, væk'ki hædi áigis, gutte læt ieš-aldad.

SPANISH Soy testigo, oh mi Dios, de que Tú me has creado para conocerte y adorarte. Atestiguo en este momento mi impotencia y Tu poder, mi pobreza y Tu riqueza.

No hay otro Dios más que Tú, el Que Ayuda en el Peligro, el Que Subsiste por Sí Mismo.

SAME (LAPP): SYDSAMISKA (SOUTHERN LAPP) (Norway, Sweden) Manne vitt'enusteb, O muv Jubméele, dan bijre, atte Dadne manneb leäh šugniedamme, juktie manne dabdeb Dadneb jih rukkedalleb Dadneb. Manne dabdesteb dálie jež'ene vieliesvuodeb jih Duv fámoub, jež'ene giehviesvuodeb jih Duv boådnaavuodeb.

Ij leäh jeäzáh Jubméele guh Dadne, gutte leäh viekkie várán ájgien, gutt'e leäh jež'esisnie årruomienie.

SWEDISH Jag bär vittnesbörd om, O, min Gud, att Du har skapat mig för att lära känna Dig och för att tillbedja Dig. Jag betygar i detta ögonblick min svaghet och Din styrka, min fattigdom och Din rikedom.

Det finnes ingen annan Gud utom Du, Hjälpen i farans stund, den i sig själv Varande.

SLOVAK (Hungary, Slovakia, Yugoslavia) Svedčim ó môj Bože: Tyvsi ma stvoril, aby som Ťa spoznal(a) a Teba vzýval(a). V tomto okamihu dosvedčujem svoju bezmocnosť a Tvoju moc, svoju chudobu a Tvoje bohatstvo.

Niet žiadneho Boha okrem Teba, Pomáhajúceho v nebezpečenstve, Samobytného.

UKRAINIAN Я є свідком, о мій Боже, що Ти мене сотворив на те, щоб я пізнав(ла) Тебе і покланявся (лась) Тобі. Я свідчу в цій хвилині про мою слабість і Твою силу, про мою вбогість і Твоє багатство.

Нема іншого Бога, лише Ти, Помічник в нещастю, Самобутний.

WELSH (CYMRAEG) Tystiaf, O fy Nuw, mai Ti a'm creaist i'th adnabod ac i'th addoli. Tystiaf, y funud hon, i'm gwendid fy hun ac i'th nerth Dithau, i'm tlodi i ac i'th gyfoeth Di. Nid oes Dduw arall ond Tydi, y Cynorthwywr mewn perygl, yr Hunanfodolwr.

F. INVENTED LANGUAGES

ESPERANTO Mi atestas, ho Sinjoro, mia Dio, ke vi kreis min, por ke mi konu kaj adoru Vin. Mi atestas ĉimomente pri mia senforteco kaj pri Via Potenco, pri mia malriĉeco kaj pri Via Riĉeco.

Ne ekzistas alia Dio krom Vi, la Defendanto, la Mem-Ekzistanto.

INTERLINGUA Io testimonia, o mie Deo, que tu me ha create, pro Te cognoscer e adorar. Io testimonia in iste instante a mie debilitate e a Tie potentia, a mie paupertate e a Tie ricchessa. No existe áltere Deo salvo Tu, le adjutor en perículo, le in se mesmo-existente. [Page 541]Facsimile of the Short Obligatory Prayer in Braille (English), Grade II, courtesy of Bahá’í Service for the Blind, a committee of the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States.

Bahá’í literature display sponsored by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of Taiwan during a nation-wide book exhibition held from 17 December 1977 to 8 January 1978 at International House in Taipei. [Page 542]

8. MAJOR WORKS AND PARTIAL LIST OF LANGUAGES IN WHICH THEY ARE AVAILABLE

1 - Arabic 2-English 3- French 4- German 5 - Persian 6- Portuguese 7 - Spanish

A. WORKS OF BAHÁ’U’LLÁH

Epistle to the Son of the Wolf: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh (Compilation): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

The Hidden Words: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh (Compilation): 1, 2, 4, 5

The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh (Compilation): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

Kitáb-i-İqán (The Book of Certitude): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

The Seven Valleys and The Four Valleys: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

B. WORKS OF THE BÁB

Selections from the Writings of the Báb: 2, 6

C. WORKS OF ‘ABDU’L-BAHÁ

Foundations of World Unity: 2, 7

Paris Talks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

The Secret of Divine Civilization: 2, 3, 4, 5

Some Answered Questions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Tablet to the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, The Hague: 1, 2, 4, 5

Tablets of the Divine Plan: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

The Talks of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in America and Europe, vols. I, II: 1, 5

A Traveller’s Narrative: 1, 2, 5

Will and Testament: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Memorials of the Faithful: 2, 5

D. WORKS COMPILED FROM THE WRITINGS OF BAHÁ’U’LLÁH, THE BÁB AND ‘ABDU’L-BAHÁ

Bahá’í Prayers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

The Bahá’í Revelation: 2, 6

Bahá’í World Faith: 2, 3

The Divine Art of Living: 2, 3, 4, 7

A New Way of Life (What it means to be a Bahá’í Youth): 2, 6

The Pattern of Bahá’í Life: 2, 3, 4, 6

The Reality of Man: 2, 7

E. WORKS OF SHOGHI EFFENDI

The Advent of Divine Justice: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

The Dispensation of Bahá’u’lláh: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

God Passes By: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

The Promised Day is Come: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Some Compilations from his Writings

Bahá’í Holy Places at the World Centre: 2, 5

Principles of Bahá’í Administration: (U.K.): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 4 [Page 543]

9. A SELECTION OF INTRODUCTORY AND EXPOSITORY WORKS AND PARTIAL LIST OF LANGUAGES IN WHICH THEY ARE AVAILABLE

1 - Arabic 2-English 5 - Persian 3- French 4- German 6- Portuguese 7 - Spanish

A. GENERAL

BALYUZI, H. M. Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 6 Bahá’u’lláh: The King of Glory: 2 The Báb: 2 ‘Abdu’l-Bahá: 2 Muḥammad and the Course of Islám: 2 Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í Faith: 2

BLOMFIELD, LADY The Chosen Highway: 2

BRAUN, EUNICE From Strength to Strength: 2, 3, 7

BROWN, RAMONA ALLEN Memories of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá: 2

BRUGIROUX, ANDRÉ La terre n'est qu'un seul pays: 3

COBB, STANWOOD Security for a Failing World: 2, 3, 5, 6

COY, GENEVIEVE Counsels of Perfection: 2

ESSLEMONT, J. E. Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

FADL, MÍRZÁ ABU’L Bahá’í Proofs: 1, 2

FAIZI, GLORIA The Bahá’í Faith: 2, 4, 7 Fire on the Mountain Top: 2

FATHEAZAM, HUSHMAND The New Garden: 2, 3, 6, 7

FERRABY, JOHN All Things Made New (rev. ed.): 2

FOZDAR, JAMSHED Buddha Maitrya-Amitabha Has Appeared: 2

GAIL, MARZIEH Dawn Over Mt. Hira, and other essays: 2 The Sheltering Branch: 2

GIACHERY, UGO Shoghi Effendi-Recollections: 2

GROSSMANN, HERMANN Der Bahá’í und die Bahá’í-Gemeinschaft: 4

HOFMAN, DAVID Commentary on the Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá: 2 The Renewal of Civilization: 2, 3, 6, 7

HOLLEY, HORACE Religion for Mankind: 2

HUDDLESTON, JOHN The Earth is But One Country: 2

IVES, HOWARD COLBY Portals to Freedom: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

MARTINEZ, EMILIO EGEA La Gran Promesa: 7

MAXWELL, MAY An Early Pilgrimage: 2,7

MEHRABKHANI, R. Transcendencia del Kitab-i-İqán: 7 La Aurora del Dia Prometido: 7 Noches Navidenas: 7

MIGETTE, LUCIENNE Le Cycle de l'Unité: 3

MOFFETT, RUTH New Keys to the Book of Revelation: 2

NAKHJAVÁNÍ, BAHÍYYIH When We Grow Up: 2

NAKHJAVÁNÍ, VIOLETTE Amatu’l-Bahá Visits India: 2

PAVÓN, RAÚL La Voz de Dios: 7

RABBÁNÍ, RÚḤÍYYIH The Good Message: 2 Prescription for Living: 2, 4, 6, 7 The Priceless Pearl: 2, 3, 5, 7

ROST, H. T. D. The Brilliant Stars: 2

SABET, HUSCHMAND Der Gespaltene Himmel: 2, 4, 7

SCHAEFER, UDO Der Bahá’í in der modernen Welt: 4 The Light Shineth in Darkness: 2

SEARS, WILLIAM Release the Sun: 2, 6 [Page 544]Thief in the Night: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 The Wine of Astonishment: 2, 3 The Flame: 2 (with Robert Quigley) The Prisoner and the Kings: 2

SHOOK, GLENN THE BAHÁ’Í WORLD Mysticism, Science and Revelation: 2

TAHERZADETH, ADIB The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh, vol. I: 2; Vol. II: 2

TOWNSHEND, GEORGE Christ and Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 The Glad Tidings of Bahá’u’lláh: (A compilation of Bahá’í Writings with notes and introduction by George Townshend): 2 The Heart of the Gospel: 2, 3 The Mission of Bahá’u’lláh and Other Literary Pieces: 2, 7 The Promise of All Ages: 1, 2, 3

WARD, ALLAN L. 239 Days: 2

WHITE, ROGER Another Song, Another Season: 2

WHITEHEAD, O. Z. Some Early Bahá’ís of the West: 2

WOOLSON, GAYLE Divina Sinfonia: 2, 7 Rumbo Hacia el Futuro: 7

ZARANDÍ, NABÍL-I- The Dawn-Breakers (Translated by Shoghi Effendi): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

(Note: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts and National Spiritual Assemblies throughout the world constantly issue pamphlets and leaflets on various aspects of the Teachings.)

CHRISTIAN, ROBERTA K. A Bahá’í Child's ABC: 2, 3, 4

HOFMAN, DAVID

B. FOR CHILDREN

God and His Messengers: 2, 3, 4, 7

LEE, ANTHONY A. The Black Rose: 2 The Cornerstone: 2 The Proud Helper: 2 The Unfriendly Governor: 2

LINDSTROM, JANET The Kingdoms of God: 2, 3, 4

MEHRABI, JACQUELINE Stories for Children: 2, 3 Nine Holy Days: 2

MEYER, ZOE Stories from ‘The Dawn-Breakers’: 1, 2, 3, 4, 7

REED, BETTY Stories of Bahá’u’lláh as told by Pokka: 2

TRUE, MARGUERITE Living Today for Tomorrow's World: 2, 3 Bahá’í Prayers for Children (Compilation): 2, 4, 6, 7

WALCOTT, CYNTHIA K. The Gift: 2, 7 Compilation: O God Guide Me (Prayers): 2, 7 Let Thy Breeze Refresh Them: Prayers and Tablets for Children: 2 Prayers and Tablets for Children: 2, 4

C. PERIODICALS

Bahá’í Studies: Monograph Series: 2 Published by the Canadian Association for Studies on the Bahá’í Faith. Editorial Office: 224 Fourth Ave., Ottawa, Ontario K1S 2L8, Canada.

World Citizen (Youth Magazine): Published by the National Bahá’í Youth Committee of the United States. Editorial Office: 10110 Margate Drive Houston, Texas 77099 U.S.A.

Opinioni Bahá’í: Italian Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Italy. Editorial Office: c/o Centro Bahá’í, Via A Stoppani, 10, 00197 Roma, Italia

Child's Way: 2 Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States. Editorial Office: 6446 Ridge Lake Rd., Hixson, Tn.37343 U.S.A. [Page 545]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

Glory (Youth Magazine) Published by the National Bahá’í Youth Committee of India. Editorial Office: P.O. Box 19, Panchgani 412805, Maharashtra, India.

La Pensée Bahá’íe: 3 Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Switzerland. Editorial Office: P.O. Box 175, 1260 Nyon, Switzerland

World Order Magazine: 2 Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States. Editorial Office: 2011 Yale Station, New Haven, Connecticut 06520, U. S. A

(Note: There are, in addition, numbers of domestic organs, issued by National Spiritual Assemblies or their Committees, for use by the Bahá’í communities.)

D. INTERNATIONAL RECORD

The Bahá’í World, vols. I-XVII (1925-1979): 2

opinioni baha’i CHILD'S WAY JANUARY FEBRUARY 1976 BAHAT VIZIER World Onder Bach Family Rife UNA MAL ஐக்கிய நாடு இவ்வாண்டை குழந்தைகம் உண்ட ங்கடனப்படுத்தியுள்ளது புதிய ஒளி LORD La Pensée Bahale ஒவ்வொரு ந்தைக்கும் உரிமை உள்ளது

Some current Bahá’í periodicals. Clockwise, from bottom: Puthia Oli (Malaysia, in Tamil); Bahá’í Family Life (New Zealand); Bahá’í Vizier (Netherlands, in Dutch); Opinioni Bahá’í (Italy, in Italian); Child’s Way (United States); World Order (United States); Glory, Bahá’í Youth Magazine (India); La Pensée Bahá’íe (Switzerland, in French). [Page 546]

10. THE PUBLICATION AND DISSEMINATION OF BAHÁ’Í LITERATURE IN ENGLISH

WILLIAM P. COLLINS

I testify that no sooner had the First Word proceeded, through the potency of Thy will and purpose, out of His mouth... than the whole creation was revolutionized, and all that are in the heavens and all that are on earth were stirred to the depths. Through that Word the realities of all created things were shaken, were divided, separated, scattered, combined and reunited, disclosing in both the contingent world and the heavenly kingdom, entities of a new creation....

THE descent of the eternal Word of God, the Logos, and its expression in a perfect Being and a Revelation, are the central facts of each of the divinely-appointed religious Dispensations. Moses and the Torah, Krishna and the Gitā, Zoroaster and the Avesta, Jesus and the Gospels, Muḥammad and the Qur’án—these are the dual manifestations of God's timeless Utterance, inexorably wedded and intertwined. One is the living Mouthpiece of the divine will; the other, a perspicuous Book, a witness to all nations that God speaks and will not be silent. In our own time, the Creator has vouchsafed to the world a fresh measure of His inexhaustible Word through the Twin Messengers for this era of human history—the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh, and through the Scriptures revealed by Their untiring pens.

In conjunction with the manifestation of the Logos in the towering Figures of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh and in Their incomparable Writings, God has willed that His holy Speech be protected, preserved and interpreted. The strong and binding Covenant ordained by Bahá’u’lláh established ‘Abdu’l-Bahá as the Interpreter and Perfect Exemplar of Bahá’í Teachings. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá was followed by Shoghi Effendi, Guardian of the Cause of God. The continued expression of that part of God's good-pleasure not expressly recorded in the Bahá’í Holy Texts is assured by Bahá’u’lláh's pen through the powers granted to the Universal House of Justice to legislate upon all matters not dealt with in those Texts.

The Bahá’í religion has been founded upon nearly forty-six years of divine Revelation and sixty-five years of authentic interpretation of the God-given message. The Will of God for this age has been stated; it is the turn of humanity to respond. This blessed Word, through which ‘the whole creation was revolutionized’, must by its very nature exercise a transforming power over all mankind, individually and collectively. It is to this goal of bringing the healing Message of Bahá’u’lláh and the fruits of spiritual progress to every soul on the planet that Bahá’í publication is dedicated.

Bahá’u’lláh. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts, 1969), p. 295.

1. Early Bahá’í literature in England and America.

Although there existed hand-copied manuscripts in the original Persian and Arabic, and isolated publications in those languages were made in India during the late nineteenth century, the earliest established agencies for the official dissemination of Bahá’í literature were located in the West.

During the final decade of the nineteenth century, Edward Granville Browne, the British orientalist, published translations of two early Bábí-Bahá’í works—‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s A Traveller's Narrative Written to Illustrate the Episode of the Báb (Cambridge University Press, 1891) and Mírzá Husayn of Hamadán's Táríkh-i-Jadid (1893).

Dr. Ibrahim Khayru’lláh, a Syrian convert to the Bahá’í Faith, who settled in America in 1892, was the first Bahá’í to reach its shores and begin a systematic teaching of the precepts of the Faith. The first publication in the United States attempting to expound Bahá’í principles was Khayru’lláh's Za-ti-et Al-lah: the Identity and Personality of God (Chicago: Grant's Printery, 1896), later enlarged into a book entitled Bab-ed-din: the Door of True Religion... Revelation from the East (Chicago: Charles H. Kerr & Co., 1897). Although of interest as the first books by a Bahá’í in English, Khayru’lláh's works were by no means an [Page 547]authoritative statement of Bahá’í beliefs. It was rather through the prayers and Tablets received from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá that the early Western believers received their deepest education in the verities of the Bahá’í Cause. These few early believers exchanged typewritten copies of communications received from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, treasuring each new message as a special gift from their beloved Master. By 1900-1901 two major centres of Bahá’í publishing emerged the United States-New York and Chicago. The ‘Bahá’í Board of Counsel’ in New York, and the ‘Bahá’ís Supply and Publishing Board’ (later the Bahá’í Publishing Society’) in Chicago became the first official agencies for the publication and dissemination of literature about the new Revelation. The founding of these two publishing ventures, as well as support from individual Bahá’ís and commercial publishers in England, made it possible for English-speaking Bahá’ís to receive a greater measure of Bahá’u’lláh’s inspired Works. Within less than a decade, several basic Bahá’í Texts were available, including the Suratu’l-Haykal, The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, and the Kitáb-i-Iqán.

2. Talks and Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Pilgrim Reports

The first contingent of Western Bahá’í pilgrims to visit ‘Abdu’l-Bahá arrived in ‘Akká in 1898. From that time until the Ascension of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in 1921, a steady stream of pilgrims from the Occident attained His presence, some of whom later shared the experiences and impressions of the Master in published accounts. Among the most significant and moving is May Maxwell’s An Early Pilgrimage (Chicago: Bahá’í Publishing Society, 1917) which recounts the spirit of the original party of Western believers to reach the spiritual centre of their Faith. Thornton Chase’s In Galilee (1908), Helen S. Goodall and Ella G. Cooper’s Daily Lessons Received at ‘Akká (1908), Julia M. Grundy’s Ten Days in the Light of ‘Akká (1910), and Lady Blomfield’s The Chosen Highway (1940) also provided the early Bahá’ís with insight into the life of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá.

George Ronald, revised edition 1953; reprinted 1969 with new Foreword.

Most pilgrims’ notes record statements and talks by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Such records of the Master’s conversations, though edifying to the believers in that early period of the Faith’s development in the West, do not constitute authentic or exact reports of His words. A major exception to this, however, is Some Answered Questions, a book unique in the history of religions. It is a compilation of the responses given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to certain questions posed by Laura Clifford Barney during 1904-1906. The Master’s replies were recorded in Persian with the assistance of His secretaries, and were later reviewed, corrected and approved by Him. Some Answered Questions was translated by Laura Barney and published in London in 1908. The answers to Miss Barney’s questions, given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in His ‘tired moments’, contain a wealth of insight into the nature of God, the Manifestations and man; the powers of soul, mind and spirit; and various Christian doctrines.

In 1911-1912 the Master undertook His epic missionary tour of Europe and America. During that journey He gave dozens of talks in churches, universities and philosophical societies. Three major anthologies of His addresses appeared in the 1920s—The Wisdom of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá (now known as Paris Talks), ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in London, and The Promulgation of Universal Peace. These reveal the facility and power with which He spoke on a wide range of topics.

During the course of World War I, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá revealed a series of letters to the American Bahá’í community. These Tablets of the Divine Plan are the charter for the world-wide spread of the Bahá’í Faith under the mandate given to the Bahá’ís of North America. The international teaching plans launched under the aegis of the Guardian and the Universal House of Justice all derive their inspiration from the guidance given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in these Tablets.

As mentioned earlier, the Western Bahá’ís received their best knowledge of the Faith during the early twentieth century through letters from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. A large number of such letters to Spiritual Assemblies and individual believers was brought together and published in three volumes known as Tablets of Abdul Baha Abbas (Chicago: Bahá’í Publishing Society, 1909-1916). [Page 548]The Mysterious Forces of Civilization, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s appeal for the spiritual transformation of Persia’s people and government, was first published in 1918 in a translation by Yuhanná Dáwúd. In 1957 this remarkable treatise on true civilization was republished in a translation by Marzieh Gail entitled The Secret of Divine Civilization. Marzieh Gail, a distinguished and erudite Bahá’í, and an accomplished poet, essayist and translator, also supplied the Bahá’ís with a touching rendition into English of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s Memorials of the Faithful (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1971). It is a compendium of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s memories of more than seventy of the early believers.

The Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá is the crowning touch to His many years of guidance to the Bahá’í world. Though a short document, Shoghi Effendi describes the Will as ‘supplementary’ to the Kitáb-i-Aqdas, and ‘the Charter of a future world civilization’. In it, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá establishes the Guardianship, the Hands of the Cause of God, the National or Secondary House of Justice, the principles of Bahá’í administration, and defines the method of election of the Universal House of Justice.

3. Writings and Translations of Shoghi Effendi

Shoghi Effendi, the Guardian of the Bahá’í Faith from 1921 to 1957, was a master of the English language, with which he sought to interpret for the West, in luminous prose, the basic truths and social programme of the Bahá’í movement. In a succession of cogent letters, Shoghi Effendi expanded the vision of the believers and clearly defined for them the nature of their weighty responsibilities under ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s divine plan.

Shoghi Effendi’s early letters to the western Bahá’ís awakened them to the newly-emerging administrative institutions of the Faith. In 1928, a collection of the Guardian’s letters was published in the United States under the title Bahá’í Administration. The series of letters penned by the Guardian between 1929 and 1936, published separately, and then collectively under the title of The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, provide a treatise on the processes shaping the Bahá’í community, a mandate for the role of the American believers in raising Bahá’u’lláh’s World Commonwealth, and a vision of that Golden Age of the Bahá’í Revelation destined to emerge from its chrysalis in the fullness of time. The Advent of Divine Justice (1939) and The Promised Day Is Come (1941) define the spiritual prerequisites for the American Bahá’í community in the prosecution of its tasks, and describe the significance of world-wide cataclysms and wars for the building up of the new World Order proclaimed by Bahá’u’lláh. Other compilations of the Guardian’s letters have been made under the titles of Messages to America 1932-1946, Citadel of Faith, Messages to the Bahá’í World, Messages to Canada, Messages to Australia and New Zealand, and High Endeavors: Messages to Alaska.

In addition to Shoghi Effendi’s analysis of the world situation, his contributions to Bahá’í historical scholarship are astounding. The only actual book the Guardian wrote was God Passes By, the history of the first century of the Faith. It is such a distillation of Bahá’í history—both factual and interpretative—that hundreds of other historical works may be inspired by it in the future. Furthermore, Shoghi Effendi edited, translated, and supplemented the first part of Nabíl’s narrative The Dawn-Breakers, one of the most important and meticulously-recorded sources on the time of the Báb.

Shoghi Effendi’s major contribution to Bahá’í literature, and the greatest testimony to his brilliant knowledge of Arabic, Persian and English, are his unequalled renditions of Bahá’u’lláh’s Writings into English. Between his accession to the Guardianship in 1921 and the beginning of World War II Shoghi Effendi translated The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, The Kitáb-i-Iqán, and The Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, and compiled Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh and Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh. The translations of Shoghi Effendi are not only models of beauty, but also provide a standard with which subsequent translations of Bahá’í Scriptures in English can be compared.

4. Introductory Texts

A number of Bahá’í authors have given a systematic exposition of the history and fun-

’At time of writing the National Spiritual Assembly of the United Kingdom has in preparation a compilation entitled The Unfolding Destiny of the British Bahá’í Community. A full list of compilations appears on page 488. [Page 549]damental precepts of the Bahá’í Revelation.

The most outstanding example is John E. Esslemont in his Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, first published in 1923 in Great Britain. This book had, by 1944, been published in thirty-seven languages, and is now available in dozens more in its fourth revised edition. Its enduring value as the major introductory Bahá’í textbook and its place in the vanguard of Bahá’í literature, is attested by Shoghi Effendi in his message at the time of Esslemont’s death: 'His book, however an abiding monument to his pure intention-will, alone, inspire generations yet unborn to tread the path of truth and service as steadfastly and unostentatiously as was trodden by its beloved author."

The foremost expounder of Bahá’u’lláh’s teachings to the Christian world was George Townshend, sometime Canon of St. Patrick’s Cathedral Dublin, and Archdeacon of Clonfert. His introduction to God Passes By, and his three volumes—The Promise of All Ages, The Heart of the Gospel, and Christ and Bahá’u’lláh are an abiding witness to the power of the eternal Word, as revealed in Bahá’u’lláh, to seize upon the heart of this ecclesiastical figure and enable him to use his extraordinary powers of expression in the advancement of God’s Cause.

Since its appearance in 1957 John Ferraby’s All Things Made New has established itself as another classic of Bahá’í expository writing. Unlike Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, this work gives a lengthier and more comprehensive picture of the history of the Faith and its Administrative Order, while preserving a universal and timeless appeal. A revised edition with updated information was published by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of the United Kingdom in 1975.

Those who, for various reasons, may find the aforementioned introductory texts too difficult or lengthy to read, have three other works on the Bahá’í teachings which they may consult. Rúbiyyih Rabbani’s Prescription for Living, Hushmand Fathea’zam’s The New Garden and Gloria Faizi’s The Bahá’í Faith: an Introduction are relatively short and simplified accounts of the Bahá’í teachings and have been translated into many languages.

Shoghi Effendi. Bahá’í Administration. (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts, 1968), p. 97.

5. Children’s Literature

In the Five Year Plan, specific goals were set for activities relating to children. Several of the earliest attempts to produce quality Bahá’í children’s books were made in the 1950s and 1960s: Janet Lindstrom’s The Kingdoms of God, David Hofman’s God and His Messengers and Zoe Meyer’s Stories from the Dawn-Breakers deal with the realms of existence, progressive revelation, and Bábí saints and martyrs. Children’s prayer books have been published to introduce young Bahá’ís to the Sacred Texts of their Faith; colouring books, puzzles and games have been developed; and several books, including the very successful The Gift by Cynthia Walcott, have been published along with cassette narration of the stories.

6. Scholarly Works, Biographies, Translations

From the time of the appearance of Mirzá Abu’l-Faḍl’s Hujaju’l-Beheyyeh: The Behai Proofs in 1902, until recently, scholarly Bahá’í books have appeared at irregular intervals. In the current decade, however, the results of much fine scholarly research have been published. The British publisher, George Ronald, has been a major source of this type of work. Particularly noteworthy has been the prodigious output of H. M. Balyuzi, whose Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í Faith (1970) and Muḥammad and the Course of Islám (1976) have provided a wealth of historical material and analysis on topics of Bahá’í interest. Mr. Balyuzi is currently working on the final parts of his trilogy on the Central Figures of the Bahá’í Faith. His The Báb: The Herald of the Day of Days and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá: the Centre of the Covenant of Bahá’u’lláh have already appeared, and in a short time his final work on the life of Bahá’u’lláh is expected to be completed.

Rúhíyyih Rabbani’s The Priceless Pearl (London: Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1969) and Ugo Giachery’s Shoghi Effendi: Recollections (Oxford: George Ronald, 1973) have afforded the English-speaking Bahá’ís the first coherent tableau of their Guardian and the many aspects of his dynamic personality.

Adib Taherzadeh, a member of the Continental Board of Counsellors for Europe, has [Page 550]embarked on a four-volume survey of the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh and some of the events associated with their revelation. Two volumes of The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh appeared in 1974 and 1977, covering the Baghdad and Adrianople periods respectively, and unveiling to the Western believers a glimmer of the scope and magnitude of Bahá’u’lláh’s abundant outpouring of divine Utterance.

One of the goals of the Five Year Plan was to ‘cultivate opportunities for courses on the Faith in Canadian institutions of higher learning’. This goal led to the establishment of the Canadian Association for Studies on the Bahá’í Faith, which has produced three issues of its journal Bahá’í Studies, and is engaged in the preparation of French and English editions of a textbook on the Bahá’í Faith to be used in comparative religion courses throughout Canada.

A report of its activites in the period 1975-1979 appears on p. 197.

Jamshed Fozdar has been the Bahá’í Faith’s foremost scholar on Buddhism. After finishing a book on the concept of God in Buddhism (The God of Buddha. New York: Asia Publishing House, 1973), he embarked on his monumental and important work to interpret Buddhism and the Bahá’í Faith to each other. Buddha Maitrya-Amitabha Has Appeared was published in 1976 by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of India. Its scope reflects a thorough knowledge of Hinduism, Buddhism and the Bahá’í Faith, which Mr. Fozdar compares and relates doctrine for doctrine.

One of the Bahá’í Faith’s most talented writers and essayists was Horace Holley, a Hand of the Cause and for many years secretary of the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States. Among his writings are The Modern Social Religion (London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1913), Bahá’í, the Spirit of the Age (New York: Brentano, 1921), and a selection of essays, Religion for Mankind (George Ronald, 1956).

There have also been several translations into English of scholarly Bahá’í works originally published in other languages. The Heavens Are Cleft Asunder by Huschmand Sabet reached high into theological circles in Germany under its original title Der Gespaltene Himmel where it provoked much discussion of the significance of Bahá’u’lláh’s claims for the Christian church. The Light Shineth In Darkness is a collection of essays by Udo Schaefer on the Bahá’í Faith and Islám, and on refutations of orthodox Christian criticisms of the Bahá’í Faith.

7. Periodicals

The first Bahá’í magazine in English was Star of the West, issued in Chicago from 1910 through 1935. In its presentation of first-hand reports about people and events connected with the early development of the Faith, it is an unparalleled source of historical information. Of special importance was its publication of Tablets from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá and its coverage of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s trip to Europe and America.

The first fourteen years of this periodical were reprinted in 1978 by George Ronald publisher. In Australia, Herald of the South published news of Australasia’s Bahá’ís between 1926 and 1960, and in a new series in 1965-1970 and 1974-1975. World Order magazine, the successor to Star of the West, was published in the period 1935-1949 and in a new series since 1966. It publishes essays on Bahá’í philosophy and beliefs in their relation to contemporary problems. Several other magazines under Bahá’í auspices are directed to specific audiences, such as Child’s Way from the United States and Glory: Bahá’í Youth Magazine from India. Some 130 National Spiritual Assemblies now exist, each of which publishes its own internal newsletter; a large number of these is in English.

8. The Bahá’í World

No discussion of Bahá’í literature in English would be complete without mention of the multi-volume survey of the activities of the international Bahá’í community, The Bahá’í World. Now in its seventeenth volume, and spanning over half a century, it is a source book for information on current activities, growth and development of the Bahá’í administrative order, biographies of deceased Bahá’ís, poetry and articles. The contents of this one publication bear witness that the Bahá’í Faith is a well-established, international and independent religion, steadily growing and developing new institutions and powers.

Published in its first year under the title Bahá’í News. [Page 551]

Bahá’í Bibliography

Examples of Bahá’í literature in English. Clockwise from bottom: Star of the West, Reprint (1978); God's Heroes by Laura Barney (1910); The Priceless Pearl by Rúhíyyih Rabbani (1969); Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era by J. E. Esslemont (1923); The Dawn-breakers by Nabíl (1976 printing); The Mysterious Forces of Civilization by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá (1918); The Book of Ighan by Bahá’u’lláh (1915); God Passes By by Shoghi Effendi (1965 printing); Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, 2nd rev. ed. (1976).

Audio-Visual Materials

Technological innovations in the twentieth century have led the Bahá’ís to develop a fascinating array of films, filmstrips, slides, cassette tapes, posters and exhibit materials. The official impetus for the full-scale production of such materials came from the Universal House of Justice in 1967 with the establishment of the International Bahá’í Audio-Visual Centre in Victor, New York, U.S.A. The Bahá’í Publishing Trust of the United States also became an important source of audio-visual production.

Since the midpoint of the last decade, over two dozen filmstrip programmes have been produced on such topics as Bahá’í history, administration, general introductions to the Faith, and international Bahá’í conferences. The production and broadcasting of a general film on the Bahá’í Faith, And His Name Shall Be One, by the American television network C.B.S., sparked the making of films among the Bahá’ís. A New Wind by the Canadian documentary film producer George C. Stoney, was commissioned by the National Spiritual Assembly of the United States to show the world-wide diversity of the Bahá’í community. A number of Bahá’í film companies have since produced a diverse selection of films featuring youth conferences, interviews with Hands of the Cause of God, and dedications of Bahá’í Houses of Worship. Perhaps the most ambitious was the two-hour film of The Green Light Expedition. It is a priceless glimpse into the spiritually-rich lives of South American Indians, accompanied by Rúbíyyih Khánum's characteristic insights into the meaning of pioneering.

The Bahá’t World, vol. XIV, 1963-1968, pp. 91-92.

The Bahá’í World, vol. XVI, 1973-1976. pp. 419-448. [Page 552]

10. Sources of Publications

Of the sources of Bahá’í publications in English, the New York Bahá’í Board of Counsel and Chicago's Bahá’í Publishing Society have already been mentioned. Since the time of the establishment of these two publishing institutions in 1900, the Bahá’í world has expanded to such a degree that there are now over twenty Bahá’í Publishing Trusts. A significant number of these publish in English, including the United Kingdom, Australia, the United States and India. Even the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of Japan has issued landmark Bahá’í books in English. Of the 130 National Spiritual Assemblies and their subordinate committees, nearly all issue publications in various formats; many of them are in English. Not only are Bahá’í works issued by Publishing Trusts and National Assemblies, but one other publisher, George Ronald in England, has issued only Bahá’í books in the past few years. The Bahá’í World Centre has also produced a series of outstanding publications: The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, Bahá’í Holy Places at the World Centre, The Constitution of the Universal House of Justice, A Synopsis and Codification of the Laws and Ordinances of the Kitáb-i-Aqdas, and the three compilations of Scripture called for in the Five Year Plan.

See section 11 of this article.

11. The Five Year Plan and Publishing in English

As in previous international teaching plans of the Guardian and the Universal House of Justice, the Five Year Plan had a sizeable number of goals devoted to the production and dissemination of literature in many languages. Seven new Publishing Trusts were called for; Bahá’í literature has been translated into many new languages, and enriched in many more, including English.

The major Five Year Plan goal for publication of Bahá’í literature in English was assigned by the Universal House of Justice to the Bahá’í World Centre. The goal—to publish three compilations of Sacred Scripture—significantly increased the range of Bahá’í Holy Writings in English. In 1976 the first of

Bahá’í literature display featuring literature produced by Editora Bahá’í Brasil exhibited during the annual Street Book Fair held in Belo Horizonte, Brazil; October 1977. [Page 553]the three volumes, Selections from the Writings of the Báb, appeared, releasing for the first time to the Bahá’ís of the West the mighty torrent of the Báb’s utterance. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh Revealed After the Kitáb-i-Aqdas was released approximately eighteen months later. Included in this anthology were retranslations of several Tablets which had been translated in the days of the Master, as well as much material previously unavailable in English. In late 1978, Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá completed the trilogy of newly-translated Sacred Texts. The dynamic spirit infused into the Bahá’í community by the appearance of these volumes has contributed significantly to the stimulation of the herculean efforts exerted to achieve the assigned tasks of the Five Year Plan.

A supplementary achievement of the World Centre was the publication in 1977 of excerpts from various letters of the Guardian under the title Call to the Nations. Extracts from the four books just named appear elsewhere in this volume.

At the request of the Universal House of Justice, the Research Department of the World Centre has from time to time compiled appropriate passages from the Bahá’í Writings on various subjects. These compilations have brought together previously-translated and newly-translated excerpts from the corpus of Bahá’í Scripture and interpretation on such topics as teaching, education, youth, children, opposition to the Faith, and consultation.

This review has not attempted to give a definitive survey of Bahá’í literature in English; it has, rather, indicated the broad categories of Bahá’í publication. Nevertheless, the importance of the publication and dissemination of Bahá’í literature in English cannot be over-emphasized. Not only is English a language rich in expression, but it is currently one of the most widely spoken. It is also the tongue in which a significant portion of Shoghi Effendi’s writing was composed, and the language into which his authentic translations of Bahá’u’lláh’s Writings were made. It is not from the original Persian and Arabic, but rather from the authorized English editions of Bahá’í Holy Texts, that nearly all translations into other languages of the West are made.

The Word of God for this era of the earth’s spiritual history has appeared as the sun in the East in exalted verses of Arabic and Persian; it has been focused clearly and unambiguously for the West in unmatched English prose, from which, as light through a prism, its rich texture and colour reach the whole of mankind in a myriad tongues. [Page 554]

A. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF BAHÁ’Í BOOKS AND BOOKLETS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE

Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader

(i) THE WRITINGS OF BAHÁ’U’LLÁH

Abbreviations NSA—National Spiritual Assembly LSA—Local Spiritual Assembly BPS—Bahá’í Publishing Society (1902–1922) BPT—Bahá’í Publishing Trust BPC—Bahá’í Publishing Committee

1. Blessed is the Spot. n.p. n.d. National Teaching Committee. paper.

2. Book of Assurance, The. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. New York: Brentano’s, (1924). New York: BPC, 1929. cloth.

3. Book of Ighan, The. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. New York: George V. Blackburne Co., 1904. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and 1915. cloth.

4. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf. trans. Julie Chanler. New York: BPC, 1928. parchment on hard cover.

5. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf. trans. Shoghi Effendi. Wilmette: BPC, 1941 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1962, 1969, 1970, 1971 and 1976. cloth.

6. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. comp. and trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1946, 1948, 1951 and 1952. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1963, 1969 and 1976. London: BPT, 1946 and 1978. paper, fabrikoid and cloth.

7. Hidden Words. trans. Shoghi Effendi. London: 1923. New York: 1924, 1925 and 1929. paper and leather.

8. Hidden Words, The. trans. Ameen ‘Ullah Fareed. Chicago: BPS, 1905, 1914 and undated. London: The Unity Press, 1911. paper and leather.

9. Hidden Words, The. (Persian section only) Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, Press of the Hollister Bros. n.d. paper.

10. Hidden Words, The. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1932, 1939 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1952 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1971 and 1975. London: BPT, 1944, 1949, 1966 and 1975. New Delhi: BPT, 1964 and 1973. paper and cloth.

11. Hidden Words from the Arabic, The. London: Kenneth Mackenzie, 1915. paper.

12. Hidden Words from the Arabic, The. foreword by Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, Mayle’s Penny Series, 1908. paper.

13. Hidden Words from the Persian—Revealed by the Blessed Perfection. New York: The Board of Counsel. paper.

14. Hidden Words—The Seven Valleys. two works bound together, the first work has no mention of translator (Fareed), the second was translated by Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, n.d. leather.

15. Hidden Words Translated from the Persian, The. trans. Antun F. Haddad. n.p. n.d. paper.

16. Kitáb-El-Ah’d—The Book of the Covenant, The Will and Testament of the Baha’o’llah. Chicago: BPS, 1913. paper.

17. Kitab-i-İqán—The Book of Certitude, The. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1931 and 1937. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1950 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1960 (this edition has two varieties of dust jacket: the first states erroneously that the Iqán was revealed in 1858 while the latter correctly gives the date 1862), 1970 and 1974. London: BPT, 1946 and 1961. cloth. [Page 555]18. Lawh-El-Akdas-The Holy Tablet Revealed by the Blessed Perfection (Baha Ullah) at Baghdad. Stuttgart, Germany: Dr. Edwin Fisher, Stitzenburgstrasse, 1907. Chicago: BPS, 1913. also n.p. n.d. paper.

19. Mission of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Wilmette: BPT, 1952 and 1971. paper.

20. Prayers and Meditations. comp. and trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1938. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1962, 1969 and 1974. London: BPT, 1978. fabrikoid and cloth.

21. Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1967 and 1972. paper and cloth.

22. Selected Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. Wilmette: BPT, 1972 and 1975. paper.

23. Selections from the Hidden Words of Baha’o’llah. Chicago: BPS, n.d. paper.

24. Seven Valleys, The. trans. Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, 1906 and n.d. paper and leather.

25. Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, The. trans. Ali Quli Khan. New York: BPC, 1936 and 1937. paper and fabrikoid.

26. Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, The. trans. Ali Quli Khan and Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPC, 1945, 1948, 1952 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 19??, 1967, 1968 and 1975. paper and cloth.

27. Source of Spiritual Qualities, The. New York: BPC, 1924. paper

28. Suratu’l-Hykl-Sura of the Temple. Chicago: The Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1900. paper.

29. Synopsis and Codification of the Kitab-i-Aqdas, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1973. cloth.

30. Tablet of Ishrakat. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper.

31. Tablet of Tarazat, Tablet of the World, Words of Paradise, Tablet of Tajalleyat, The Glad Tidings Revealed by Bahá’u’lláh at Acca. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1906 and 1913. cardboard.

32. Tablet of the Branch, The. n.p. n.d. (New York: December, 1912). paper.

33. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1917, cloth.

34. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh Revealed after the Kitáb-i-Aqdas. comp. the Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. Habib Taherzadeh. Haifa: Baha’i World Centre, 1978. cloth.

35. Three Obligatory Prayers. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1937. paper.

36. Three Tablets of Baha’o’llah. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1918. paper.

37. Tokens from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. comp. Jay and Constance Conrader. Wilmette: BPT, 1973 and 1975. paper and cloth.

(ii) THE WRITINGS OF THE BÁB

1. Báb’s Instructions to the Letters of the Living, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944 also n.p. n.d. paper.

2. Selections from the Writings of the Báb. comp. Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. Habib Taherzadeh. Haifa: Baha’i World Centre, 1976. cloth.

(iii) THE WRITINGS OF ABDU’L-BAHÁ

1. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in Canada. comp. NSA of Canada. 1962. paper.

2. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in Edinburgh. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: 1963. paper.

3. Abdul-Baha in London. comp. Eric Hammond. London: Longmans Green & Co., 1912. East Sheen, Eng.: The Unity Press, 1912. Chicago: BPS, 1921. paper.

4. Abdul Baha in New York. comp. LSA of New York City. New York: 1922. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.

5. Abdul Baha on Divine Philosophy. comp. Isabel Fraser Chamberlain. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916 and 1918. paper. see #6.

6. Abdul Baha on Divine Philosophy. comp. [Page 556]Soraya Chamberlain. New York: BPC, (1928). paper. see #5.

7. America’s Spiritual Mission. (trans. Ahmad Sohrab). New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. paper. see #58 and 68.

8. Bahá’í Peace Program, The. New York: BPC, 1930. paper and fabrikoid.

9. Christians, Jews and Muhammadans. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper

10. Christ’s Promise Fulfilled. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1959, 1970, 1975 and 1978. paper.

11. Compilation of Utterances from the Pen of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá Regarding His Station. n.p. November 26, 1906. paper.

12. Definition of Love by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. New York: December 7, 1902. paper.

13. Divine Art of Living, The. comp. Mary M. Rabb. All but first two #s of Star of the West dealing with Rabb’s compilation bound in leather. Chicago: Bahá’í News Service, 1924.

14. Divine Art of Living, The. comp. Mary M. Rabb. New York: Brentano’s, 1926. paper and cloth.

15. Divine Common Sense from the World’s Greatest Prisoner to His Prison Friends. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916. paper see #20.

16. Faith for Every Man. London: BPT, 1972. paper.

17. Foundations of World Unity. comp. Horace Holley. New York: World Unity Publishing Corp., 1927. New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. Wilmette: BPT, 1955, 1968 and 1971. paper and cloth.

18. From Abbas Effendi to a Lady who visited Acre in Feb., 1906. Edinburgh: T & A Constable, 1907. paper. see #19.

19. From ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to a Lady who Visited Acre in February, 1906. trans. Monever Khanum. London: The Unity Press, 1907. paper.

20. From the World’s Greatest Prisoner to His Prison Friends. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1921. paper. see #15.

21. Garden of the Heart, The. comp. Frances Esty. East Aurora, New York: The Roycroft Press, 1930. fine cloth.

22. He Is God. Chicago: BPS, 1913. paper.

23. Industrial Justice. New York: BPC, 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1941 and 1946. paper.

24. Japan Will Turn Ablaze. Japan: BPT, 1974. cloth.

25. Letter and Tablet from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, The Hague. Chicago: BPS, 1920. paper.

26. Letter from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas to the Friends in Persia. trans. Ameen ‘Ullah Fareed. Chicago: BPS, Jan. 21, 1906. paper.

27. Letter from St. Jean d’Acre. London: The Bahá’í Press, 1906. paper.

28. Letter of ‘Love’ from ‘ABDU’L-BAHÁ ABBAS to the ‘beloved’ in America, Received by Mr. George E. Witte at New York, December 7, 1902. Chicago: BPS, 1902. paper.

29. Letters to the Friends in Persia. Chicago: BPS, 1906. paper.

30. Life Eternal. comp. Mary Rumsey Movius. East Aurora, N.Y.: The Roycroft Shops, 1936 and 1937. fine cloth.

31. Memorials of the Faithful. trans. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1971. cloth.

32. Messages from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to the Honolulu Bahá’ís. Honolulu: Advance Press, 1924. Honolulu: NSA of the Hawaiian Islands.

33. Mysterious Forces of Civilization, The. trans. Johanna Dawud. London: Cope & Fenwick, 1910. Chicago: BPS, 1910 and 1918. cloth.

34. Mystery of God, The. comp. Mrs. Iran F. Muhajer. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. cloth and leather.

35. Paris Talks. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield, and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. London: BPT, 1951, 1961, 1969, 1971 and 1972. paper and cloth. (see #63 and 73 of this section).

36. Prayers and Tablets—‘Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas. n.p. 1906. paper.

37. Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. Vol. I. (comp. Howard MacNutt). Chicago: BPC, 1922. (New York): BPC, 1922 (actually 1925). cloth.

38. Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. Vol. II. (comp. Howard MacNutt). New York: BPC, 1925. cloth.

39. Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. combined edition. (comp. Howard MacNutt). (New York): BPC, 1922 (1939). [Page 557]Wilmette: BPC, 1943. cloth.

40. Reality of Religion-Tablet of Abdul Baha, The. New York: BPC, 1924. paper. (see #41).

41. Reality of Religion-Words of Abdul Baha, The. New York: BPC, 1924, paper. (see #40).

42. Secret of Divine Civilization, The. trans. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1970 and 1975. cloth.

43. Selected Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper.

44. Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. comp. the Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. by a Committee at the Bahá’í World Centre and Marzieh Gail. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1978. cloth.

45. Some Answered Questions, comp. Laura Clifford Barney. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1908. Chicago: BPS, 1918. New York: BPC, 1930 and 1937. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1947 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1964, 1968 and 1971. London: BPT, New Delhi: BPT, 1973. cloth.

46. Some Christian Subjects. London: BPT, 1946. paper.

47. Tablet to the Beloved of God in America. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Cambridge, Mass.: 1906. paper.

48. Tablet to the Beloved of God of the Occident. trans. Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab). Chicago: BPS, 1906. paper.

49. Tablet to the Hague. London: BPT, n.d. paper.

50. Tablets Communes and Holy Utterances. n.p. (1897). paper.

51. Tablets Containing General Instructions. trans. M. A. E. (Mirza Ahmad Esphahani Sohrab). Washington: Bahai Assn. of Washington, D.C., 1907. paper.

52. Tablets Containing Instructions. trans. Mirza Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab) and Ali Kuli Khan. Washington: Bahai Assn. of Washington, D.C., 1906. paper.

53. Tablets from Abdul Baha to E. E. Wrestling Brewster. Chicago: BPS, 1902. paper.

54. Tablets of Abdul Baha Abbas. Vol. I. (comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1909, 1912 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.

55. Tablets of Abdul Baha Abbas. Vol. II. (comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1915 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1940. cloth.

56. Tablets of Abdul Baha Abbas. Vol. III. (comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1916 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.

57. Tablets of Abdul Beha Abbas to Some American Believers in the Year 1900. New York: Board of Counsel, 707-708 Carnegie Hall, April, 1901. paper.

58. Tablets of the Divine Plan, The. (trans. Ahmad Sohrab). Wilmette: BPT, 1959, 1962, 1965 and 1971. (see also #7,59 and 68). paper.

59. Tablets of the Divine Plan, The. trans. various scholars. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. cloth. (see also #7, 58 and 68).

60. Tablets Revealed by Abdul Baha Abbas to the East and the West. trans. Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab). Washington: Bahai Assembly of Washington, D.C., 1908. paper.

61. Tablets Revealed by the Master Abdul Beha Abbas to the House of Justice at Chicago, to the Ladies’ Assembly of Teaching, to Mirza Assad ‘Ullah and to Other Individuals, also One to the Believers in Persia. Chicago: Press of the Hollister Bros., 1901. paper.

62. Tablets to Japan. (comp. Agnes Alexander). New York: BPC, 1928. paper.

63. Talks by Abdul Baha Given in Paris. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield, and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. London, East Sheen: The Unity Press, 1912. Chicago: BPS, 1912. London: G. Bell and Sons, Ltd., 1915, 1916 and 1920. paper. (see also #35 and 73).

64. Traveller’s Narrative Written to Illustrate the Episode of the Bab, A. trans. Edward Granville Browne. London: Cambridge University Press, 1891 (this edition issued in two volumes of which the first is the Persian text). New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.

65. True Belief-Abdul Baha Abbas. n.p.n.d. paper.

66. True Gardener, A Talk Given by Abdul Baha, The. comp. L.A.C.B. Rangoon, Burma: Rangoon Standard Press, 1903. London: The Unity Press, n.d. paper. [Page 558]67. Twelve Basic Teachings Compiled from the Words of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. New York: 1926. paper. 68. Unveiling of the Divine Plan, The. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. New York: 1919. paper. see #7 and 58. 69. Utterances of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas to Two Young Men, American Pilgrims to Acre, 1901. New York: Board of Counsel, 1901. paper. 70. Visiting Tablets for Our Recent Martyrs Who Suffered in Persia in 1901 with some Tablets and Prayers for the American Bahá’ís. New York: Bahá’ís Board of Counsel, 1902. paper. 71. Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada, 1942. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. Wilmette: BPT, 1968, 1971 and n.d. London: BPT, 1950. paper. 72. Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Selections from the. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1944 and 1948. paper. 73. Wisdom of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, The. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. New York: BPC, 1924. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. cardboard and cloth. see #35 and 63. 74. Wisdom Talks of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá (Abbas Effendi) at Chicago, Illinois, April 30th to May 5th, 1912. Chicago: Press of Bahá’í News Service, n.d. paper. 75. Woman's Great Station in the Bahá’í Dispensation. n.p. 1913. paper. 76. World Order Through World Faith. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper.

(iv) WORKS COMPILED FROM THE WRITINGS OF BAHÁ’U’LLÁH AND ‘ABDU’L-BAHÁ

1. Arise and Serve: A Compilation. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. paper and cloth. 2. Bahá’í Answers: A Compilation. comp. Olivia Kelsey. Independence, Mo.: Lambert Moon Printers and Publishers, 1947 and 1947 rev. cardboard and cloth. 3. Bahá’í Community, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1947 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1963. New Delhi: BPT, 1964. paper. 4. Bahá’í Education: A Compilation. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper. 5. Bahá’í Institutions: A Compilation. New Delhi: BPT, 1973. paper. 6. Bahá’í Meetings, The Nineteen Day Feast. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. paper. 7. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1929 and 1929 (1936 with newer translations). cloth. 8. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1937. paper. 9. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1942, 1944, 1945, 1947, 1949 and 1952. paper and cloth. 10. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1957, 1962, 1967, 1969 1970, 1973, 1975 and 1978. cloth and paper. 11. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT 1954 and 1970. cloth. (the 'White' Prayer book which includes only the first section of # 10). 12. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of Malaysia. (Kuala Lumpur): BPT, 1970. paper. 13. Bahá’í Prayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: 1951. cloth. 14. Bahá’í Prayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1945 and 1951. cloth. (this edition contains only the first section of #13). 15. Bahá’í Prayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1967 and 1975. cloth. 16. Bahá’í Prayers and Meditations-The Báb, Bahá’u’lláh, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. paper. (contains two pictures of the Louhelen. Bahá’í School). n.p. n.d. 17. Bahá’í Prayers: An Introductory Selection. comp. NSA of Malaysia. (Kuala Lumpur): BPT, 1973. paper. 18 Bahá’í Prayers for Special Occasions. London: BPT, 1945. cloth. 19. Bahá’í Revelation. comp. NSA of the Brit- [Page 559]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

ish Isles. London: BPT, 1955 and 1970. cloth.

20. Bahá’í Scriptures. comp. Horace Holley. New York: Brentano’s, 1923. New York: BPC, 1928. cloth.

21. Bahá’í World Faith. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1943 (the second 1943 edition was bound in red leather and inscribed in gold 1844-1944 as a special centennial souvenir-only 500 copies). Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1966, 1969, 1971 and 1976. cloth, fabrikoid and leather.

22. Bahá’í Writings. (comp. Amelia Collings and Alice S. Cox). Wilmette: BPC, 1942 and 1947. paper and cloth.

23. Book of Prayers. n.p. n.d. paper and leather.

24. Chalice of Immortality, The. comp. Hushidar Mutlagh. New Delhi: BPT, (1979).

25. Communion With God. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. ten subsequent printings. paper.

26. Compilation No. 9 Concerning the Most Great Peace. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1918. paper.

27. Compilation of the Holy Utterances of Baha’o’llah and Abdul Baha Concerning the Most Great Peace, War and Duty of the Bahais Toward Their Government. n.p. 1918 and 1918 rev. paper.

28. Covenant of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Manchester, Eng.: BPT, 1950. London: BPT, 1963. cloth and fabrikoid.

29. Daily Prayers-Bahá’u’lláh, Báb, ‘Abdu’l- Bahá. New York: BPC, n.d. paper.

30. Daily Prayers-Prayers and Meditations. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.

31. Dawn of World Civilization, The. n.p. World Order Magazine, 1945.

32. Divine Art of living, The. comp. Mabel Hyde Paine. Wilmette: BPC, 1944, 1946, 1949 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1960, 1965, 1970, 1972, 1973 and 1974. cloth and fabrikoid.

33. Divine Pearls. comp. Victoria Bedikian. n.p. n.d. paper.

34. Divine Wisdom of Bahá’u’lláh and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. comp. NSA of the British Isles. Manchester: BPT, 1946. paper.

35. Glad Tidings of Bahá’u’lláh, The. comp. George Townshend. London: John Murray, Wisdom of the East Series, 1949 and 1956. Oxford: George Ronald, 1975. paper and cloth.

36. God and His Manifestations. comp. Maye Harvey Gift. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.

37. Holy Utterances Revealed by Baha’ Ullah and the Master, Abdul Baha Regarding the Necessity for Steadfastness and Effort in the Present Time, That Thereby the Believers May Be Strengthened and Made Ready Under All Conditions, to Stand Firm in the Covenant. Compiled 1905. n.p. paper.

38. Individual and Teaching, Raising the Divine Call, The. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper.

39. Life After Death. comp. Barbara Mason. Honolulu: Hawaii Bahá’í Press, 1976. paper.

40. Mighty River, A. comp. Audrie Reynolds. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper.

41. New Day: Prophecies and Precepts from the Utterances of Baha’o’llah and Abdul Baha. comp. Isabel F. Chamberlain. New York: The Fellowship Press Service, 191-. paper.

42. Pattern of Bahá’í Life, The. comp. NSA of the British Isles. Manchester: BPT, 1948. London: BPT, 1953, 1963, 1968 and 1970. paper.

43. Peace: A Divine Creation. n.p. 1943. paper.

44. Power of the Covenant, The. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1956 and 1972. paper.

45. Power of the Covenant Part One, Bahá’u’lláh’s Covenant With Mankind, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, February, 1976. paper.

46. Power of the Covenant Part Two, The Problem of Covenant-Breaking, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, October, 1976. paper.

47. Power the Covenant Part Three, The Face of Opposition, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, April, 1977. paper.

48. Prayer of Bahá’u’lláh and Prayers and Tablets of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. trans. Shoghi Effendi. Boston: 1923. paper.

49. Prayers Revealed by Bahá’u’lláh, The Báb, and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1939. paper.

50. Prayers, Tablets, Instructions, and [Page 560]Miscelleny Gathered by American Visitors to the Holy City During the Summer of 1900. Chicago: The Adair Press, 1900. paper.

51. Racial Amity. comp. M. H. and M. M. (Mariam Haney and Mountfort Mills). n.p. 1924. paper.

52. Reality of Man, The. New York: BPC, 1931, 1935 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC, 1942, 1945 and 1947. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1962, 1966, 1972 and 1975. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. paper and cloth.

53. River of Life, A Selection from the Teachings of Baha Ullah and Abdul Baha with Explanation and Preface by Johanna Dawud. London: Cope & Fenwick, 1914.

54. Selections from Bahá’í Scripture. comp. David Hofman. Manchester, Eng.: BPT, 1941. cloth.

55. Selections from the Holy Utterances on the Subject of Unity from Bahá’u’lláh and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. n.p. n.d. paper.

56. Selections from the Holy Writings on the Subject of Unity from Bahá’u’lláh and ‘Abdu’l-Baha. n.p. n.d. paper.

57. Some Special Bahá’í Prayers and Tablets. London: BPT, 1945.

58. Spiritual Opportunity of the Bahá’ís of the United States and Canada, The. comp. the NSA of the USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1926. paper.

59. Splendour of God, The. comp. Eric Hammond. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1910. London: John Murray, The Wisdom of the East Series, 1909 and 1910. cloth.

60. Tablets Revealed by the Blessed Perfection and Abdul Beha Abbas Brought to this Country by Haji Mirza Hassan, Mirza Assad’ Ullah and Mirza Hussien. New York: Board of Counsel, 1900. paper.

61. Tablets Revealed in Honor of the Greatest Holy Leaf. New York: J. J. Little and Ives Company, 1933. paper.

62. Victory Promises. Honolulu: NSA of the Bahá’ís of the Hawaiian Islands, 1978. paper.

(v) THE WRITINGS OF SHOGHI EFFENDI

1. Advent of Divine Justice, The. New York: BPC, 1939 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC, 1940 and 1948. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1963, 1969, 1971 and 1974. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. paper, cloth and fabrikoid.

2. America and the Most Great Peace. New York: BPC, 1933. paper.

3. Bahá’í Administration. New York: BPC, 1928, 1933 and 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1945 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1960, 1968 and 1974. paper and cloth.

4. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844-1944, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. paper.

5. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844-1950, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. paper.

6. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844-1952, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1953. paper. (see also section on Universal House of Justice #3 and section on ‘Writings on the Bahá’í Faith’ #24).

7. Bahá’í Procedure. New York: BPC, 1937. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper and cloth. (the 1937 edition is loose-leaf).

8. Bahá’í Youth: A Compilation. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1973. paper.

9. Call to the Nations. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Haifa: Bahá’í World Centre, 1977. cloth.

10. Challenging Requirements of the Present Hour, The. Wilmette: NSA of USA and Canada, 1947. paper.

11. Citadel of Faith. Wilmette: BPT, 1965 and 1970. cloth.

12. Citadel of Faith of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA, 1948. paper.

13. Continental Boards of Counsellors. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, (1970). London: BPT, n.d. paper.

14. Covenant and Administration, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. Wilmette: BPT, 1956 and 1969. paper.

15. Dawn of a New Day, The. New Delhi: BPT, 1970. paper and cloth.

16. Dawn of World Civilization, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper.

17. Destiny of America, The. New York: BPC, 1940. paper. [Page 561]18. Directives from the Guardian. comp. Gertrude Garrida. New Delhi: BPT, 1973 and n.d. cloth and paper.

19. Dispensation of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1934, 1937 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1947. Wilmette: BPT, 1970. London: BPT, 1947. paper and cloth.

20. Earth is God's, The. London: BPT, 1947. paper.

21. Faith of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. paper.

22. Future World Commonwealth, The. NSA of the USA and Canada, 1936. paper.

23. Goal of a New World Order, The. New York: BPC, 1931. Wilmette: BPC, 1931 (not the true date). Wilmette: BPT, 1971. paper.

24. God Given Mandate, A. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper.

25. God Passes By. Wilmette: BPC, 1944, 1945 and 1950. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1965, 1970 and 1974. paper and cloth.

26. Golden Age of the Cause of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1932. paper.

27. Guidance for Today and Tomorrow. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1953 and 1973. cloth and paper.

28. Generation of the Half-Light: A Compilation for Bahá’í Youth. comp. Arjun Rastogi. New Delhi: BPT, 1974. paper.

29. Guidance for Youth. comp. NSA of the United Kingdom. London: BPT, 1969. paper.

30. Guidelines for Local Spiritual Assemblies. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1975 and 1976. paper.

31. Importance of Teaching Indigenous People, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, 1968. paper.

32. Letters from Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.

33. Letters from the Guardian to Australia and New Zealand 1923-1957. Melbourne: NSA of Australia and New Zealand, 1970 and 1971. cloth.

34. Lifeblood of the Cause. comp. the Universal House of Justice. London: BPT, (1970). paper.

35. Living the Life. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1974. paper.

36. Local Spiritual Assembly, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette: BPT, 1970. London: BPT, n.d. paper.

37. Messages from the Guardian 1932-1940. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.

38. Messages to America 1932-1946. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. fabrikoid.

39. Messages to Canada. NSA of Canada, 1965. cloth.

40. Messages to the Bahá’í World 1950-1957. Wilmette: BPT, 1958 and 1971. cloth.

41. National Spiritual Assembly, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper.

42. Passing of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, The. co-author Lady Blomfield. Haifa: Rosenfeld Brothers, 1922. London: BPT, n.d. paper.

43. Pattern for Future Society, A. Wilmette: BPC, 1940, 1946 and 1948. paper.

44. Principles of Bahá’í Administration. London: BPT, 1950, 1963 and 1973. paper and cloth.

45. Principles of Mass Teaching. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, 1971. see #31. paper.

46. Promised Day is Come, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1943 and 1951. Wilmette: BPT, 1961 and 1967. New Delhi: BPT, 1976. cloth and paper.

47. Religion a Living Organism. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.

48. Rising World Commonwealth, The. London: BPT, 1945. paper.

49. Selected Writings of Shoghi Effendi. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. Wilmette: BPT, 1975. paper.

50. Special Measure of Love, A. Wilmette: BPT, 1974. paper.

51. Spiritual Potencies of that Consecrated Spot. n.p. 1939. paper.

52. Unfoldment of World Civilization, The. New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper.

53. World Government and Collective Security. New Delhi: NSA of India, Pakistan and Burma, 1953. paper.

54. World Moves on to Its Destiny, The. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. paper.

55. World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1929. paper.

56. World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1938. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. Wilmette: BPT, 1955, 1969 and 1974. cloth fabrikoid and paper.

57. World Order of Bahá’u’lláh-Further [Page 562]Considerations, The. New York: BPC, 58. World Order Unfolds. Wilmette: BPC, 1930. paper. 1952. paper.

(vi) MESSAGES AND COMPILATIONS OF THE UNIVERSAL HOUSE OF JUSTICE

1. Analysis of the Nine Year International Teaching Plan 1964-1973. Wilmette: BPT, 1964. paper.

2. Analysis of the Five Year International Teaching Plan 1974-1979. Welwyn Garden City, Hertfordshire: Broadwater, 1975. paper.

3. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844-1968, The. Haifa: P. Schaut, 1968. paper. (see also section on Shoghi Effendi #4-6 and the section entitled "Writings on the Bahá’í Faith" #24).

4. Bahá’í Holy Places at the World Centre, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1968. cloth.

5. Constitution of the Universal House of Justice, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1972. paper.

6. Five Year Plan, The. Wilmette: BPT, 1974. paper.

7. Five Year Plan, 1974-1979: Statistical Report, Ridvan 1978, The. Haifa: Bahá’í World Centre, 1978. paper.

8. Messages from the Universal House of Justice 1968-1973. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. paper and cloth.

9. Wellspring of Guidance, Messages from the Universal House of Justice 1963-1968. Wilmette: 1969 and 1970. paper and cloth.

(vii) WRITINGS ON THE BAHÁ’Í FAITH

1. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Fiftieth Anniversary of His Passing, Wilmette: World Order Magazine, 1971. paper and cloth.

2. Abdul Baha in Egypt. Ahmad Sohrab. New York: New History Foundation, 1929. London: Ryder & Co., n.d. cloth.

3. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá the Center of the Covenant. Juliet Thompson. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. paper.

4. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá the Centre of the Covenant of Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: George Ronald, 1971 and 1972. paper and cloth.

5. Abdul Baha’s First Days in America. comp. Juliet Thompson. East Aurora, N.Y.: The Roycrofters, 1924. paper.

6. Addresses. Abdel Karim Effendi Teherani. trans. Anton F. Haddad. Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1900. paper.

7. Akka Lights. Mr. & Mrs. Joseph H. Hannen. 1909. paper.

8. All Things Made New. John Ferraby. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1957 and 1960. New York: Macmillan Co., 1958. Wilmette: BPT, 1960 and 1963. London: BPT, 1975. paper and cloth.

9. Amatu’l-Bahá Visits India. Violette Nakhjavání. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. paper.

10. Appreciations of the Bahá’í Faith. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1947, and 1948. paper.

11. Architectural Compositions in the Indian Style. Designs for Temples and Shrines. Charles Mason Remey. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1923. paper.

12. Architectural Exhibition of a Series of Preliminary Designs by Charles Mason Remey for the Mashrak El Azkar (Bahá’í Temple). n.p. n.d. paper.

13. Auguste Forel and the Bahá’í Faith with Commentary by Peter Mühlschlegel. Oxford: George Ronald, 1978. paper.

14. Báb, the Herald of the Day of Days, The. Hasan M. Balyuzi. Oxford: George Ronald, 1973 and 1973. paper and cloth.

15. Bab-Ed-Din, the Door of True Religion. Ibrahim George Kheiralla. Chicago: Chas. H. Kerr and Company, 1897. paper.

16. Bahá’í Appeal for Religious Freedom in Iran. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1956. paper. [Page 563]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

17. Bahá’í Attitude Toward War, The. San Francisco Bahá’í Assembly n.d. paper.

18. Bahá’í Case Against Mrs. Lewis Stuyyvesant Chanler and Mirza Ahmad Sohrab A Statement Prepared for the Members of the American Bahá’í Community, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada. 1941. paper.

19. Bahá’í Centenary 1844-1944, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. fabrikoid.

20. Bahá’í Congress. Chicago: 1916. paper.

21. Bahá’í Faith, The. G. Palgrave Simpson. London: 1920. paper.

22. Bahá’í Faith, An Introduction, The. Gloria Faizi. Beirut, 1971. Wilmette: BPT, 1972, 1975 and 1978. paper.

23. Bahá’í Faith by a Methodist Layman, The. A. J. Truesdell. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.

24. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844-1963, The. comp. the Hands of the Cause Residing in the Holy Land. Ramat Gan Israel, Peli-P.E.C. Printing Works Ltd. paper. (see also the section on Shoghi Effendi #4-6 and the section on the Universal House of Justice #3).

25. Bahá’í Faith, The Dawn of a New Day, The. Jessyca Russell Gaver. New York; Hawthorn Books Inc., 1967. cloth. (same as #113).

26. Bahá’í Follower of the Light. Ray Meyer. NSA of Australia, 1972. Wilmette: BPT. paper.

27. Bahá’í Glossary. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1955 and 1969. paper.

28. Bahá’í Group, The. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.

29. Bahá’í House of Worship, Description of the Temple with Illustrations, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1917. paper.

30. Bahá’í Hymns and Poems. Louise R. Waite. Chicago: BPS, 1904. New York: BPC, 1927. paper.

31. Bahá’í Hymns of Peace and Praise. L. R. Waite. n.p. 1908. paper.

32. Bahá’í Indexes. Charles Mason Remey. Newport, R.I.: 1923. paper.

33. Bahá’í Library Committee. Charles Mason Remey. Firenze, Italy: 1925. paper.

34. Bahá’í Library of Constructive Religion, The Peace of the World, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. cloth. (same as #204).

35. Bahá’í Manuscripts. Charles Mason Remey. Newport, R.I.: 1923. paper.

36. Bahá’í Martyrdoms in Persia in the Year 1903 A.D. Haji Mirza Haydar Ali. trans. Dr. Youness Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1904 and 1917 rev. paper.

37. Bahá’í Message, The. comp. Horace Holley. Chicago: BPS, 1920. paper.

38. Bahá’í Movement, A Series of Nineteen Papers Upon the Bahá’í Movement, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans and Sons, 1912 and 1912 (actually printed several years later). cloth.

39. Bahá’í Movement for Universal Religion, Brotherhood, and Peace, A Sketch of Its History and Teachings, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Persian-American Bulletin, 1912. paper.

40. Bahá’í Movement: Aims & Purposes of the Bahá’í Faith, Outline of History, Principles of Administration, Excerpts from the Sacred Writings, and Reading List, The. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.

41. Bahá’í Movement in Its Social-Economic Aspect, The. Helen Campbell. Chicago: BPS, 1915. paper. (see # 50).

42. Bahá’í Movement-Its Spiritual Dynamic, The. Albert R. Vail. n.p. n.d. paper.

43. Bahá’í Persecutions in Persia. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1926. paper.

44. Bahá’í Proofs. Mirza Abul Fazl. trans. Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, 1914. New York: BPC, 1929. cloth. (see also #78).

45. Bahá’í Religion, The. Horace Holley and Ruhi Afnan. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.

46. Bahá’í Revelation, The. Thornton Chase. Chicago: BPS, 1909, 1913 and 1919. New York: BPC, (1928). paper and cloth.

47. Bahá’í Revelation, The. Mrs. Scaramucci. London: The Priory Press, 1911. paper.

48. Bahá’í Revelation and Reconstruction, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper and cloth.

49. Bahá’ísm: The Modern Social Religion. [Page 564]Horace Holley. London: Sidgwick & Jackson Ltd., 1913. New York: Mitchell Kennerly, 1913. cloth.

50. Bahaism in Its Social-Economic Aspect. Helen Campbell. Chicago: BPS, 1910. paper. (see also #41 of this section).

51. Bahaism the Religion of Brotherhood and Its Place in the Evolution of Creeds. Francis Henry Skrine. London: Longmans Green and Company, 1912. cloth.

52. Bahai Teachings, The. Charles Mason Remey, Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. cloth.

53. Bahai Temple: Press Comments, Symbolism, The. comp. Louis Bourgeois. Chicago: 1921. paper.

54. Bahai the Spirit of the Age. Horace Holley. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Co., 1921. New York: Brentano's, 1921. cloth.

55. Bahá’í World Volume II (1926-1928), The. New York: BPC, 1928. cloth.

56. Bahá’í World Volume III (1928-1930), The. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.

57. Bahá’í World Volume IV (1930-1932), The. New York: BPC, 1933. cloth.

58. Bahá’í World Volume V (1932-1934), The. New York: BPC, 1936. cloth.

59. Bahá’í World Volume VI (1934-1936), The. New York: BPC, 1937. cloth.

60. Bahá’í World Volume VII (1936-1938), The. New York: BPC, 1939. cloth.

61. Bahá’í World Volume VIII (1938-1940), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. cloth.

62. Bahá’í World Volume IX (1940-1944), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. cloth.

63. Bahá’í World Volume X (1944-1946), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. cloth.

64. Bahá’í World Volume XI (1946-1950), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1952. cloth.

65. Bahá’í World Volume XII (1950-1954), The. Wilmette: BPT, 1956. cloth.

66. Bahá’í World Volume XIII (1954-1963), The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1970 and 1971. cloth.

67. Bahá’í World Volume XIV (1963-1968), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1975. cloth.

68. Bahá’í World Volume XV (1968-1973), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1976. cloth.

69. Bahá’í World Volume XVI (1968-1976), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre. 1979. cloth.

70. Bahá’í Writings, A Concordance. comp. Hugh Carden. NSA of New Zealand, Feb. 1975, Aug. 1975, Jan. 1976. and Sep. 1976. paper.

71. Bahá’í Year Book Volume I (1925-1926), The. New York: BPC, 1926. cloth. (see #53-67 of this section).

72. Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: BPT, 1938 and n.p. 1938, paper.

73. Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: George Ronald, 1963, 1968, 1970, 1972, 1973, 1974 and 1976. paper and cloth.

74. Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era. John Ebenezer Esslemont. London: George Allen & Unwin Ltd., 1923 and 1940. New York: Brentano's, (1924) and (1925). New York: BPC, 1927, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1937, 1938 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1942, 1944, 1946, 1948, 1950 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1960, 1966, 1970, 1975, 1976 and 1978. London: BPT, 1952 and 1974. cloth, fabrikoid and paper.

75. Bahá’u’lláh and His Message. J. E. Esslemont. n.p. 1938. paper.

76. Bahá’u’lláh’s Ground Plan of World Fellowship. George Townshend. London: World Congress of Faiths, 1936 and 1938. paper. (see The Bahá’í World, vol. VI, p. 614).

77. Before Abraham Was I Am. Thornton Chase. Chicago: 1902. paper.

78. Behai Proofs, The. Mirza Abul Fazel. trans. Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). New York: J. W. Pratt Co., 1902. cloth. (see also #42 of this section).

79. Bounties of the Kingdom—A Fairy Play, The. Evangeline Elizabeth Crowell Dunlop. Riverton, N.J.: The New Era Press, 1916. paper.

80. Brief Account of the Bahai Movement, A. G. Palgrave Simpson and Ethel J. Rosenberg. West Kensington, Eng.: Burnside Ltd. n.d. London: The Priory Press, J. M. Watkins, 1911. paper.

81. Brief Account of My Visit to Acca, A. Mary L Lucas. Chicago: BPS, 1905. paper.

82. Brief Sketch of Behaism, A. Ethel J. Rosenberg. London: R. F. Hunger, 310 [Page 565]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

Euston Rd., N.W., 1905. paper. 83. Brilliant Proof, The. Mirza Abul Fazl. Chicago: Bahá’í News Service, 1912. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. paper. 84. Buddha and Amitabha. Shirin Fozdar. Calcutta: Daw Sen & Co., printed at the Anna Art Press Private Ltd. paper. 85. Buddha Maitraya Amitabha Has Appeared. Jamshid Fozdar. New Delhi: BPT, 1976. cloth and paper. 86. Call of God, The. George Orr Latimer. Chicago: BPS, n.d. paper. 87. Character, A Sequence in Spiritual Psychology. Stanwood Cobb. Washing- ton: The Avalon Press, 1938 and 1971. paper and cloth. 88. Chosen Highway, The. Lady Blomfield. London: BPT, n.d. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1970. paper and cloth. 89. Christ and Bahá’u’lláh. George Towns- hend. London: George Ronald, 1957, 1957, 1966, 1967, 1971, 1972 and 1976. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1970. paper and cloth. 90. Christianity of Jesus, The. Richard Backwell. Portlaw, Ireland: Volturna Press, 1972. cloth. 91. Closer Than Your Life Vein. Henry A. Weil. NSA of Alaska, 1978. paper. 92. Coming of the Glory. The. Florence E. Pinchon. London: Simpkin Marshall Ltd., 1928. cloth. 93. Commentary on the Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. David Hofman. Lon- don: George Ronald, 1943, 1947 and 1955. paper. 94. Constructive Principles of the Bahá’í Movement. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. Chicago: BPS, 1917. paper and cloth. 95. Continuity of the Prophets, The. Myrtle W. Campbell. New York: The Pageant Press, 1952. cloth. 96. Covenant, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Bahá’í Assembly of Washington D.C., 1912. paper and card- board. 97. Daily Lessons Received at Acca, January 1908. Helen S. Goodall and Ella Goodall Cooper. Chicago: BPS, 1908 and 1917. cardboard. 98. Dawn-Breakers, The. Nabíl-i-A’zam Muhammad-i-Zarandí. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1932 (a limited edition specially bound number- ing 150 copies autographed by the trans- lator) and 1932 (the regular edition). Wilmette: BPC, 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1962, 1970 and 1974. London: BPT, 1953 and 1975. leather, cloth and paper. 99. Dawn of Knowledge and the Most Great Peace, The. Paul Kingston Dealy. Chicago: BPS, 1903, 1905 and 1908. paper. 100. Dawn Over Mount Hira and Other Essays. Marzieh Gail. Oxford: George Ronald, 1976. cloth. 101. Declaration of Trust and By-Laws of a Local Spiritual Assembly. New York: BPC, 1933. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada, 1945. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. Wilmette: BPT, 1965, 1969 and 1975. paper. 102. Diary Letters of Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Chicago: Mrs. Fanny G. Lesch. (various volumes) cardboard. 103. Divine Revelation the Basis of All Civil- ization. Anton F. Haddad. New York: Board of Counsel, 1902. paper. 104. Divine Secret for Human Civilization, The. n.p. n.d. paper. 105. Divine Secret for Human Civilization, The. Josephine D. Storey. Geneva, Switz.: Quo Vadis, 1928. paper. 106. Divine Springtime. Daniel Nelson Wegener. Tegucigalpa, Honduras: Union Press, 1977. paper. 107. Divine Symphony. Gayle Woolson. New Delhi: BPT, 1971 and 1977. paper. 108. Do'a: The Call to Prayer. Ruth Ellis Mof- fett. Chicago: 1933, 1938 and 1953. paper. 109. Do'a: On the Wings of Prayer. Ruth Ellis Moffett. Des Moines, Ia.: Wallace Homestead Co., 1974. paper. 110. Dr. J. E. Esslemont. Moojan Momen. London: BPT, 1975. paper. 111. Drama of the Kingdom, The. Mrs. Basil Hall. London: The Weardale Press, 1933. cloth. 112. Dream of God, The. Albert Durant Wat- son. Chicago: BPS, 1922. paper. 113. Dynamic New Religion Bahá’í Faith, The. Jessyca Russell Gaver. New York: Award Books, 1968 and 1968. paper. [Page 566](see also #25 of this section).

114. Early Pilgrimage, An. May Maxwell. n.p. 1917. London: George Ronald, 1953, 1969, 1974 and 1976. paper.

115. Earth is but One Country, The. John Huddleston. London: BPT, 1976. cloth.

116. Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í Faith. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: George Ronald, 1970. cloth.

117. Episodes in the Life of Moneereh Khanum. trans. Ahmad Sohrab. Los Angeles: Persian-American Publishing Co., 1924. paper.

118. Epistle to the Bahá’í World, An. Mirza Badi’ Ullah. trans. Dr. Ameen’Ullah Fareed. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper.

119. Essential Mysticism, The. Stanwood Cobb. Boston: The Four Seas Company, 1918. cloth.

120. Eternal Voice, The. Cornelia A. Norder. Rhinelander, Wis.: Legacy Press, 1972 and 1975. paper.

121. Explanations Concerning Sacred Mysteries. Mirza Assad’Ullah. trans. Dr. Fareed. Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1902. cloth.

122. Fallacy of Ancestor Worship, The. Jamshed Fozdar. Bombay, 1965. paper.

123. 52 Bahá’í Talks for Every Occasion. S. I. Dean. NSA of Malaysia, (1965) and 1977. paper.

124. Fire on the Mountaintop. Gloria Faizi. London: BPT, 1973. paper.

125. Firmness in the Covenant. Charles Mason Remey. 1918. n.p. paper.

126. Five Preliminary Architectural Sketches for the Temple of the Mashrak-El-Azkar, which the Followers of the Bahá’í Movement are to Build Upon the Shore of Lake Michigan at Chicago. Washington: 1916. paper.

127. Flame of Fire, A. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, 1969 and 1973. paper.

128. Flame-The Story of Lua, The. William Sears and Robert Quigley. London: George Ronald, 1972. paper and encased.

129. Flowers Culled from the Rose Garden of Akka. Ida A. Finch, Fanny A. Knobloch and Alma S. Knobloch. n.p. (1910). paper.

130. Follow a Dream Time, Father and Mother Dunn the Spiritual Conquerors of a Continent. Commemorating the Fiftieth Anniversary of the Arrival of the Bahá’í Faith in Australia 18 April 1970. Paddington, New South Wales: NSA of Australia, 1970. paper.

131. Freedom of Religion on Trial in Morocco-The Nador Case. New York: Bahá’í Information Center, 1963. paper.

132. From Strength to Strength. Eunice Braun. Wilmette: BPT, 1978. paper.

133. Glimpses of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. ‘Roy’ (Wilhelm) and M. J. M. (Mountfort J. Mills). n.p. n.d. paper.

134. Glorious Kingdom of the Father Foretold, The. Virgie V. Vail. New York: BPC, 1940. fabrikoid.

135. God, His Mediator and Man-A Study in Comparative Religion. Pritan Singh and Doris McKay. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.

136. God Loves Laughter. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1960, 1961, 1964, 1968, 1970 and 1974. paper and cloth.

137. God’s Heroes. Laura Clifford Barney. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Co., 1910. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1910. cloth.

138. Great Themes of Life. Eric Bowes. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. cloth.

139. Heart of the Gospel, The. George Townshend. London: Lindsay Drummond, 1939. New York: BPC, 1940. London: George Ronald, 1951, 1955 and 1960. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper and cloth.

140. Heralds of Peace. Beatrice Irwin. n.p. 1938. paper.

141. Heavenly Feast, Some Utterances of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to Two American Pilgrims (Charles and Mariam Haney) in Acca, Syria, February 1909-Interpreted by Dr. Fareed and Taken Down in Stenographic Notes by Mariam Haney During 9 Days in Acca, A. n.p. n.d. paper.

142. Heavenly Vista, A. Louis Gregory. Washington: R. L. Pendleton, 1911. paper.

143. Heavens are Cleft Asunder, The. Huschmand Sabet. Oxford: George Ronald, 1975. paper and cloth.

144. History of the Bahá’í Faith in Japan 1914-1938. Agnes Baldwin Alexander. Japan: BPT, 1977. paper. [Page 567]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

145. Illustrated Description of a Design in the Persian-Indian Style of Architecture for the First Mashrak El Azkar (Bahá’í Temple) to Be Erected in America. Humbly Offered to the Center of the Covenant through the Bahá’í Temple Unity by C.M.R. April 26-28, 1920. Washington: C.M.R., 1920. paper.

146. In Galilee and In Spirit and In Truth. Thornton Chase and Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper. (see #147).

147. In Galilee and In Wonderland. Thornton Chase and Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, 1921. paper. (see #146).

148. Indian Style of Architecture, The. Charles Mason Remey. Boston: 1925. paper.

149. Instruction Given by Mirza Assad ’Ullah to Isabella D. Brittingham in Johnstown, New York November, 1900, and Taken Down in Notes from His Lips as He Spoke, An. n.d. n.p. paper.

150. Instructions Concerning Genesis and the Mystery of Baptism. Mirza Assad ’Ullah. trans. Alla Khuli Khan. n.p. n.d. paper.

151. Karma and the Fallacy of Reincarnation. Jamshed Fozdar. Malaysia: BPT, 1977. paper.

152. Knock and It Shall Be Opened to You. ’Roy’ (Wilhelm) and M. J. M. (Mountfort J. Mills). n.p. n.d. paper.

153. Knowing God Through Love and Farewell Address of Mirza Abul Fazl. Washington: Bahá’í Assembly of Washington D.C., 1904. paper.

154. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 1, Fulfillment in this Age of the Old and New Testament Prophecies etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans, Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahá’í Literature Center, n.d. paper.

155. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 2, The Ideals of the New Age etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahá’í Literature Center, n.d. paper.

156. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 3, The Universal Consciousness of Christ, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. Trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahá’í Literature Center, n.d. paper.

157. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 4, Man is the Collective Center of All Phenomena, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahá’í Literature Center. paper.

158. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 5, The New Vision of Immortality, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahá’í Literature Center, n.d. paper.

159. Lesson in Religion. Mohammed Ali Alkany. trans. Edith Roohie Sanderson. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1923. paper.

160. Lessons on the Beha Revelation, in separate parts. W. Hooper Harris. Bayonne, N.J.: Charles E. Sprague, (1901). paper.

161. Letter from Honolulu, A. Charles Mason Remey. Honolulu: Charles Mason Remey, Feb. 17, 1917. paper.

162. Letter Written by Mirza Abul Hussein on Behalf of the ’Friends’ of Isfahan Persia, to the American Believers. trans. Mirza Ameen ’Ullah (Fareed). April 25, 1902. n.p. paper.

163. Life and Teachings of Abbas Effendi, The. Myron H. Phelps. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1903, 1904 and 1912. cloth.

164. Life Plan, A. Peter Esslemont. London: George Ronald, 1953. cloth.

165. Life with Nayan. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1969. paper.

166. Light of the World, The. by a group of pilgrims. Boston: George Orr Latimer, 1920. paper.

167. Light Shineth in Darkness, The. Udo Schaefer. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. paper.

168. Martinist’s Report, An Investigation of Bahá’ísm. Gabriel Sassi. trans. Honore J. Jaxon. Chicago: Bahá’ís Supply and Publishing Board, 1901. paper.

169. Mashrak-El-Azkar. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1916. paper.

170. Mashrak-El-Azkar, Descriptive of the Bahá’í Temple and Illustrative of an Exhibition of Preliminary Designs for the First Mashrak-El-Azkar to be Built in America, Showing Nine Varying [Page 568]Treatments in Different Styles of Architecture. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. cloth.

171. Mashriqul Adhkar and the Bahai Movement. Jean Masson. Chicago: Executive Board of the Bahai Temple Unity, 1921. paper.

172. Maxim of Bahaism, The. Anton F. Haddad. New York: Board of Counsel. n.d. paper.

173. Meditations of a Bahai Christian. E. T. Hall. Manchester: C. E. Bennet and Company, 1912. paper.

174. Memories of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: The Avalon Press, n.d. paper.

175. Memorial Services of Abdul Baha on Mount Carmel, Palestine. comp. Dr. Zia Bagdadi. n.p. 1922. paper.

176. Message from Acca, A. Anton F. Haddad. Board of Counsel (New York), n.d. paper.

177. Message of the Kingdom of God, The. James F. Brittingham. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and 1909. paper.

178. Message of Unity-The Bahai Movement, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Oct. 19, 1908. paper.

179. Milly, A. Tribute to Amelia E. Collins. Abu’l-Qásim Faizi. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. paper.

180. Mission of Bahá’u’lláh and Other Literary Pieces, The. George Townshend. London: George Ronald, 1952. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1971. cloth.

181. Most Great Peace, The. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916. Shanghai, China: Ta Tung She, 1932. paper.

182. Múlla Husayn. L. Johnson. n.p. n.d. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d. paper.

183. My Pilgrimage to the Land of Desire. Marie A. Watson. New York: BPC, 1932. paper.

184. Mysticism and the Baha’i Revelation. Ruhi Afnan. New York: BPC, 1934. paper.

185. Mysticism, Science and Revelation. Glenn A. Shook. London: George Ronald, 1953, 1954 and 1964. Wilmette: BPT, 1967, 1970, 1974 and 1976. cloth.

186. My Visit to Abbas Effendi in 1899. Margaret Bloodgood Peeke. Chicago: The Grier Press, 1911. cloth.

187. Nabíl’s Narrative Abridged. Zena Sorabjee. New Delhi: BPT, 1974 and 1976. cloth and paper.

188. Narcissus to Akka, The. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. paper.

189. National Spiritual Assembly ofthe Bahá’ís of the United States. Wilmette: NSA of USA, 1975. paper.

190. New Day, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper and cardboard.

191. New Garden, The. Hooshmand Fathea’zam. New Delhi: BPT, 1958, 1963 and 1971. paper.

192. New Holy City, The. Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. New York: Mutual Publishing Company, 1901. cloth.

193. New Keys to the Book of Revelation. Ruth J. Moffett. New Delhi: BPT, 1977. cloth and paper.

194. New Light on the Spirit Path, The. Ted Claus. Wilmette: BPT, 1971. paper.

195. New Revelation: Its Marvelous Message, The. Col. Nathan Ward Fitzgerald. Tacoma, Wash.: 1905. paper and cloth.

196. Nonagonal Temple in the Indian Style of Architecture, A. Charles Mason Remey. Italy: 1927. paper.

197. Notes Taken at Acca. Corinne True. Chicago: BPS, 1907. paper.

198. Not Every Sea Hath Pearls. Loulie Albee Mathews. Milford, N.H.: The Cabinet Press, 1951. paper (earlier printings have the title imprinted on the spine).

199. Observations of a Bahai Traveller. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Carnahan Press, (1909). Washington: J. D. Milans and Sons, 1915. paper and cloth.

200. Oneness of Mankind, The. comp. Mariam Haney and Louis Gregory. New York: BPC, 1927. paper.

201. Open Letter to the Bahais of America, An. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1918. paper.

202. Oriental Rose or the Teachings of Abdul Baha, The. Mary Hanford Ford. New York: Broadway Publishing Company, 1910 (of the two printings of the New York edition the first has a seriffed monogram on the spine, the second a ‘bulls-eye’ monogram). Chicago: BPS, 1910 (actually printed at a later date). cloth. [Page 569]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

203. Passing of Shoghi Effendi, The. Rúbiyyih Khánum and John Ferraby. London: BPT, 1958. paper.

204. Peace of the World, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper. (see also #34).

205. Personal Recollections of a Bahá’í Life in the Hawaiian Islands, Forty Years of the Bahá’í Cause in Hawaii, 1902-1942. Miss Agnes Alexander. NSA of the Bahá’ís of the Hawaiian Islands, 1974. paper.

206. Persian-American Educational Society Incorporated Statement and Constitution and By-Laws. Washington: 1910. paper.

207. Pilgrimage to Thonon, A. Horace Holley. Letchworth, Herts.: Garden City Press, Ltd., 1911. paper.

208. Portals to Freedom. Howard Colby Ives. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1937. Cynthiana, Kentucky: The Hobson Press, 1943. London: George Ronald, 1943, 1946, 1948, 1953, 1962 and 1969. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1972. paper and cloth.

209. Prescription for Living. Ruhiyyih Rabbani. London: George Ronald, 1950 (an edition of 300 copies in dark blue cloth serial numbered and autographed by the author), 1950 (regular edition), 1960 and 1969. paper and cloth.

210. Priceless Pearl, The. Ruhiyyih Rabbani. London: BPT, 1969 (an edition of 1500 copies in red cloth serial numbered and autographed by the author) and 1969 (regular edition). cloth and paper.

211. Prisoner and the Kings, The. William Sears. Toronto: General Publishing Company, Ltd., 1971. paper.

212. Promise of All Ages, The. Christophil (George Townshend). London: Simpkin Marshall Ltd., 1934. New York: BPC, 1935. cloth. (see #210).

213. Promise of All Ages, The. George Townshend. New York: BPC, 1938. London: Lindsay Drummond, (1940). Wilmette: BPC, 1944. London: George Ronald, 1948 and 1961. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper and cloth.

214. Prospectus: A Series of Five Lectures Upon the Universal Religious and Social Principles of the Bahai Movement, A. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: 1919. paper.

215. Protection of the Cause of God, The. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1918. paper.

216. Quddús. L. Johnson. n.d. n.p. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d. paper.

217. Quest for Eden, The. Elena Maria Marsella. New York: The Philosophical Library, 1966. paper and cloth.

218. Race and Man. Maye Harvey Gift and Alice Simmons Cox. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1945. paper.

219. Radiant Living. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1970. paper.

220. Rays from the Sun of Truth. Ida Finch. n.p. n.d. paper.

221. Reconciliation of Races and Religions, The. Thomas Kelly Cheyne. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1914. cloth.

222. Release the Sun. William Sears. New Delhi: BPT, 1957. Wilmette: BPT, 1960, 1964, 1970 and 1975. cloth and paper.

223. Religion for Mankind. Horace Holley. London: George Ronald, 1956 and 1963. Wilmette: BPT, 1966 and 1976. paper and cloth.

224. Religious Unity. Charles Mason Remey. June. 1906. n.p. paper.

225. Renewal of Civilization, The. David Hofman. London: George Ronald, 1945, 1946, 1947, 1949, 1953, 1960 and 1969. New Dehli: BPT, 1969. Wilmette: BPT, 1970 and 1972. paper and cloth.

226. Report of the Bahai Committee of Investigation 1917-1918. Charles Mason Remey, H. Emogene Hoagg, George O. Latimer and Louis Gregory. n.p. n.d. paper.

227. Report to Abdul Baha of the Bahai Activities in the States of North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia and Florida U.S.A Charles Mason Remey. n.p. March-April, 1919. paper.

228. Revelation of Baha Ullah, The. Isabella D. Brittingham. Chicago: BPS, 1902 and 9th ed. 1920. paper.

229. Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh Volume I (1853-1863). Adib Taherzadeh. Oxford: George Ronald, 1974 and 1975. paper and cloth.

230. Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh Volume II (1863-1868). Adib Taherzadeh. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. cloth.

231. School of the Prophets, The. Mirza Assad’u’llah. trans. Dr. Fareed. Chicago: [Page 570]BPS, 1907. cloth.

232. Secret of Life, The. Mary Hanford Ford. San Francisco: Press of A. Carlisle and Co., Upham and Rutledge Inc., 1933. paper.

233. Security for a Failing World. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1934 and 1940. New York: BPC, 1934 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. New Delhi: BPT, 1971 and 1977. paper and cloth.

234. Series of Twelve Articles Introductory to the Study of the Bahá’í Teachings, A. Charles Mason Remey. Florence, Italy: 1925. cloth.

235. Seven Articles Upon the Bahá’í Religious Movement. Riverton, N.J., 1919. paper.

236. Sheltering Branch, The. Marzieh Gail. London: BPT, 1941. London: George Ronald, 1959. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1970. London: George Ronald, 1974. cloth.

237. Shoghi Effendi Recollections. Ugo Giachery. Oxford: George Ronald, 1973. cloth.

238. So Great a Cause. Kenneth D. Stephens. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1973. paper and cloth.

239. Social Principle, The. Horace Holley. New York: L. J. Gomme, 1915. encased.

240. Some Early Bahá’ís of the West. O. Z. Whitehead. Oxford: George Ronald, 1976 and 1977. cloth.

241. Song Celestial, The. Howard Colby Ives. Portland, Ore.: Shankle Printing, 1938. Chicago: The Landon Press, 1938. (reprints of the Shankle printing-with frontispiece 1962 and in reduced size 1973). fabrikoid and cloth.

242. Songs of Prayer and Praise. comp. Louise R. Waite. Chicago: 1912. paper.

243. Spell of the Temple, The. Allen Boyer McDaniel. New York: The Vantage Press, 1953. cloth.

244. Spiritual Assembly’s Growing Pains, A. Amatu’l-Bahá Rúhíyyih Khánum. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. Sydney: NSA of Australia, 1976. paper.

245. Statement on the Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Charter of a Divine Civilization. Wilmette: NSA of USA and Canada, 1942. paper.

246. Station of the Manifestation and the Greatness of the Day, The. New York: Board of Counsel, 1901. paper.

247. Story of the Bahá’í Movement, A Universal Religion, The. Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, Mayle’s Penny Series, 1907, 1908 and 1912. paper.

248. Story of Louis G. Gregory, The. Elsie Austin. Wilmette: BPT, 1955. paper.

249. Studies in Jewish Mysticism. Loulie Mathews et al. n.p. n.d. paper.

250. Success in Teaching. Rúbiyyih Khánum. Wilmette: BPT, 1965. paper.

251. Sunburst. Lorol Schopflocher. London: Ryder & Co., 1938. cloth.

252. Table Talks by Abdul Baha Taken Down in Persian by Mirza Hadi at Acca, Feb. 1907. Trans. A. U. Fareed at Chicago Jul. 1907, Also Notes Taken by C. True. Chicago: BPS, 1907. paper.

253. Table Talks at Acca. Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, Nov. 1907. paper.

254. Table Talks with Abdul Baha in February, 1904. Mr. and Mrs. George T. Winterburn. trans. Mirza Youness Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1908 and 1915. paper.

255. Táhirih. Clara A. Edge. Grand Rapids, Mich.: Edgeway Publishing Company, 1964. cloth.

256. Táhirih. L. Johnson. n.p. n.d. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d.

257. Táhirih the Pure: Iran’s Greatest Woman. Martha Root. n.p. 1938. paper, cloth and cloth with gold lettering.

258. Tarikh-i-Jadid, The. Mirza Husayn of Hamadan. trans. Edward Granville Browne. Cambridge, Eng.: Cambridge University Press, 1893. cloth.

259. Ten Days in the Light of Acca. Julia M. Grundy. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and n.d. Wilmette: BPT, 1979. paper and cloth.

260. Thief in the Night. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1961, 1964, 1968, 1969, 1972, 1977 and 1978. paper.

261. This Earth One Country. Emeric Sala. Boston: Bruce Humpheries Inc., 1945. cloth.

262. Three Meditations on the Eve of November the Fourth. Abul Qasim Faizi. London: BPT, 1970 and 1972. cloth.

263. Through Warring Countries to the Mountain of God. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Charles Mason Remey, 1915. cloth.

264. Tomorrow and Tomorrow. Stanwood [Page 571]

Bahá’í Bibliography

Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1951. Wilmette: BPC, 1951. Wilmette: BPT, 1960 and 1970. paper.

265. Translation of a Letter Written by the Hebrew Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Teheran Persia to the House of Spirituality Chicago Ill. for the Perusal of all American Friends. New York: Bahá’í Board of Counsel, n.d. paper.

266. Translation of the French Footnotes of the Dawn-Breakers. Emily McBride Perigord. New York: BPC, 1939. Wilmette: BPT, 1970. paper.

267. Treasures of the East. Dr. Zia M. Bagdadi. Chicago: (1929). cloth.

268. Tribute to Shoghi Effendi, A. Amelia Collins. Wilmette: BPT, n.d. paper.

269. Trouble, How to Meet It-Better Still How to Avoid It. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1970. paper.

270. Trustees of the Merciful. NSA of the USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1958, paper.

271. Trustees of the Merciful. Adib Taherzadeh. London: BPT, 1972. paper.

272. Truth of It, The. Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. New York: The Mutual Publishing Company, 1901. cloth.

273. Twenty-Five Years of the Guardianship. Rúhlyyih Khánum. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. paper.

274. 239 Days, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s Journey in America. Allan L. Ward. Wilmette: BPT, 1979. cloth.

275. Two Shall Appear. Olivia Kelsey. n.p. 1943. Independence, Mo.: Lambert Moon, 1943. paper.

276. Unity—The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1905. paper.

277. Unity Through Love. Howard MacNutt. from notes of Hooper Harris. Chicago:

BAHÁ’Í Bahá’í literature display sponsored by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of Italy during the annual Milan Trade Fair held on 14-23 April 1978. Bahá’í books in ten languages and in Braille were exhibited. [Page 572]BPS, 1906 nd 1908. paper.

278. Unity Triumphant. Elizabeth Herrick. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Company, 1923. cloth.

279. Universal Consciousness of the Bahá’í Religion, The. Charles Mason Remey. Firenze, Italy: Tipografia Sordamoti, 1925. paper and cloth.

280. Universal Principles of the Bahá’í Move- ment, Social, Economic, Governmental, The. Washington: The Persian-Ameri- can Bulletin, 1912. paper.

281. Universal Religion, The. E. T. Hall. NSA of the British Isles, 1927. paper.

282. Universal Religion: Bahaism, The. Hip- polyte Dreyfus. London: Cope & Fen- wick, 1909. Chicago: BPS, 1909. cloth.

283. Views of Acca, Haifa, Mount Carmel and Other Holy Places. Chicago: Behais Sup- ply and Publishing Board, n.d. Chicago: BPS, 1918. paper, cloth and leather.

284. What is a Bahai? J. E. Esslemont. Burn- side Ltd., n.d. Chicago: Louis Bourgeois, 1921. paper.

285. What Went Ye Out For to See? Thornton Chase. n.p. n.d. paper.

286. Whence Comes the Light? Loulie Mathews. New York: BPC, 1929. paper.

287. Whence? Why? Whither? Man! Things! Other Things! Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. Westwood, Mass.: The Ariel Press, G. E. Littlefield, 1907. cloth.

288. Whoso Readeth Let Him Understand. David. New York: n.d. paper.

289. Wine of Astonishment, The. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1963, 1970 and 1974. paper.

290. Wise Man From the East, A. Felicia R. Scratchard. The Unity Press, 1912. paper.

291. World Faith, A. New York: BPC, 1936. paper.

292. World of Abdul Baha, The. Mary Han- ford. New York: Reality Publishing Cor- poration, 1921. New York: J. J. Little & Ives, 1935 and n.d. also n.p. n.d.

293. Year With the Bahais of India and Burma, A. Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, 1908 and 1908. paper and cloth.

294. Za-Ti-Et Al-Lah; The Identity and the Personality of God. Ibrahim George Kheiralla. Chicago: Grant’s Printery, 1896. paper.

B. AN ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AUTHORS, COMPILERS AND TRANSLATORS OF BAHÁ’Í BOOKS AND BOOKLETS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE

Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader

Abbreviations A ‘Abdu’l-Bahá B-Bahá’u’lláh C-Compilations of the Writings of the Central Figures of the Faith S-Shoghi Effendi W-Writings on the Bahá’í Faith

Abu’l-Fadl, Abul Fazl, or Abul Fazel see Gul- Ameen’Ullah (Amínu’lláh Faríd) see Fareed, páygání, Mirza Abu’l-Fadl Abu’l Hussein, Mírzá-W-159 Afnán, Ruhi-W-45, 184 Mirza Ameen’Ullah Assad’Ullah, Mirza (Asadu’lláh)-W-121, 150, 231 Afrukhtih, Dr. Youness Khan (Dr. Yúnis Austin, Elsie-W-248 Khán Afrukhtih)W-36, 254 Agnew, Arthur S.-W-146, 147, 250 Alexander, Agnes-A-62; W-144, 205 Alkany, Muhammed Ali Muḥammad-’Alí Alkany-W-159 Backwell, Richard-W-90 Badi’ Ullah, Mirzá (Badi’u’lláh)-W-118 Bagdadi, Zia (Diyá Baghdádí)-W-175,267 Balyuzi, Hasan M.-W-4, 14, 72, 73, 116 Barney, Laura Clifford-A-45, 66; W-137 [Page 573]Bedikian, Victoria—C-33

Blomfield, Mary Esther—A-35, 63, 73

Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia—A-35, 63, 73

Blomfield, Lady Sara Louisa—A-35, 63, 73; S-43; W-88

Bourgeois, Louis—W-53

Bowes, Eric—W-138

Braun, Eunice—W-132

Brittingham, Isabella D.—W-149, 228

Brittingham, James F.—W-177

Browne, Edward Granville—A-64; W-258

Campbell, Helen W.—W-41, 50

Campbell, Myrtle W.—W-95

Carden, Hugh—W-70

Chamberlain, Isabel Fraser or Soraya—A-5, 6; C-41

Chanler, Julie—B-4

Chase, Thornton—W-46, 77, 143, 146, 285

Cheyne, Thomas Kelly—W-221

Christophil see Townshend, George

Claus, Ted—W-194

Cobb, Stanwood—W-87, 119, 165, 174, 219, 233, 264, 269

Collins, Amelia—C-22; W-268

Conrader, Jay and Constance—B-37

Cooper, Ella Goodall—W-97

Cox, Alice Simmons—C-22; W-218

David—W-288

Dawud, Johanna—A-33; C-53

Dealy, Paul Kingston—W-99

Dean, S. I.—W-123

Dodge, Arthur Pillsbury—W-192, 272, 287

Dreyfus, Hippolyte—W-282

Dunlop, Evangeline Elizabeth Crowell—W-79

Edge, Clara A.—W-255

Esphahani, Mírzá Aḥmád see Sohráb, Aḥmad

Esslemont, John Ebenezer—W-74, 75, 284

Esslemont, Peter—W-164

Esty, Frances—A-21

Faily, Dr. Jane et al—C-45, 46, 47

Faizi, Abu’l-Qásím—W-127, 179, 185, 262

Faizi, Gloria—W-22, 124

Fareed, Ameen’Ullah—B-8, 14; A-26; W-118, 121, 162, 231, 252

Fathea’zam, Hooshmand (Hushmand Fatheazam)—W-191

Ferraby, John—W-8, 203

Finch, Ida A.—W-129, 220

Fitzgerald, Col. Nathan Ward—W-195

Ford, Mary Hanford—W-202, 232, 292

Fozdar, Jamshid—W-85, 122, 151

Fozdar, Shirin—W-84

Gail, Marzieh—B-26; A-31, 42, 44; W-27, 100, 236

Garrida, Gertrude—S-18

Gaver, Jessyca Russell—W-25, 113

Giachery, Ugo—W-237

Gift, Maye Harvey—C-36; W-218

Goodall, Helen S.—W-97

‎Gregory Louis Gregory, Louis‎—W-142, 200, 225

Grundy, Julia M.—W-259

‎Gulpáygání) Gulpáygání,‎ Mírzá Abu’l-Fadl—W-44, 78, 83, 153

Haddad, Anton F. (Antún Haddád)—B-15; W-103, 172, 176

Hadi, Mírzá—W-252

Hall, Mrs. Basil—W-111

Hall, E. T.—W-173, 281

Hamadání, Mírzá Ḥusayn-i—W-258

Hammond, Eric—A-3; C-59

Haney, Mariam—C-51; W-141, 200

Hannen, Mr. & Mrs. Joseph H.—W-7

Harris, W. Hooper—W-160, 277

Haydar Ali, Haji Mirza (Ḥájí Mírzá Ḥaydar ‘Alí)—W-36

Herrick, Elizabeth—W-278

Hoagg, H. Emogene—W-226

Hofman, David—C-54; W-93, 225

Holley, Horace—A-17; C-20; W-37, 45, 49, 54, 207, 223, 239

Huddleston, John—W-115

Irwin, Beatrice—W-140

Ishteal Ibn Kalantar see Khán, ‘Alí Qulí

Ives, Howard Colby—W-208, 241

Jaxon, Honore J.—W-168

Jenabe Fazel (Jináb-i-Fáḍil-Mírzá Asadu’lláh Fáḍil) see Mazindarani, Mirza Jenabe Fazel

Johnson, L.—W-182, 216, 256

Kelsey, Olivia—C-2; W-275

Khán, ‘Alí Qulí or Ali Kuli—B-2, 3, 14, 24, 25, 26, 30, 31, 33, 26; A-47, 52; W-44, 78, 150

Kheiralla, Ibrahim George (Ibráhím George Khayru’lláh)—W-15, 294

Knobloch, Alma S.—W-129

Knobloch, Fanny A.—W-129

Latimer, George Orr—W-86, 226

Lucas, Mary L.—W-81

McDaniel, Allen Boyer—W-243

McKay, Doris—W-135

MacNutt, Howard—A-37, 38, 39; W-277

Marsella, Elena Maria—W-217

Mason, Barbara—C-39

Masson, Jean—W-171 [Page 574]Mathews, Loulie Albee—W-198, 249, 286 Maxwell, May—W-114 Mázindarání) Mírzá Jenabe Fazel—W-154, 155, 156, 157, 158 Meyer, Ray—W-26 Mills, Mountfort—C-51; W-133, 152 Moffett, Ruth Ellis—W-108, 109, 193 Momen, Moojan—W-110 Moneereh Khanum (Munírih Khánum)—W-117 Monever Khanum (Munavvar Khánum)—A-19 Movius, Mary Rumsey—A-30 Muhajer, Mrs. Iran F.—A-34 Mühlschlegel, Peter—W-13 Mutlagh, Hushidar—C-24 Nabíl-i-A’ẓam (Mullá Muḥammad-i-Zarandí)—W-98, 187 Nakhjavání) Violette—W-9 Norder, Cornelia A.—W-120 Paine, Mabel Hyde—C-32 Peeke, Margaret Bloodgood—W-186 Perigord, Emily McBride—W-266 Phelps, Myron H.—W-163 Pinchon, Florence E.—W-92 Platt, Beatrice Marion—A-35, 63, 73 Quigley, Robert—W-128 Rabb, Mary M.—A-13, 14 Rabbani, Rúḥíyyih Khánum—W-203, 209, 210, 244, 250, 273 Rabbani, Shoghi Effendi—see Shoghi Effendi Rastogi, Arjun—S-28 Remey, Charles Mason—W-11, 19, 29, 32, 33, 34, 35, 38, 39, 48, 52, 94, 96, 125, 126, 145, 148, 161, 169, 173, 178, 190, 196, 199, 201, 204, 214, 215, 224, 226, 227, 234, 263, 276, 279 Reynolds, Audrie—C-40 Root, Martha—W-257 Rosenberg, Ethel J.—W-80, 82 Rúḥíyyih Khánum see Rabbani, Rúḥíyyih Khánum Sabet, Huschmand—W-143 Sala, Emeric—W-261 Sanderson, Edith Roohie—W-159 Sassi, Gabriel—W-168 Scaramucci, Mrs.—W-47 Schaefer, Udo—W-167 Schopflocher, Lorol—W-251 Scratchard, Felicia R.—W-290 Sears, William—W-128, 136, 211, 222, 260, 289 Shoghi Effendi—B-5, 6, 7, 10, 17, 20, 35; ‎Bab-l Báb-1‎; S-passim; C-48, 49; W-98, 187 Shook, Glenn A.—W-185 Simpson, G. Palgrave—W-21, 80 Singh, Pritam—W-135 Skrine, Francis Henry—W-51 Sohráb, Aḥmad—A-7, 48, 51, 52, 58, 60, 68; W-2, 102, 117, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158 Sorabjee, Zena—W-187 Sprague, Sidney—B-12; W-247, 293 Stephens, Kenneth D.—W-238 Storey, Josephine D.—W-104, 105 Taherzadeh, Adib—W-229, 230, 270 Taherzadeh, Habib—B-34; Báb-2 Teherani, Abdel Karim Effendi (Abdu’l-Karím-i-Ṭihrání)—W-6 Thompson, Juliet—W-3, 5 Townshend, George—C-35; W-89, 139, 180, 212, 213 True, Corinne—W-197, 252 Truesdell, A. J.—W-23 Vail, Albert R.—W-42 Vail, Virgie V.—W-134 Waite, Louise R.—W-30, 31, 242 Ward, Allan L.—W-274 Watson, Albert Durant—W-112 Watson, Marie A.—W-183 Wegener, Daniel Nelson—W-106 Weil, Henry A.—W-91 Whitehead, O. Z.—W-240 Wilhelm, Roy—W-133, 152 Windust, Albert R.—A-54, 55, 56 Winterburn, Mr. & Mrs. George T.—W-254 Woolson, Gayle—W-107 Youness Khan see Afrukhtih, Dr. Youness Khan (Dr. Yúnis Khán Afrúkhtih) Zarandi, Muhammad-i- see Nabíl-i-Azam (Nabíl-i-A’ẓam; Mullá Muḥammad-i-Zarandí) [Page 575]

C. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF BAHÁ’Í CHILDREN’S LITERATURE IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE—1917–1979

Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader

1. Badí’. Kamal Ma’ani. NSA of Thailand, 1977. paper and boards.

2. Bahá’í Child’s ABC, A. Roberta K. Christian. il. Rochelle Boonshaft. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. 6th ptg. Wilmette: BPT, 1965. paper.

3. Bahá’í Child’s Song Book, A. verses Roberta K. Christian. music Eugene Babcock. il. E. Butler McHenry.

4. Bahá’í Founders. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1939. paper. (based on Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era).

5. Bahá’í Holy Days, Grades 1–9. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

6. Bahá’í Lesson Outline for Children. comp. Committee on Training and Teaching Children. 4 parts. New York: BPC, 1935. paper.

7. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade K: History, Progressive Revelation etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

8. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 1: History, Bahá’í Heroes etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

9. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 2: History, the Báb etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

10. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 3: History, Bahá’u’lláh etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

11. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 4: History, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

12. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 5: History, Shoghi Effendi etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

13. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 6: History, Hands of the Cause etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

14. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 7: History, Religions etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education: Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

15. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 8: History, Heroic Age of the Faith, etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

16. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 9: History, Formative Age of the Bahá’í Faith, etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.

17. Bahai Prayers for Children. n.p. n.d. (prayers from the 1929 USA prayer book). paper.

18. Bahá’í Prayers for Children. il. Jean Hutchinson.

19. Bahá’í Principles. comp. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper.

20. Bahá’í Puzzle Book for Young People from 8 to 80. National Child Education Committee of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands, 1974. paper.

21. Bahá’í Quotations on Education. National Child Education Committee of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands.

22. Bahá’í’s Around the World Grade K, Social Teachings, Bahá’í School ‎Lessons Lesson‎ Plans. Katherine Patton et al. Advisory Committee on Education. n.p. n.d. paper.

23. Bahá’í Teacher’s Handbook, Bahá’í School Lesson Plans Grade K. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1963. paper.

24. Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.

25. Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Pre-Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.

26. Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Intermediate. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.

27. Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, [Page 576]Teacher's Manual, Pre-Primary and Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.

28. Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Teacher's Manual, Intermediate. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.

29. Blessed is the Spot. Bahá’u’lláh. il. Anna Stevenson. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. hardcover.

30. Children's Course in Bahá’í Principles with Pictures to Color. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1939. paper.

31. Children's Stories from the Dawn-Breakers. Zoe Meyer. il. Carl Scheffler. Wilmette: BPT, 1955 and 1964. cloth.

32. Child's Prayer Book, A. Wilmette: BPC, 1942 and 1943. paper.

33. Child's Way. Child Education Committee. quarterly and bi-monthly. 1949 to date.

34. Coloring Book, Bahá’í Places Around the World. comp. Evelyn Musacchia. il. Dorrine Sadilek. National Child Education Committee of NSA of Hawaii, 1975. paper.

35. Comprehensive Study Outline for Children. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1940. Wilmette: BPC. paper.

36. Creation. illustrated. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.

37. Creative Plan of God, The. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1940. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.

38. Gift, The. Cynthia K. Walcott. il. Lynn Hutchinson Reynolds. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. cloth.

39. God and His Messengers. David Hofman. il. Geoffrey Rideout. Oxford: George Ronald, 1953, 1958 and 1967. il. Zohreh Zahra'i. Wilmette: BPT, 1973. cloth and paper.

40. Heroic Lives. Albert R. and Emily McClellan Vail. Boston: The Beacon Press, 1917. cloth.

41. Heroic Lives in Universal Religion, Teacher's Manual. Albert R. and Emily McClellan Vail. Boston: The Beacon Press, 1917 and 1928. cloth.

42. Junior's Book of Religion, A. Marguerite True. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper.

43. Kingdoms of God, The. Janet Lindstrom. il. Anna Stevenson. Wilmette: BPT, 1961. cloth.

44. Lessons in Religion. Mohammad Ali Alkany. trans. Edith Roohie Sanderson. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1923. paper.

45. Let Thy Breeze Refresh Them, Bahá’í Prayers and Tablets for Children. London: BPT, 1976. cloth.

46. Living Today for Tomorrow's World. Marguerite True. il. Jean Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1956.

47. Magazine of the Children of the Kingdom, The. quarterly. Dec. 1919 through the mid 1920's.

48. Magnified Be Thy Name. London: BPT, 1963. cloth.

49. Manual of Suggestions for Organizing a Bahá’í Children's Hour. Child Education Committee. ca. 1945.

50. Manual of Suggestions for Organizing a Children's Class. American Indian Service Committee. (1964). (Beatrice Bechtold).

51. O God Guide Me (A selection of Bahá’í Prayers). Wilmette: BPT, 1974. hardcover.

52. Principles of Child Education in the Bahá’í Faith, The. Wilmette: BPT.

53. Reading Supplement to a Bahá’í Picture-Coloring Book. NCEC of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands, 1971. by Evelyn Musacchia. paper.

54. Sing a New Song. il. Anna Stevenson. comp. Bahá’í Committee on Music.

55. Stories for Children. Jacqueline Mehrabi. London: BPT, 1970. paper.

56. Stories from the Dawn-Breakers. Zoe Meyer. il. Carl Scheffler. Wilmette: BPT. cloth.

57. Stories of Bahá’u’lláh as Told by Pokka. Betty Reed. il. John Hollins. London: BPT, paper.

58. Stories of the Master. National Child Education Committee of Alaska. Eileen Litterel & Katy Main. il. Katy Main. ed. Eugene B. Van Zanten. n.d. paper.

59. Study Course for Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper.

60. Suggested Materials for Teaching Children's Classes. comp. (Beatrice Bechtold). American Indian Service Committee, 1964. paper. [Page 577]61. Teacher's Handbook Volumes V and VI, Children's Classes; Crafts and Games, combined. ed. Advisory Committee on Education.

62. To Live the Life. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1938. paper.

63. Wonder Lamp, The. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, 1972. paper.

64. World Fellowship, A Universal Bahai News Letter of Consultation-Service for Orphans-Education of Destitute and Helpless Children. Montclair, N. J. Vol. I, 1923-.

65. Nine Holy Days. Jackie Mehrabi. London: BPT, 1975. paper.

D. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH-LANGUAGE BOOKS BY NON-BAHÁ’ÍS IN WHICH MENTION IS MADE OF THE BAHÁ’Í FAITH

Compiled by Maureen Thur

1. Abbott, Evlyn and Campbell, Lewis. Life of Benjamin Jowett. London: Murray, 1897. Vol. 2: p. 466.

2. Adams, Rev. Isaac. Persia By a Persian. n.p., 1900. pp. 453-490.

3. Addison, James Thayer. The Christian Approach to the Moslem. New York: Columbia University Press, 1942.

4. Algar, Hamid. Mirza Malkum Khān: a study in the history of Iranian modernism. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973. pp. 11, 46, 58-68, 213-16, 221-5, 227, 306.

5. ———. Religion and state in Iran, 1785-1906: the role of the Ulama in the Qajar period. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1969. pp. 136, 138-44, 146-51.

6. Allen, Cady H. The Message of the Book of Revelation. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1939. p. 188n.

7. Allen, Devere. The Fight for Peace. New York: Macmillan Co., 1930. pp. 619, 628.

8. Ali, Ameer. The Spirit of Islam. London: Christophers, 1922. pp. 357-359, 482.

9. Alter, S. Neale. Studies in Bahaism. Beirut: American Press, 1923.

10. Anderson, Norman. Christianity and comparative religion. Leicester: Intervarsity, 1970. pp. 9, 14, 48-9.

11. ———. The World's religions. Leicester: Intervarsity, 1950.

12. Anderson, Wing. Prophetic Years 1947-1953. Los Angeles: Kosmon Press, 1946. p. 103.

13. ———. Prophetic Years 1948-1954. Los Angeles: Kosmon Press, 1947.

14. ———. Seven Years That Changed the World, 1941-1948. Los Angeles: Kosmon Press, 1940. p. 15.

15. Andrews, Fannie Fern. The Holy Land Under Mandate. 2 vols. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1931. Vol I: pp. 200-201.

16. Anthony, A. P., ed. Year Book and Almanac of the Holy Land. Chicago: Holy Land Almanac, 1936.1

17. Arberry, Arthur John. Oriental Essays: Portraits of Seven Scholars. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1960. pp. 168-171.

18. ———. Shiraz, Persian City of Saints and Poets. Centers of Civilization Series, Book 2. Norman, Okla.: University of Oklahoma Press, 1960. pp. xii, 25-28.

19. Arguments with a Non-Catholic. Pulaski, Wis.: Franciscan Printer, 1959.

20. Armajani, Yahya. Iran. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1972. pp. 115-117.

21. ———. Middle East Past and Present. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1970. pp. 10, 42, 224, 252-254.

22. Armisadeghi, Hossein, ed. Twentieth Century Iran. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1977. pp. 2, 5, 80, 186, 187.

23. Arnold, Arthur. Through Persia by Caravan. New York: Harper & Bros., 1877. pp. 278-280.

24. Arnold, Matthew. Essays in Criticism. Chap. 7: A Persian Passion Play. London: Macmillan & Co., 1893. pp. 226-227; New York: A. L. Burt Co., n.d. pp. 166-167.

25. Aschner, Ernest and Server, Zachery. [Page 578]Journal to Israel, a Pictorial Guide. New York: Monde, 1956.

26. Ashbee, Charles Robert. A Palestine Notebook 1918-1923. Garden City, N.Y: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1923. pp. 116-120. Chap. 10: ‘Abbás, the Bahá’í

27. Atherton, Gertrude. Julia France and Her Times. New York: Macmillan Co., 1912. pp. 277-278, 280, 298.331.

28. Atkins, Gaius Glenn. Modern Religious Cults and Movements. New York: Fleming Revell, 1923. pp. 328-335.

29. Atkins, Gaius Glenn and Braden, C. S. Procession of the Gods. New York: Richard R. Smith, 1930. p. 451; London: Constable, 1931. New York: Harper & Bros., 1936.

30. Avery, Peter. Modern Iran. London: Ernest Benn, 1965 & 1967. pp. 44, 52-67, 76, 80, 81, 91, 97, 110, 114-115, 121, 132, 276, 277, 279, 469.

31. Ayres, Lew. Altars of the East. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., 1956. pp. 258-259.

32. Bach, Marcus. The Circle of Faith. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1957. pp. 47-83, 186, mention on dust cover.

33. Let Life Be Like This! New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1963. p. 195.

34. Report to the Protestants. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1948. pp. 180, 181, 184-185, 187, 191-192, 193, 199-200, 205, 212, 217, 218, 219, 231.

35. Shoghi Effendi, An Appreciation. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1958. Reprint of chap. 3, The Circle of Faith.

36. Strangers at the Door. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1971. pp. 74-95.

37. They Have Found a Faith. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1948. pp. 189-221, 229, mention on dust cover.

38. Baedekar, Karl. Baedekar's Palestine and Syria. London: Unwin, 1912.

39. Bahá’ísm. St. Louis, Mo.: Concordia Tract Mission, n.d. Pamphlet, 16 pp.

40. Bahm, Archie J. The World's Living Religions. New York: Dell Publishing Co., 1964. pp. 333-334, 356, 368.

41. Bakhash, Shaul. Iran: monarchy, bureaucracy and reform under the Qajars, 1858-1896. London: Ithaca Press, 1978. pp. 24, 324.

42. Ballou, Robert O. The Viking Portable Library World Bible. New York: 1944. pp. 448-449.

43. Barrows, John Henry. Christianity the World Religion. Chicago: A. C. McClurg & Co., 1897. pp. 38-39.

44. Barrows, Rev. John Henry, ed. The World's Parliament of Religions. 2 vols. Chicago: Parliament Publishing Co., 1893. Vol. 2: pp. 1125-1126.

45. Barton, George A. The Religions of the World. 4th ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937. p. 111.

46. Barton, James L. The Christian Approach to Islam. Boston: Pilgrim Press, 1918, pp. 197-200.

47. Baudouin, Charles. Contemporary Studies. Trans. E. and C. Paul. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1925. pp. 131-146. Chap. ‘Bahá’ísm. A Movement Toward the Community of Mankind’.

48. Bayne, E. A. Persian Kingship in Transition. New York: American Universities Field Staff, 1968. pp. 45-46, 247.

49. Bell, Archie. The Spell of the Holy Land. Boston: Page Co., 1915. pp. 258. 304-321. Full page photo: ‘Abbás Effendi, p. 304 facing page.

50. Bell, Lady, ed. The Letters of Gertrude Bell. London: Ernest Benn, 1927: New York: Boni & Liveright, 1927. Vol I: pp. 131-132.

51. Bell, Gertrude Lowthian. Syria the Desert and the Sown. London: W. Heinemann, 1907; New York: E. P. Dutton, 1907. pp. 148, 150, 193. Picture of Mishkín-Qalam, p. 149.

52. Ben-Horen, Eliahu. The Middle East: Crossroads to History. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 1943.

53. Benjamin, S. G. W. Persia and the Persians. Boston: Ticknor & Co., 1887. p. 353-355.

54. Bentwich, Norman. The Religious Foundations of Internationalism. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1933. pp. 178, 179.

55. A Wanderer in the Promised Land. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. 1933. p. 78-80. [Page 579]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

56. Bercorize, Zion. For Immediate Release. Sheridan House, 1936.

57. Berry, G. L. Religions of the World. New York: Harper & Row, Barnes & Noble Books, 1947 and 1956; reprinted., 1968. p. 126.

58. Bethmann, Erich W. Bridge to Islam. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1953. p. 162.

59. Bevington, Colin. New light from the East. London: Falcon Booklets, 1974. pp. 19-23.

60. Bibesco, Princess George V. (Marthe). The Eight Paradises. Trans. from French. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1923. pp. 31-36.

61. Binder, Leonard. Iran. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1962. pp. 74, 161-163, 243, 296.

62. Binning, Robert B. M. A Journal of Two Years' Travel in Persia, Ceylon, etc. 2 vols. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1857. Vol. I: pp. 403-408.

63. Bishop, Mrs. (Isabella L. Bird). Journeys in Persia and Kurdistan. 2 vols. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1891. Vol. I: p. 273.

64. Bishop, Peter D. Words in world religions. London: SCM Press, 1949. p. 120.

65. Bliss, Frederick Jones. Religions of Modern Syria and Palestine. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1912. pp. 19-20.

66. Blunt, Wilfred. A Persian Spring. London: James Barrie Brooks, 1957.

67. Boeckel, Florence Brewer. Between War and Peace. New York: Macmillan Co., 1928. pp. 102-103.

68. Bolitho, Hector. A Biographer's Notebook. New York: Macmillan Co., 1950. p. 22.

69. Boulton, Marjorie. Zamenhof, Creator of Esperanto. London: Routledge and Paul Kegan. pp. 211-212.

70. Bouquet, Alan Coates. Comparative Religion. Middlesex, England: Harmondsworth. Penguin Books, 1941. p. 283.

71. Sacred Books of the World. Middlesex, England: Harmondsworth, 1941. Penguin Books, 1954. pp. 310–312. Companion source-book to Comparative Religion.

72. Bowen, William C. The Church at Work in the Moslem World. University of Chicago Press, 1936.

73. Braden, Charles Samuel. Jesus Compared. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1957. p. 86.

74. Scriptures of Mankind. New York: Macmillan Co., 1952. pp. 472-473.

75. These Also Believe. New York: Macmillan Co., 1949. p. 464.

76. The World's Religions. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1939. p. 232.

77. Bradshaw, Jane. Eight major religions in Britain. London: Edward Arnold, 1979. pp. 155-70.

78. Brandow, S. G. F., ed. Dictionary of Comparative Religion. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1970. pp. 124-126.

79. Brick, Daniel and Riwkin-Brick, Anna. Palestine. Cleveland: World Publishing Co., 1949.

Reference: photo Shrine of Greatest Holy Leaf, Haifa; pages not numbered.

80. Brockelmann, Carl. History of the Islamic Peoples. Trans. Joel Carmichael and Moshe Perlmann. New York: Putman's, 1947. pp. 326, 424-427.

81. Broderick, Robert C. Historic Churches of the United States. New York: Wilfred Funk, 1958. pp. 186-190.

Photos Baha’i House of Worship, Wilmette, pp. 187, 189, 190.

82. Browne, Edward Granville. ‘Bahaism’ in Religious Systems of the World. London: Swan, Sonnerschein & Co., 1905. pp. 333-355.

83. A History of Persian Literature 1500-1924. Cambridge University Press, 1924.

This is Vol. 4 of A Literary History of Persia, same author.

84. A History of Persian Literature Under Tartar Dominion (A.D. 1265-1502). Cambridge University Press, 1920. pp. 432, 452, 470.

This is Vol 3. of A Literary History of Persia, same author.

85. A Literary History of Persia. 4 vols. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1924. passim. [Page 580]86. Materials for the Study of the Bábí Religion. Cambridge: Cambridge Uni- versity Press, 1918. passim.

87. A Persian Anthology. London: Methuen & Co., 1927. pp. 26, 38-40, 59-60, 68-73.

88.-

89. The Persian Revolution of 1905-1909. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1910. pp. xvi-xvii, xxii, 45, 60-62, 106-107, 148, 424-429.

Press and Poetry in Modern Per- sia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914. pp. 18, 59, 235-236, 294, 310.

90. A Year Amongst the Persians. London: A. & C. Black, 1893. passim.

91. Butler, Donald G. Many lights. London: Geoffrey Chapman, 1975. pp. 157-161.

92. Byng, Edward J. The World of the Arabs. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1944. pp. 270, 307.

93. Canney, Maurice. An Encyclopedia of Religions. London: Routledge, 1921. pp. 48-50.

94. Canney, J. E. Comparative Religions. London: Routledge, 1921.

95. Carpenter, Edward. Pagan and Christian Creeds: Their Origin and Meaning. New York: Blue Ribbon Books, 1920. pp. 153. 214-217; New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1920.

96 Carpenter, Joseph Estlin. Comparative Religion. New York: Henry Holt & Co., (1913). pp. 70-71, 188.

97. Carty, James W., Jr. Nashville as a World Religious Center.

98. Carus, Paul. Philosophy as a Science. Chicago: Open Court Publishing Co., 1909. p 98.

99. Cash, W. Wilson. Christiandom and Islam. New York: Harper & Bros., 1937. pp. 68. 133.

100. - The Expansion of Islam. London: Church Missionary Society, 1928. pp. 8, 117-121.

101. Cave, Sydney. An Introduction to the Study of Some Living Religions of the East. London: Duckworth & Co., 1921; New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1923. pp. 234-235.

102. Cavendish, Richard, ed. Man, Myth, & Magic. New York: Marshall Cavendish, 1970. Vol. 2: pp. 208-209.

103. Cheyne, Thomas Kelly. The Reconcilia- tion of races and religions. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1941.

104. Chirol, Sir Valentine. The Middle East- ern Question. London: J. Murray, 1903.

105. Christofferson, Gerda. From the Dusty Haunts of Man. Christofferson Enter- prises. chap. 7.

106. Christopher, John B. The Islamic Tradi- tion. New York: Harper & Rowe, 1972. pp. 83-85.

107. Clark, Elmer T. The Small Sects in America. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1937. pp. 29, 183.

108. Clawson, Mary. Letters from Jerusalem. London: Abelard-Schuman, 1957. p. 95.

109. Clemen, Prof. Carl. Religions of the World. Trans. Rev. A. K. Dallas. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1931. pp. 469-470.

110. Coke, Richard. The Heart of the Middle East. London: Thornton Butterworth, 1925. p. 211.

111. Comay, John. Israel: An Uncommon Guide. New York: Random House, 1969. pp. 257-258, 270-271.

112. Cottam, Richard W. Nationalism in Iran. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1979. pp. 87-89, 342, 357.

113. Cousins, Norman. Who Speaks for Man? New York: Macmillan Co., 1953. pp. 232, 234, 236-237, 239, 241.

114. Cowles, Alton House. The Conquering Horseman. Boston: Christopher Publish- ing House, 1923.

115. Cragg, Kenneth. The Call of the Minaret. New York: Oxford University Press, 1956. p. 133.

116. - The House of Islam. Encino, Calif.: Dickenson Publishing Co., 1975. p. 81.

117. Curtis, William Eleroy. To-Day in Syria and Palestine. Fleming Revell Co., 1903.

118. Curzon, George N. Persia and the Per- sian Question. 2 vols. London: Long- mans, Green & Co., 1892. Vol 1: pp. 43, 269, 414, 417, 496-504: Vol. 2: pp. 43, 103.

119. Cannavarro, Marie De S. Insight into the Far East. Los Angeles: Wetzel Publish- ing Co., 1925. pp. 156-157, 165, 168.

120. Daniel, Rabbi Mooshie G. Modern Per- sia. Wheaton: Wheaton College Press, [Page 581]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

Chapter titled 'BOBEISM'.

121. Das Gupta, Kedarneth. Essence of Reli- gions. New York: World Fellowship of Faiths, 1941. pp. 10, 135-139.

122. Davidson, Abraham A. The Story of American Paintings. New York: Harry N. Abrams Publishers, 1974. p. 140.

123. Davis, Rev. John Tyssul. A League of Religions. London: Lindsay Press, 1926. chap. 10.

124. De Lorey, Eustache and Sladen, Doug- las. Queer Things about Persia. Philadel- phia: Lippencott, 1907. pp. 268, 307-317.

125. Dennis, James S. The New Horoscope of Missions. New York: Fleming H. Revell, 1908. p. 94.

126. Dexter, Harriet Harmon. What's Right with Race Relations. New York: Harper Bros., 1958. pp. 195-196.

127. Dilling, Elizabeth. The Red Network. Kenilworth, Ill.: By the Author, 1934. p. 128.

128. Dodd, Edward M. and Fose, Wilson Dodd. Mecca and Beyond. Committee on United Study of Foreign Missions.

129. Donaldson, Dwight M. The Shi'ite Relig- ion. London: Luzac Co., 1933.

130. Dooley, Dr. Tom. Dr. Tom Dooley's Three Great Books: Deliver Us from Evil, The Edge of Tomorrow, The Night They Burned the Mountain. New York: Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, n.d. pp. 308-309.

131. The Night They Burned the Mountain. New York: Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1960. pp. 87-88.

132. Dos Passos, John. Journeys between Wars. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1939.

133. Douglas, William O. Strange Lands and Friendly People. New York: Harper & Bros., 1951. p. 51.

134. West of the Indus. New York: Doubleday & Co., 1958. pp. 254, 272, 279-280, 417-418, 427.

135. Drake, Durant. Problems of Religion. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1916. pp. 211, 231.

136. Dubin, Joseph W. The Green Star. Philadelphia: National Institute of Esperanto, 1944.

137. Dunning, H. W. To-Day in Palestine. New York: James Pott & Co., 1907. pp. 164-166.

138. Dutcher, George M. Modern Persia, Vol. 5 in The History of Nations. 25 vols. Henry Cabot Lodge, gen. ed. New York: P. F. Collier & Son Co., 1928. pp. 362-363, 401.

139. Eddy, (George) Sherwood. God in His- tory. New York: Association Press, 1947. p. 169.

140. . A Portrait of Jesus. New York: Harper & Bros., 1943.

141. Edelman, Lily. Israel. Edinburgh: Thomas Nelson & Sons, 1958. p. 42.

142. New People in a New Land. New York: Thomas Nelson & Sons, n.d. p. 42.

143. Edwards, Arthur Cecil. A Persian Cara- van. New York: Harper & Bros., 1928. pp. 14-23.

144. Ehrenpreis, Marcus. The Soul of the East. New York: Viking Press, 1928. p. 206.

145. Ellis, Harry B. Heritage of the Desert. New York: Ronald Press, 1956.

146. Ellwood, Charles A. The Reconstruction of Religion. New York: Macmillan Co., 1922.

147. Ellwood, Robert S. Religious and spiritual groups in modern America. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1973. pp. 275-81.

148. Elwell-Sutton, Laurence Paul. Modern Iran. London: George Rutledge Sons, 1941; reprint 1942.

149. Emanuel, W. V. The Wild Asses, a Jour- ney Through Persia. London: Jonathan Cape, 1939. pp. 88, 109.

150. Emerson, Edwin, Jr. A History of the Nineteenth Century Year by Year. 3 vols. New York: P. F. Collier & Son, 1900. Vol. 2: p. 1131.

151. Eskelund, Karl. Behind the Peacock Throne. London: Alvin Redman, 1965. pp. 75-85.

152. Farah, Caesar E. Islam Beliefs and Observances. Woodbury, N.Y.: Barron's Educational Series, 1970. pp. 220, 243-248.

153. Ferguson, Charles W. The Confusion of Tongues. Garden City, N.Y.: Double- day, Doran & Co., 1928. pp. 13, 231-250, 450-451.

154. The New Books of Revelation. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran & [Page 582]Co., 1929. pp. 13, 231-250, 450-451. Same as above, retitled.

155. Ferguson, John. War and Peace in the World's Religions. New York: Oxford University Press, 1978. pp. 149-155.

156. Ferre, Nels Frederick Solomon. Know Your Faith. New York: Harper Bros., 1959. p. 34.

157. Filmer, Henry (pseud. for James Rives Childs). The Pageant of Persia. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1936. pp. 28, 196-200, 202-203.

158. Fitch, Florence Mary. Allah, the God of Islam. New York: Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., 1950. p. 136.

159. Forbes, Murray. Hollow Triumph. Chicago: Ziff-Davis Publishing Co., 1947. pp. 215, 233-234, 267.

160. Forlong, Major General J. G. R. Faiths of Man, A Cyclopaedia of Religions. 3 vols. London: Bernard Quaritch, 1906. Vol 1: pp. 223-224.

161. Forman, Henry James and Gammon, Roland. Truth is One. New York: Harper & Bros., 1954. pp. 218-222. Photographs: Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, p. 218; Dr. Hushang Javid and Horace Holley, p. 218.

162. Fradenburgh, J. N. Living Religions; or the Great Religions of the Orient. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe, 1888. pp. 476-477.

163. Frye, Richard N. The Heritage of Persia. Cleveland, O.: World Publishing Co., n.d. p. 212.

164. Iran. New York: Henry Holt & Co., 1953. pp. 11, 66.

165. Gairdner, W. H. T. The Reproach of Islam. London: Student Volunteer Missionary Union, 1909. p. 351.

166. Gartler, Marion; Laikin, Judith; and Hall, George. Understanding Israel. Sacremento, Calif.: California State Series, 1964. Colour photo, Shrine of the Bab, on cover.

167. Geden, Alfred S. Studies in Comparative Religion. London: Charles H. Kelly, 1898. pp. 291-300.

168. Gellhorn, Eleanor Cowles. McKay's Guide to the Middle East. New York: David McKay Co., 1965. pp. 160-161.

169. Gibb, Hamilton Alexander Rosskeen. Mohammedanism: An Historical Survey. London: Oxford University Press, 1949. pp. 164, 186.

170. Gibran, Kahlil and Jean. Kahlil Gibran. Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1947. pp. 273, 287-288. Pencil drawing of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá done by Kahlil Gibran in 1912, p. 288.

171. Gibbons, Herbert Adams. et al. Great Religions of the World. New York: Harper & Bros., 1901. pp. 187-215; rev. ed., 1912. pp. 187-215. Pages cited: BABISM by E. Dennison Ross. New preface in 1912, revised edition.

172. Gordon, General Sir Thomas Edward. Persia Revisited. London: E. Arnold, 1896. pp. 81-91.

173. Grabbe, Paul. The Story of Orchestral Music and Its Times. New York: Grosset & Dunlop, 1942. p. 68.

174. Gratus, Jack. The False Messiahs. New York: Tarplinger Publishing Co., 1976. pp. 209-211.

175. Green, Gerald. The Stones of Zion. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1971. pp. 305-307, 318.

176. Green, Phillip Leonard. Pan-American Progress. New York: Hastings House, 1942.

177. Groseclose, Elgin. Introduction to Iran. New York: Oxford University Press, 1947. p. 14.

178. Gruber, Ruth. Israel Today, Land of Many Nations. New York: Hill & Wang, 1958. p. 17.

179. Guérard, Dr. Albert Léon. Education of a Humanist. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1949. p. 250.

180. Haas, William S. Iran. New York: Columbia University Press, 1946. pp. 90-91.

181. Hadley, Earl J. Magic Powder. New York: Putnam, 1945. pp. 200-201. Frontis: Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette; facing page 197, photo House of Worship detail.

182. Haines, Charles Reginald. Islam as a Missionary Religion. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1889.

183. Hall, William H. The Near East: Crossroads of the World. New York: Interchurch Press, 1920. p. 66. [Page 583]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

184. Hamilton, Elizabeth. Put Off Thy Shoes. New York: Scribner's, 1957. p. 86.

185. Handley-Taylor, Geoffrey, comp. Bibliography of Iran. Chicago: St. James Press, 1969. pp. 107, 108, 109.

186. Harris, Warren G. Gable and Lombard. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1974. pp. 137, 153.

187. Harrison, Marguerite Elton (Baker). There's Always Tomorrow. New York: Farrar & Rhinehart, 1935. p. 644.

188. Harry, Myriam. A Springtide in Palestine. Boston: Houghton Miffin, 1924. pp. 25-26.

189. Hart, Walter C. First Course in Algebra. Boston: D. C. Heath, 1947. p. 76.

190. Hartman, William C., comp. and ed. Hartman's Who's Who in Occult, Psychic and Spiritual Realms. New York: Occult Press, 1925. pp. 17, 33, 85-87, 165, 187.

191. Who's Who in Occultism, New Thought, Psychism and Spiritualism. Jamaica, N.Y.: Occult Press, 1927. pp. iv, vi-viii, 1-2, 7, 11, 13, 16, 18, 39, 51-52, 58, 60, 77, 177, 226, 230, 235, 241, 251-253.

192. Hasan-E-Fasa-i. History of Persia under Qajar Rule-Farsnama-Ye Naseri. Trans. Heribert Busse. New York: Columbia University Press, 1972. pp. 277, 290-294, 302-304.

193. Hayes, Carlton Joseph Huntley. A Political and Cultural History of Modern Europe. 2 vols. New York: Macmillan Co., 1939. Vol. 2: p. 450.

194. Hertz, Rabbi Richard C. Jewish Life Today. Detroit: Temple Beth El, 1962.

195. Higgins, Harold H. Shadows to the Unseen. Montpelier, Vt.: Driftwood Press, 1937.

196. Hilu, Virginia. Beloved Prophet-The Love Letters of Kahlil Gibran and Mary Haskell and Her Private Journal. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1972. pp. 74, 77.

197. Hitti, Phillip K. The Near East in History. Princeton, N.J.: D. Van Nostrand Co., 1961. pp. 391, 403-407.

198. Hocking, William Ernest. Living Religions and a World Faith. New York: Macmillan Co., 1940. pp. 180, 212.

199. Hocking, William Ernest; Blanshard, Brand; Hendel, Charles W.; and Randall, John H., Jr. Preface to Philosophy Textbook. New York: Macmillan Co., 1947. p. 399.

200. Hodgson, Marshall G. The Order of the Assassins. The Hague, Netherlands: Mouton & Co., 1955. pp. 276, 291.

201. Hoffman, Daniel P. India's Social Miracle. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Co., 1961. pp. 39, 68, 95.

202. Holiday Magazine Travel Guide, Israel. New York: Random House, 1973. pp. 91, 94.

Photo of Shrine of the Báb and International Archives Building, page, 91.

203. Holisher, Dersider. The House of God. New York: Crown Publishers, 1946. p. 171.

Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, page 171.

204. Holmes, John Haynes. Palestine To-Day and To-Morrow. New York: Macmillan Co., 1929. pp. 33-36.

205. Hoople, Ross E. et al. Preface to Philosophy: Book of Readings. New York: Macmillan Co., 1946. pp. 308, 312, 379-384.

206. Hoover, W. I. T. Religionisms and Christianity. Boston: Stratford Co., 1924. pp. v, 165-178.

207. Hopkins, E. Washburn. The History of Religions. New York: Macmillan Co., 1918. pp. 479, 482.

208. Houghton, Walter R. ed. Neely's History of the Parliament of Religions and Religious Congresses at the World's Columbian Exposition. Chicago: F. T. Neely, 1893. pp. 640-641.

209. Howe, Mark Anthony De Wolfe, comp. Holmes-Pollack Letters, 1874-1932. 2 vols. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1941. Vol. 1: p. 206.

210. . John Jay Chapman and His Letters. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1937. p. 260.

211. Howells, Rulon S. Do Men Believe What Their Church Prescribes. Salt Lake City, Utah: Desert Book Co., 1932. p. 160.

212. Howen, Herbert H. Asia, a Short History from Earliest Times to the Present. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1936.

213. Huart, Clément. A History of Arabic Literature. London: W. Heinemann, 1903; New York: D. Appleton & Co., 1903. p. 212. [Page 584]214. Hubbard, Elbert. Hollyhocks and Golden Glow. East Aurora, N.Y.: Roycrofters, 1912. pp. 21-40.

215. Selected Writings. Vol. 10: Hundred-Point Men. East Aurora, N.Y.: Roycrofters, 1922. pp. 320-332. Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 320.

216. Hughes, Thomas Patrick. Dictionary of Islam. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1865.

217. Hume, Robert Ernest. The World's Living Religions. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1924. p. 212.

218. Hume-Griffith, M. E. Behind the Veil in Persia and Turkish Arabia. London: Seeley & Co., 1909.

219. Hunter, Stanley Armstrong. Temple of Religion and Tower of Peace. San Francisco: Temple of Religion and Tower of Peace, 1940. pp. 10, 54, 85.

220. Hurgronje, C. Snouck. Mohammedanism. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons.

221. Iqbal, Sir Mohammad. The Reconstruction of Religious Thought in Islam. Lahore: Muhammad Ashraf, 1958. p. 152.

222. Israel Ministry for Foreign Affairs, Information Department. The Arabs in Israel. Jerusalem, April 1961.

223. Jackson, A. V. Williams. Persia, Past and Present. London: Macmillan & Co., 1906. pp. 28, 48-50, 119, 273, 328, 376.

224. Jackson, Stanley. pseud. (Samuel). The Sassoons. London: William Heinemann, 1968.

225. Jacobsen, Ernst Ludwig Harthern. Going Home. London: Jarrolds, 1938.

226. Jacoby, F. J., ed. The Anglo-Palestine Year Book 1947-1948. London: Anglo-Palestine Publications.

227. Jessup, Henry Harris. Fifty-three Years in Syria. 2 vols. New York: Fleming Revell, 1910. Vol. 1: p. 329; Vol. 2: pp. 605, 636-638.

228. Jewett, Mary. Reminiscences of My Life in Persia. Cedar Rapids, Ia.: Torch Press, 1909.

229. Jiggetts, J. Ida. Israel to Me, a Negro Social Worker, Inside Israel. New York: Bloch Publishing Co., 1957. pp. 90, 92.

230. Jones, L. Bevan. The People of the Mosque. Calcutta, India: Association Press, Y.M.C.A., 1932. pp. 141-146.

231. Jordan, Rev. F. M. The Muhammadan World of Today. 1929.

232. Kahn, E. J., Jr. Who, Me? New York: Harper, 1949. p. 179.

233. Kamshad, Hassan. Modern Persian Prose Literature. Cambridge: University Press, 1966. pp. 48, 51, 194.

234. Keddie, Nikki R. An Islamic Response to Imperialism. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1968. pp. 10-11, 30, 43, 158.

235. Religion and Rebellion in Iran. London: Frank Cass & Co., 1966. pp. 56, 71, 72, 102, 107-109, 113, 132, 136, 143, 144.

236. Sayyid Jamal Ad-Din ‘Al-Afghani’. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1972. pp. 19-22.

237. Kellett, E. E. A Short History of Religions. London: Victor Gollancz, 1948.

238. Kennedy, J. M. The Religions and Philosophies of the East. London: Werner Laurie, 1911.

239. Keyserling, Hermann. The Travel Diary of a Philosopher. 2 vols. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1925. Vol. 1: pp. 160, 178; Vol. 2: p. 273.

240. Kohn, Hans. A History of Nationalism in the East. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1929. pp. 31-36, 430.

241. Kolarz, Walter. Religion in the Soviet Union. London: Macmillan & Co., 1966. pp. 470-473, 497; New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1961. Mention on dust cover, back.

242. Kirkland, Winifred. As Far as I Can See. New York: Scribner's, 1936.

243. Kirkpatrick, Clifford. Religion in Human Affairs. London: John Wiley & Sons, 1929. pp. 212, 291, 307, 487.

244. Kisch. Col. Frederick Hermann. Palestine Diary. London: V. Gollancz, 1938.

245. Kohn, Hans. A History of nationalism in the east. Grosse Point, Mich.: Scholarly Press, 1969. pp. 15, 20, 31-34, 320, 328.

246. Kuwaldo, Boris and Fyuel, T. R. This is Israel. North Dakota: Bruno Cassirer.

247. Lammens, Henri. Islam Beliefs and Institutions. Trans. E. Dennison Ross fr. the French. London: Methuen & Co., 1929; New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1929. pp. 189-196; New York: Stokes, 1930.

248. Landor, A. Henry Savage. Across [Page 585]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

Coveted Lands. 2 vols. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1903. Vol. 1: p. 391.

249. Landis, Benson Y. Religion in the United States. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1965. pp. 3-4, 104.

250. World Religions. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1957. pp. 24-25.

251. Lavan, Spencer. The Ahmadiyah Movement. New Delhi: Manonar Book Service.

252. Lenczowski, George. The Middle East in World Affairs. New York: Cornell University Press, 1956. pp. 205, 374.

253. Levi, Avraham. Bazak Guide to Israel, 1977-1978. New York: Harper & Row, 1977. pp. 285, 299, 307, 311, 322, 327. Colour photo of Shrine of the Báb, page 314; colour photo of Shrine, pages 296-297; drawing of Shrine of the Báb, page 302.

254. Levy, Reuben. The Social Structure of Islam. London: Cambridge University Press, 1957. p. 39.

255. Lewis, John. The Religions of the World Made Simple. New York: Doubleday & Co., 1958. p. 90.

256. Ling, Trevor. A History of Religion East and West. London: Macmillan & Co., 1968. pp. 388-389.

257. Linklater, Eric. The Man on My Back. London: Macmillan & Co., 1941. pp. 137-138.

258. Linton, Bishop J. H. Persian Sketches. London: Church Missionary Society, 1923.

259. Longrigg, Stephen H. The Middle East. London: G. Duckworth, 1963; Chicago: Aldine Publishing Co., 1963; rev. ed., 1970. p. 95.

260. Lorimer, John Gordon. Gazetteer of the Persian Gulf, 'Oman, and Central Arabia. 6 vols. Vol. 1 Historical, part 2: pp. 2350, 2356, 2384-2385.

261. Lukach, Harry Charles. The Fringe of the East. London: Macmillan & Co., 1913. See: Luke, Harry Charles Joseph.

262. Luke, Sir Harry (Charles Joseph). A Portrait and an Appreciation, Cyprus. London: George G. Harrap & Co., 1957. pp. 122-123.

263. Luke, Harry Charles (Joseph) and Keith-Roach, Edward. The Handbook of Palestine. London: Macmillan & Co., 1922. pp. 33, 58-59, 105, 107.

264. Lumby, Christopher. Cook's Traveller's Handbook to Palestine, Syria and Iraq. London: Simpkin Marshall, 1934. pp. 248, 254.

265. Lytton, Noel Anthony Scawen Wilfred. Scawen Blunt, a Memoir. London: Macdonald & Co., 1961.

266. McDaniel, Robert A. The Shuster Mission and the Persian Constitutional Revolution. Minneapolis, Minn.: Bibliotheca Islamica, 1974. p. 54.

267. MacIntosh, Douglas Clyde. The Pilgrimage of Faith. Calcutta, India: University of Calcutta, 1931. p. 33.

268. McKibben-Harper, Mary, M.D. The Doctor Takes a Holiday. Cedar Rapids, Ia.: Torch Press, 1941.

269. MacMunn, Lt. Gen. Sir George. The Religions and Hidden Cults of India. New York: Macmillan Co., 1932. p. 200.

270. Mahmud, Sayyid Fayyaz. The Story of Islam. London: Oxford University Press, 1959. p. 290.

271. Malcolm, Napier. Five Years in a Persian Town. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1907.

272. Markham, Clements Robert. A General Sketch of the History of Persia. London: Longmans, Green & Co., 1874.

273. Marlowe, John. Iran a Short Political Guide. New York: Praeger, 1963. pp. 9, 104.

274. Martin, Alfred (Wilhelm). Comparative Religion and the Religion of the Future. New York: Appleton & Co., 1926. pp. 81-91.

275. Martin, Walter R. The Kingdom of the Cults. Minneapolis: Bethany Fellowship, 1965; rev. ed., July 1968. pp. 252-258, 351, 438.

276. Mason, Myra. Where Do You Belong? Philadelphia: Fellowship of Divine Truth, 1939.

277. Massé, Henri. Islam. Trans. Halide Edib fr. the French. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1938. pp. 217, 248, 255-259.

278. Mathews, Shailer and Smith, Gerald Birney. A Dictionary of Religion and Ethics. Chicago: Christian Century Press, 1922. p. 46.

279. Mathison, Richard R. Faiths, Cults and Sects in America. New York: Bobbs- [Page 586]Merrill, 1960. pp. 104-106.

280. Matthews, Joseph Brown and Duvall, Sylvanus M. Conflict or Cooperation. New York: American Committee, World Youth Congress, 1928.

281. Maud, Constance E. Sparks among the Stubble. London: P. Allen & Co., 1924. pp. 26-27, 81-112. Portrait of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá facing page 83.

282. Mead, Frank S. Handbook of Denominations in the United States. New York: Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1951. pp. 24-25, 185; 5th ed.: Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1970. pp. 29-31, 221, 237.

283. Means, I. and L. E. Creative Energy. London: John Murray, 1931.

284. Melton, J. Gordon. The Encyclopedia of American religions. Wilmington, N.C.: McGrath, 1978. vol. 2: pp. 351-354.

285. Miller, Herbert A. The Beginning of Tomorrow. New York: F. A. Stokes, 1932.

286. Miller, Janet. Camel Bells of Baghdad. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1934. pp. 218, 220, 264.

287. Miller, Milton G. and Schwartzman, Sylvan D. Our Religion and Our Neighbors. New York: Union of American Hebrew Congregations, 1963. pp. 6, 209-210, 273.

288. Miller, William McElwee. The Bahá’í Faith: its history and teachings. South Pasadena: William Carey Library, 1974.

289. . Bahaism: Its Origin, History and Teachings. New York: Fleming Revell Co., 1931.

290. - What is the Bahá’í Faith? Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1977.

291. Mills, Lady Dorothy. Beyond the Bosphorus. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1926. pp. 97-100.

292. Modern Art in the U.S.A. New York: Knopf, 1956. p. 263.

293. Montagu, Edwin Samuel. An Indian Diary. Edited By V. Montagu. London: Heinemann, 1930.

294. Moore, George Foot. History of Religions. 2 vols. New York: Scribner’s Sons, 1919. Vol. 2: pp. 509-519.

295. Mott, Francis John. Christ the Seed. Boston: A. A. Beauchamp, 1939; London: Gate Publishing Co., 1939.

296. Mounsey, Augustus H. A Journey through the Caucasus and the Interior of Persia. London: Smith, Elder & Co., 1872. pp. 103-107.

297. Mumford, Lewis. The Conduct of Life. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1951. p. 117.

298. Nakosteen, Mehdi and Kragh, Agnes. In the Land of the Lion and the Sun. The Country, Customs and Cultures of My People. Denver: World Press, 1937. pp. 79-80.

299. Nariman, G. K. Persia and Parsis. Bombay, 1925.

300. Nasr, Seyyed Hossein. Iran (Persia). Tehran: Offset Press, 1973.

301. - Islam and the Plight of Modern Man. London: Longman, 1975. pp. 118, 119.

302. Newman, Edward M. Seeing Egypt and the Holy Land. New York: Funk & Wagnalls Co., 1928. pp. 164-165, 204. Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 204.

303. Nicholson, Reynold A. The Mystics of Islam. Beirut, Lebanon: Khayats, 1966. p. 89.

304. Norden, Herman. Under Persian Skies. Philadelphia: Macrae, Smith Co., n.d. pp. 51-52, 127, 208, 226-227, 243.

305. Noss, John B. Man’s religions. New York: Macmillan, 1949. p. 556.

306. Nweeya, Samuel Kasha. Persia and the Moslems. St. Louis: Press of Von Hoffmann, 1924. pp. 148-170. Pages cited, 'BABISM'.

307. - Persia the Land of the Magi. Indianapolis: S. K. Nweeya, 1904. pp. 81-96 (chap. 11: 'The Kurds and Bobs'); Philadelphia: S. K. Nweeya, 1907. pp. 110-115 (chap. 11: 'The Kurds and Bobs'); Philadelphia: S. K. Nweeya, 1916. pp. 226-248 (chap. 12: 'Babism, Its Relation to Mohammedism and Christianity').

308. Official Guide (Panama-Pacific International Exposition, San Francisco, 1915). Wahlgreen Co., 1915. p. 61.

309. O’Leary, DeLacy Evans. Islam at the Crossroads. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1923; New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1923.

310. Oliphant, Laurence. Haifa, or Life in Modern Palestine. Edinburgh: William [Page 587]Blackwood, 1887; New York: Harper & Bros., 1887. pp. 103-107. Pages cited titled: "The Babs and Their Prophet".

311. Orizu, Akweke Abyssinia Nwafor. Without Bitterness. New York: Creative Age Press, 1944.

312. Orni, Ephraim and Efrat, Elisha. Geography of Israel. Jerusalem: Israel Program for Scientific Translations, 1966. pp. 217-218. Photo of Shrine of the Bab, page 218.

313. Ovington, Mary White. The Walls Came Tumbling Down. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1947. pp. 125-127.

314. Palestine. London: Ernest Benn, 1934.

315. Palmer, Edward Henry. Oriental Mysticism. London: Luzac & Co., 1938. p. 44.

316. Parrinder, E. Geoffrey. A Book of World Religions. Amersham: Hulton Educational, 1965.

317. Comparative Religion. New York: Macmillan Co., 1962. pp. 23, 82, 108.

318. A Dictionary of non-Christian religions. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1971. pp. 7, 38-39.

319. What World Religions Teach. London: George G. Harrap, 1968. pp. 107-109, 140, 190.

320. Parrish, Maude. Nine Pounds of Luggage. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Co., 1939. pp. 368-373.

321. Pemberton, Lovell Bearse. A Modern Pilgrimage to Palestine. Philadelphia: Dorrance & Co., 1925. pp. 67, 73, chaps, 9, 10 & 11 (pp. 74-104), 149, 156, 189 chap. 26 (pp. 190-197), 263-264. Illustrations: drawing of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, Louis Bourgeois’ model, dust cover and frontispiece; Garden of ‘Rizwan, Near Haifa’, p. 92; ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, p. 100.

322. Petersen, William J. Those Curious Cults. New Canaan, Conn.: Keats Publishing, pp. 181-190, 213.

323. Phelps, Vivian. Concerning Progressive Revelation. London: Watts & Co., 1936. p. 105.

324. Piggot, John. Persia—Ancient and Modern. London, 1874.

325. Pike, E. Royston. Encyclopaedia of Religion and Religions. New York: Meridian Books, 1958. pp. 42-43.

326. Ethics of the Great Religions. London: Watts & Co., 1948. pp. 212-213.

327. Pole, Wellesey Tudor. Private Dowding. New York: Dodd, Mead & Co., 1919. pp. 74-75.

328. The Silent Road. London: Neville Spearman, 1960. pp. 24-26, 75-80, 90.

329. Some Deeper Aspects of the War. Bristol, England: Taylor Bros., 1914.

330. Writing on the Ground. London: Neville Spearman, 1968. pp. 135-165, 172, mention on flap of dust cover. Photo ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, facing page 135.

331. Pole, Wellesey Tudor and Lehmann, Rosamond. A Man Seen from Afar. London: Neville Spearman, 1965. pp. 53, 77.

332. Port, Weimer. Chicago the Pagan. Chicago: Judy Publishing Co., 1953. pp. 167-168.

333. Potter, Charles Francis. The Faiths Men Live By. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1954. pp. 307-308.

334. Prather, Nelson, ed. Who’s Who in Hawaii. Honolulu, T.H.: Midpac Publishers, 1947. p. 10.

335. Price, Willard. Adventures in Paradise. New York: John Day, 1955. pp. 180-181.

336. Radford, Ruby L. Many Paths to God. Wheaton, Ill.: Theosophical Publishing House, 1970. pp. 2, 122-125, 127. Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, page 23.

337. Radhakrishnan, Sir Sarvepalli. Eastern Religions and Western Thought. New York: Oxford University Press, 1959. p. 340.

338. Rand. Abby. The American Traveller's Guide to Israel. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1972. pp. 13, 74, 199. Photo of Shrine of the Bab, page 196.

339. Rasooli, Jay M. and Allen, Cady H. The Life Story of Dr. Sa’eed of Iran. Grand Rapids: Grand Rapids International Publications, 1958. pp. 90. 92, 103, 115.

340. Reeder, Paul A. Introduction to Philosophy. Lucas Bros., 1960.

341. Reinach, Salomon. A History of Religions. Trans. fr. the French, London: G. P. Putnam Sons, 1909.

342. Religious Bodies 1916. 2 vols. [Page 588]Washington, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1919. Vol. 1: pp. 36, 74, 78, 142, 154-155, 164-165, 182-183, 184-185, 198-199, 202-203, 208-209, 214-215, 228-229, 232-233, 358-359, 378-379, 380-381, 430-431, 448-449, 478-479, 490-491, 494-495, 512-513, 526-527; Vol, 2: pp. 43-45.

343. Religious Bodies 1926. 2 vols, Washing- ton, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1930. Vol. 1: pp. 10, 82-83, 92, 97, 102, 112, 117, 122-123, 148-149, 166-167, 192-193, 194-195, 216-217, 220-221, 230-231, 270-271, 276-277, 296-297, 360, 369, 374, 378, 381, 389, 392, 394, 406, 408, 446, 451, 457, 468, 470, 472, 475, 477, 482, 486, 490, 496, 502, 507, 510, 515, 521, 536, 540,548,563,572,573; Vol. 2: pp. 70-76.

344. Religious Bodies 1936. 3 vols. Washing- ton, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1941. Vol. 1: pp. 12, 86-87, 98, 104, 110, 116, 126, 136-137, 146-147, 176-177, 190-191, 198-199, 224-225, 226-227, 232-233, 248-249, 254-255, 264-265, 300-301, 306-307, 314-315, 316-317, 350-351, 440, 442, 448, 455, 461, 464, 466, 470, 472, 480, 483, 485, 488, 490, 497, 499, 502, 505, 515, 520, 528, 542, 546, 553, 555, 560, 564, 565, 566, 568 574, 581, 584, 585, 589, 592, 594, 595, 600, 605, 610, 617, 621, 623, 626, 630, 632, 634, 635, 640, 646, 652, 653, 655, 659, 666, 669, 673, 678, 679, 681, 686, 691, 692, 700, 713, 715; Vol. 2, pt. 1: pp. 76-82.

345. Rice, C. Colliver. Persian Women and Their Ways. London: Seeley Service, 1923. pp. 21, 24, 155-156, 275-276.

346. Rice, Clara C. Mary Bird in Persia. Lon- don: Church Missionary Society, 1916. pp. 37-40, 71, 102, 107, 143, 191.

347. Rice, Edward. Eastern definitions: a short encyclopedia of religions of the Orient. Garden City: Doubleday, 1978. pp. 45-46.

348. Ten Religions of the East. New York: Four Winds Press, 1978. pp. 2-3, 127, 133-141.

349. Richards, Fred. A Persian Journey. New York: Jonathon Cape & Harrison Smith, 1932.

London: Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge, 1932.

351. Robertson, John M. Pagan Christs. Lon- don: Watt & Co., 1911. pp. xvi-xviii.

352. Rodford, Ruby L. Many Paths to God. Wheaton: Theosophical Publishing House, 1970. pp. 122-125.

353. Ross, Sir Edward Dennison. Both Ends of the Candle. London: Faber & Faber, 1943.

354. - The Persians. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1931. pp. 67-69, 75, 76.

355. Ross, Emory and Myrta. Africa Dis- turbed. New York: Friendship Press, 1959.

356. Rowley, Peter. New Gods in America. New York: David McKay Co., 1971. pp. 3, 8, 12-17, 205.

357. Rudhyar, Dane. Astrological Timing. New York: Harper & Row, Harpe Calophon Books, 1972, pp. 42, 53, 63-64, 109, 114, 139-140, 141, 142-143, 151.

358. - The Astrology of Personality. New York: Lucis Publishing Co., 1936; reprint ed., Garden City, N.Y.: Double- day & Co., 1970. pp. 209-210, 233, 238, 246, 272, 322, 421.

359. . Birth patterns for a new humanity: a study of astrological cycles structuring the present world crisis. The Netherlands: Servire-Wassenar, 1969. pp. 42, 53, 102, 114, 139, 142-4, 151, 191, 211.

360. Cycle of Culture and Sacrifice. Carmel, Calif: Hamsa Publications, 1929.

361. Gifts of the Spirit. Los Angeles: New Age Publishing Co., 1946. p. 128.

362. - New Mansions for New Men. New York: Lucis Publishing Co., 1938. p. 236.

363. -Rania, an Epic Narrative. San Fran- cisco: Unity Press, 1973. pp. 176-178.

364. The Sun Is Also a Star. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1975. p. 97.

365. The Sun Is Also Astral. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1975. p. 97.

366. Synthetic Drama As a Seed of Civilization. Oceano, Calif.: Harbinson & Harbinson.

367. Rumble, Rev. Dr. Leslie and Carty, Rev. Charles Mortimer. Radio Replies. 3 vols. St. Paul, Minn.: Radio Replies Press, 1942. Vol. 3: p. 42.

350. Richards, J. R. The Religion of the Bahá’ís. 368. Rutland, Jonathan. Looking at Israel.--BLANK-- [Page 589]

BAHÁ’Í BIBLIOGRAPHY

London: Adam & Charles Black; Philadelphia: J. B. Lippencott Co., 1970.

369. Rypka, J. History of Iranian Literature. Dordrecht, Holland: D. Reidel Publishing Co., 1968. p. 374.

370. Saghaphi, Mirza Mahmoud Khan. In the Imperial Shadow. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran & Co., 1926. p. 400.

371. St. John, Robert and editors of Life. Israel. New York: Time, 1962. pp. 129-130, 131.

372. Samuel, Viscount Herbert Louis. Belief and Action. London: Cassel & Co., 1937.

373. Sasek, Miroslav. This is Israel. Italy: Printed by Fratelli Fabbri editori, 1962; reprint ed., 1966. 27, 33.

Children's book of drawings with captions: Shrine of the Bab, page 27; view of Bay of Haifa from Mt. Carmel showing Shrine of the Bab and Bahá’í Archives building which are not identified.

374. Savage, Minot J. The Passing and the Permanent in Religion. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1901. p. 147.

375. Schnapper, Edith B., comp. One in All. Wisdom of the East series. London: John Murray, 1952. pp. xv, 15-16, 30-31, 45-46, 62-63, 78, 92-93, 109-110, 126-127, 142-143, 149.

376. Searight, Sarah. The British in the Middle East. London: Wiedenfeld & Nicholson, 1969; New York: Athenum, 1969. pp. 81-82, 142.

377. Sedych, Andrei. This Land is Israel. New York: Macmillan Co., 1967. pp. 68-71.

Photo of Shrine of the Bab, pages 69 and 86.

378. Seitz, William C. Mark Tobey. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1962. pp. 10, 12-15, 44, 45, 47, 50, 90, 91.

379. Sell, Edward. Bahaism. Islam series. London: Madras & Colombo: Christian Literature Society for India, 1912.

380. The Faith of Islam. London: Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge, 1920. pp. 184-209.

381. Shabaz, Absalom D. Land of the Lion and the Sun. Madison, Wis.: by the author, 1901 and n.d. pp. 49-51.

1901 edition has photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 51. Undated edition has an illustration of 'Mohammed and the Koran' on page 51 in its place.

382. Sharma, Roshan Lal. Holy Men and Holy Cows. New York: Exposition Press, 1968. pp. 163-164.

383. Shedd, W. A. 'Second Study'. The Vital Forces of Christianity and Islam. J. H. Golden, ed. London: Humphrey Milford, 1915. pp. 51-52, 57, 62, 63, 74.

384. Shephard, Judy and Rosenfeld, Alvin. Ticket to Israel. New York: Rhinehart & Co., 1952. pp. 202, 218, 230.

385. Sheil, Lady. Glimpses of Life and Manners in Persia. London: John Murray, 1856. pp. 176-181, 272-282.

386. Shimoni, Yaacov and Levine, Evyatar. Political Dictionary of the Middle East in the 20th Century. Jerusalem: Jerusalem Publishing House, 1972. p. 63.

Photo of Shrine of the Bab, page 63.

387. Shuster, W. Morgan. The Strangling of Persia. New York: Century Co., 1912. pp. 21-22.

388. Siddiqi, Aslam. Modernization Menaces Muslims. Lahore: E. Muhammad Ashraf, 1974. pp. 63, 277.

389. Sinclair, Upton. The Profits of Religion. Pasadena, Calif.: Upton Sinclair, 1918; New York: Vanguard Press, 1927. p. 254.

390. Singer, Caroline and Baldridge, Cyrus LeRoy. Half the World is Isfahan. New York: Oxford University Press, 1936. p. 36.

391. Skinner, Clarence R. A Religion for Greatness. Boston: Murray Press, 1945.

392. Smart, Ninian. The Religious Experience. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1976. pp. 22, 435-436.

393. The Religious Experience of Mankind. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1969. pp. 417-418.

394. Smith, R. Bosworth. Mohammed and Mohammedanism. London: Smith Elder & Co., 1874; New York: Harper & Bros., 1875.

395. Smith, Wilfred Cantwell. Islam in Modern History. Princeton University Press, 1957. pp. 135, 153.

396. Solomon, Victor. A Handbook of Conversions to the Religions of the World. New York: Stravon Educational Press, 1965. pp. 362-367.

Photo of Bahá’í International Archives and Shrine of the Bab, page 364 [Page 590]and House of Worship, Wilmette, page 366.

397. Soper, Edmund Davison. The Religions of Mankind. New York: Abingdon- Cokesbury, 1938. pp. 311-312; 3d rev. ed., 1951. p. 223.

398. Speer, Robert Elliott. The Finality of Jesus Christ. Westwood, N. J.: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1933.

399. The Light of the World. West Medford, Mass.: Central Committee on the United Study of Missions, 1911. pp. 214-216.

400.. Missionary Principles and Prac- tices. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1902.

401. Missions and Modern History. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1904. Vol. I: pp. 121-182.

402. The Unfinished Task of Foreign Missions. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1926.

403. Spengler, Oswald. The Decline of the West-Perspectives of World History. 2 vols. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1928. p. 228. The abridged edtion has no Bahá’í mention.

404. Spiegelberg, Frederic. Living Religions of the World. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1956. pp. 419-421.

405. Stark, Freya. Baghdad Sketches. Lon- don: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1938 and J. Murray, 1939.

406. Steiner, M. J. Inside Pan-Arabia. Chicago: Packart, 1947. p. 211.

407. Stevenson, Dwight Eshelman. Faiths That Compete for My Loyalty. St. Louis, Mo.: Christian Board of Publication, 1948. pp. 71-72.

408. Stewart, George Rippey. American Way of Life. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1954. pp. 67, 69.

409. Stoddard, Lothrop. The New World of Islam. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1922. p. 324.

410. Storer, Rev. J. Thoughts That Build. New York: Macmillan Co., 1924.

411. Storrs, Sir Ronald. Orientations. Lon- don: Nicholson & Watson, 1939. pp. 67, 322, 332.

412. . The Memories of Sir Ronald Storrs. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1937. pp. 67, 322, 332. American title of above 'Orientations'.

413. Strachan, Francoise, ed. The Aquarian Guide to Occult, Mystical, Religious, Magical London and Around. London: Aquarian Press, 1970. pp. 5-6.

414. Sweet, William Warren. The Story of Religion in America. New York: Harper & Bros., 1930, 1939. p. 626.

415. Swift, A. C. Religion Today. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1933.

416. Sykes, Percy Molsworth. A History of Persia. 2 vols. London: Macmillan & Co., 1915. Vol. 2: pp. 443-447; rev. ed., 1930. Vol. 2: pp. 341-345.

417. . Persia. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1922. pp. 127-129.

418. . Ten Thousand Miles in Persia or Eight Years in Iran. London: John Mur- ray, 1902.

419. Thielman, Baron Max von. Journey in the Caucasus, Persia and Turkey in Asia. 2 vols. London: n.p., 1875. Vol. 1: p. 262; Vol. 2: pp. 52, 90-91.

420. Thompson, Ernest. Spiritualism and the Evolution of Religion. London: Psychic Book Club, 1953.

421. Tillyard. Aelfrida. Spiritual Exercises and Their Results. New York: Macmillan Co., 1927; London: Society for Promot- ing Christian Knowledge, 1927.

422. Titus, Murray T. The Young Moslem Looks at Life. New York: Friendship Press, 1937. pp. 61-62.

423. Todd, A. J. Theories of Social Progress. New York: Macmillan Co., 1924.

424. Tolstoi, Leo Nikolaevich. Kingdom of God, What is Art? What is Religion? New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1899. p. 353.

425. . What is Religion? And Other New Articles and Letters. Trans. V. Tchertkoff and A. C. Fifield. London: Free Age Press, 1902. p. 174.

426. Toynbee, Arnold J. Christianity among the Religions of the World. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1957. p. 104.

427. . Civilization on Trial. New York: Oxford University Press, 1948. p. 204.

428. - A Study of History. London: Oxford University Press, 1939. Vol. 5: p. 174.

429. Tritton, Arthur Stanley. Islam; Beliefs and Practices. London: Hutchinson [Page 591]University Library, 1954. pp. 157-158.

430. Trout, David M. Religious Behavior. New York: Macmillan Co., 1931. pp. 281-282.

431. Tweedie, Ethel Brilliana ("Mrs. Alec-Tweedie'). Mainly East. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1922. pp. 252-253; London: Hutchinson & Co., 1922.

432. Underhill, Evelyn. The Life of the Spirit and the Life Today. London: Wetheren & Co., 1925.

433. Upton, Joseph M. The History of Modern Iran, an Interpretation. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1965. pp. 10-11.

434. Uris, Leon. Exodus Revisited. New York: Doubleday, 1960. Photo of Bahá’í International Archives building, page 32.

435. Ussher, John. Journey from London to Persepolis. London: n.p., 1865. pp. 120, 627--629.

436. Van Baalen, Jan Karl. The Chaos of cults: a study in present-day isms. 4th rev. & enl. ed. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1973. pp. 146-61.

437. Vanderbilt, Cornelius, Jr. Man of the World, My Life on Five Continents. New York: Crown Publishers, 1959. pp. 311-312, 317-318, 320-321.

438. Van Passen, Pierre. Days of Our Years. New York: Hillman-Curl, 1939. p. 30.

439. Van Sommers, Tess. Religions in Australia. PIX Series Extended to 41 Beliefs. Adelaide, Australia: Rigby, 1966. pp. 17-23. Photo of interior of Bahá’í House of Worship, Sydney, Australia, page 17.

440. Vaughan, George. Temple and Towers (A Survey of the World's Moral Outlook). Boston: Meador Publishing Co., 1941. pp. 429-431, 551-552. Photo of Horace Holley facing page 336.

441. Vaughan, John Gaines. Religion, a Comparative Study. Cincinnati, O.: Abingdon Press, 1919.

442. Vilnay, Zev. The Guide to Israel. Jerusalem: By the author, 3d rev. ed., 1958; 3d rev. ed., 1960. pp. 28, 346-347, 359.

443. Vines, Ernest M. Gems of the East, or God in every nation. Sydney: West Publishing Corp., 1970. pp. 79-90.

444. Vitzetelly, Frank H. Who? When? Where? What? New York: Funk & Wagnalls Co., 1920 and 1925. Dictionary: 'Bahá’í', page 8.

445. Voss, Carl Hermann. In Search of Meaning. Cleveland, O.: World Publishing Co., 1968. pp. 158-159.

- The Universal God. Cleveland, O.: World Publishing Co., 1953. p. 269.

447. Vreeland, Herbert H. Iran. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1957. pp. 101, 254, 296, 297.

448. Waamani, Israel T. Israel: A Profile. New York: Praeger, 1972. pp. 9, 78.

449. Wadia, Ardaser Sorabjee N. The Message of Mohammed. London: J. M. Dent & Sons, 1923. p. 141.

450. Wagar, W. Warren. The City of Man: Prophecies of a World Civilization in Twentieth-Century Thought. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1963. pp. 7, 117-120, 300.

451. . Building the City of Man. New York: Grossman Publishers, 1971. p. 56.

452. Wallis, Wilson D. Messiahs: Christian and Pagan. Boston: Richard G. Badger, 1918. pp. 111-116, 228-229.

453. Walstrum, Mary Price. The Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: Reminiscences. Philadelphia: Dorrance & Co., 1935.

454. Warren, Edith, comp. Important American Poets and Songwriters. 1947. p. 141.

455. Watson, Robert Grant. A History of Persia. London: Smith Elder & Co., 1866. pp. 347-352, 360-362, 385-395, 407-410.

456. Watt, W. Montgomery. Islamic Surveys. Vol. 1: Islamic Philosophy and Theology. Edinburgh: University Press, 1962. pp. 171, 188.

457. Watts, Harold H. The Modern Reader's Guide to Religion. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1964. pp. 501, 584.

458. Welch, Anthony. Calligraphy in the arts of the Muslim world. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. pp. 168-9.

459. Whalen, William J. Faiths for the Few. Milwaukee, Wis.: Bruce Publishing Co., 1963. pp. v, vii, 36-41; mention on dust cover.

460. White, Lyman Cromwell. International Non-Governmental Organizations. New [Page 592]Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1951.

461. Whittingham, George Napier. The Home of Fadeless Splendour. New York: E.P. Dutton & Co., (1921). pp. 234-236. Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá being knigh- ted, facing page 234.

462. Widgery, Alban G. Living Religions and Modern Thought. London: Williams & Norgate, 1936. pp. 212-200.

463. Wiedyke, Robert G. and Hurd, Mary K., comps. American Concrete Institute 55 Year Index 1905-1959. Detroit, Mich.: American Concrete Institute, 1960. pp. 15, 234, 236.

464. Wilber, Donald N. Iran-Past and Pres- ent. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton Univer- sity Press, 1948. pp. 79-80.

465. Williams, David Rhys. World Religions and the Hope for Peace. Boston: Beacon Press, 1951. pp. 142-151, 203, 218, mention on dust cover.

466. Williams, Henry Smith, ed. The His- torians' History of the World. 25 vols. London: Hooper & Jackson, 1904. Vol. 24: pp. 493-494, 499.

467. Williams, John Alden, ed. Themes of Islamic Civilization. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1974. pp. 242-243.

468. Williamson, George Hunt. Road in the Sky. London: Neville Spearman, 1959.

469. - The Saucers Speak. London: Neville Spearman, 1963. p. 110.

470. Wills, C. J. In the Land of the Lion and the Sun, or Modern Persia. London: Ward Lock & Co., 1891. pp. 144, 153-156, 164, 201, 272, 317, 339.

471. Persia as It Is. London: Sampson, Low, Marston, Searle & Rivington, 1887. pp. 7-8.

472. Wilson, Sir Arnold Talbot. The Modern World. London: Ernest Benn, 1932.

473. Persia. London: Ernest Benn, 1932.

474. Wilson, Rev. Samuel Graham. Bahaism and Its Claims. New York: Fleming Revell Co., 1915.

475. Persian Life and Customs. New York: Fleming H. Revell Co., 1895. pp. 12, 62, 146, 185-186, 221.

476. Winwar, Frances. American Giant: Walt Whitman and His Times. New York: Harper, 1941.

477. Wismer, Don. The Islamic Jesus. New York: Garland Publishing Co., 1977. p. 254.

478. Wolcott, Leonard and Carolyn. Reli- gions around the World. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1967. pp. 171, 174-175, 182. Children's book illustrated by Gordon Laite.

479. Wollaston, Arthur N. The Sword of Islam. London: John Murray, 1905.

480. Wons, Anthony. Tony's Scrap Book. Chicago: Reilly & Lee, 1932. p. 41.

481. Wood, Clement. The Outline of Man's Knowledge. New York: Grosset & Dun- lap, 1927. p. 517.

482. Wright, Denis. The English amongst the Persians. London: Heinemann, 1977. pp. 44, 120, 164.

483. Wysner, Gloria M. Near East Panorama. New York: Friendship Press, 1950. pp. 59-60.

484. Young, Barbara. This Man from Leba- non. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1945; 1961, pp. 68-69.

485. Younghusband, Sir Francis. The Gleam. London: John Murray, 1923. pp. 182-214.

486. Modern Mystics. London: John Murray, 1935; New Hyde Park, N.Y.: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1935. pp. 97-142, 252, 253.

487. A Venture of Faith Being a Description of the World Congress of Faiths Held in London, 1936. London: Michael Joseph, 1937. pp. 50, 152-156. Yonan, Isaac Malek. The Beloved Physi- cian of Teheran. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1934. pp. 88-90.

488.

489. Zwemer, Samuel M. Heirs of the Prophets. Chicago: Moody Press, 1946. p. 118.

490. Islam, a Challenge to Faith. New York: Student Volunteer Movement for Foreign Missions, 1907. pp. 147-149, 248.

491. The Moslem World. Cleveland, O.: J. H. Lamb, 1908. p. 200; Boston: United Society of Christian Endeavor, 1908. p. 200.

492. Zwemer, Samuel M. and Brown, Arthur [Page 593]J. The Nearer and Farther East. New York: Macmillan Co., 1908. p. 98. 493. Zwemer, Samuel M. et al, ed. The Mohammedan World of To-Day being Papers Read at the First Missionary Con- ference on Behalf of the Mohammedan World Held at Cairo, April 4th-9th, 1906. New York: Young People's Mis- sionary Movement, 1906. pp. 17, 115, 116, 117-118, 121, 129-130.

E. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH-LANGUAGE ITEMS BY BAHÁ’ÍS IN WHICH MENTION IS MADE OF THE BAHÁ’Í FAITH (published under non-Bahá’í auspices)

Baker, Richard St. Barbe. I Planted Trees. Gillespie, Dizzy. To Be or Not... to Bop. London: Lutterworth, 1944. Garden City: Doubleday, 1979. - My Life My Trees. London: Lutter- Hayden, Robert. Angle of Ascent. New York: worth, 1970. Liveright, 1975. Banani, Amin. The Modernization of Iran, 1921-1941. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1961. Bausani, Alessandro. The Persians from the Earliest Days to the Twentieth Century. Lon- don: Elek, 1971. Cobb, Stanwood. The Real Turk. Boston: Pil- grim Press, 1914. Cole, W. Owen, ed. World Religions: a Hand- book for Teachers. London: Commission for Racial Equality, 1977. Article by Philip Hainsworth. Danner, Margaret Esse. The Down of a Thistle. Waukesha: Country Beautiful, 1976. Dunne, Finley P., ed. World Religions Speak on the 'Relevance of Religion to the Modern World.' The Hague: Dr. W. Junk, 1970. Article by Dr. H. M. Munje. Fozdar, Jamshed. The God of Buddha. New York: Asia Publishing House, 1973. The Night-Blooming Cereus. London: Paul Breman, 1973. Kazemzadeh, Firuz. Russia and Britain in Per- sia, 1864-1914. New Haven: Yale Univer- sity Press, 1968. Leach, Bernard. Beyond East and West. Lon- don: Faber and Faber, 1978. Drawings, Verse and Belief. London: Jupiter Books, 1973. Murchie, Guy. The Seven Mysteries of Life. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1978. Song of the Sky, Cambridge: Riverside Press, 1954. Prickett, John, ed. Initiation Rites. London: Lutterworth Educational, 1978. Article by Philip Hainsworth. Scrutton, Robert. The Other Atlantis. Jersey: Neville Spearman, 1977. Vail, Albert R. and Vail, Emily McClellan. Heroic Lives. Boston: Beacon Press, 1917.

F. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THESES RELATING TO THE BAHÁ’Í FAITH

Åsander, Margit. (1974) Bahá’í-Ismen. Stock- holms Universitet, Religionshistoriska Institutionen. Baghdadi, Guita. (1977) Religion, Santé et Medecine: Place de la Foi Bahá’í. M.D., Université de Grenoble. Behroozi, Shahla B. (1971) The Role of Bahá’í Faith in the Social Development of Bahá’í Youth in Los Baños Laguna. Masters of Social Work, University of the Philippines. Berger, Peter L. (1954) From Sect to Church: A Sociological Interpretation of the Bahá’í Movement. Ph.D., New York: New School of Social Research. Beveridge, Kent. (1977) Die gesellschaft- spolitische Rolle der Bahá’í-Verwaltung- sordnung innerhalb der Gemeinschaft der Bahá’í, unter besondere Betrachtung der zwei leitenden Institutionen (The sociopolitical role of the Bahá’í administrative order inside [Page 594]the Bahá’í community, with special reference to its two leading institutions). Doctorate, Vienna.

Garrigues, Steve L. (1976) The Bahá’ís of Malwa: Identity and change among the Urban Bahá’ís of Malwa. Ph.D., Lucknow University.

Hakim, Christine. (1971) Naissance de la Foi Bahá’íe, et Son Processus Social. M.A., Université de Nanterre.

Hakim-Samandari, Christine. (1979) Etude d'une Institution Religieuse: 'l'Ordre 'T'Ordre Administratif Bahá’í et la communauté des fidèles. Ph.D., Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales.

Izadinia, Foad. (1977) Centro de Estudios de Post Grado para Panamá. M.A., Universidad de Panamá, Facultad de Arquitectura.

Jockel, Rudolf. (1951) Die Glaubenslehren der Bahá’í-Religion. Ph.D., University of Tübingen.

Johnson, Vernon Elvin. (1974) An Historical Analysis of Critical Transformations in the Evolution of the Bahá’í World Faith. Ph.D., Baylor University, Texas.

Kahn, Sandra Santolucito. (1977) Encounter of Two Myths: Bahá’í and Christian in the Rural American South-A Study in Transmythicization. Ph.D., University of California at Santa Barbara.

Khazei, S. (1963) Finanzpolitische Probleme in der 'Neuen Weltordnung' auf Grund der Bahá’í-Lehre (Finance-political problems in the 'New World Order' based on the Bahá’í teachings). Doctorate, Innsbruck.

Loi, Luciano. (1974) Alcuni Aspetti della Fede di Bahá’u’lláh (Some aspects of the faith of Bahá’u’lláh). Università degli Studi di Cagliari Facoltà di Scienze Politiche.

Mahmoudi, Jalil. (1966) A Sociological Analysis of the Bahá’í Movement. Ph.D., University of Utah.

Martin, James Douglas. (1967) The Life and Work of Sarah Jane Farmer, 1847-1916. M.A. University of Waterloo, Ontario.

McEoin, Denis. (1977) A Revised Survey of the Sources for Early Bábí Doctrine and History. Fellowship Dissertation, King's College, Cambridge.

McEoin, Denis. (1979) From Shaykhism to Babism: a Study in Charismatic Renewal in Shi'i Islam. Ph.D., Cambridge University.

Murthi, R. Ganesa. (1969) The Growth of the Bahá’í Faith in Malaysia. University of Malaya.

Ong, Henry. (1978) Yan Kee Leong: a Biography of a Malaysian Cartoonist. M.S., Iowa State University.

Parnian, Shahnaz. (1974) A Study of the Methods of Communication Used by Bahá’ís in Educating Persons to Adopt Bahá’í Faith. B.A. University of Rajasthan.

Philipp, Mangol Bayat. (1971) Mirza Aqa Khān Kirmani: 19th C Persian Revolutionary Thinker. Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles.

Rafati, Vahid. (1979) The Development of Shaykhí Thought in Shi'i Islám. Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles.

Ross, Margaret J. (1979) Some Aspects of the Bahá’í Faith in New Zealand. M.A., University of Auckland.

Rost, Harry. (1969) The Possible Nature and Establishment of Bahá’í Universities and Colleges Based Upon a Study of Bahá’í Literature. D.Ed., University of South Dakota.

Schaefer, Udo. (1957) Die Grundlagen der Verwaltungsordnung der Bahá’í (The foundations of the Bahá’í administrative order). Doctorate, Heidelberg.

Schmitz, Anke. (1973) Das Prophetenverständnis der Bahá’í-Religion aus der Sicht ihrer Gründer. M.A., Mülheim-Ruhr.

Scholl, Steven D. (1980) Imāmi Shi'ism and the Bahá’í Faith: a Preliminary Study. B.A., University of Oregon.

Szepesi, Angela. (1968) A Proposed World Order: Bahá’í Teachings and Institutions. M.A., Laval University, Quebec.

Ward, Allan Lucius. (1960) An Historical Study of the North American Speaking Tour of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá and a Rhetorical Analysis of His Addresses. Ph.D., Ohio University.

Yazdani, Farhan. (1976) Les Deux Ailes d'un Oiseau, ou: une introduction à la Conception Bahá’íe de la Santé. M.D., Université de Lyon.

Zabih, M. (1949) Die Lösung der sozialen Frage auf Grund der Bahá’í-Lehren (The solution to the social question according to the Bahá’í teachings). Doctorate, Stuttgart.